ngan lan khac ten em

link down IGI2 free full - only 1 link

LINK http://ktviet.net/forum/redirector.php?s=bc4efc4bda30c99e00b06ed890d266aa&url=http%3A%2F%2Fmega.1280.com%2Ffile%2F9SY0G387%2F

How to buy a lap top the smart way?

The Bottom Line think twice and buy once , if you know what i mean.

Hi there, the first thing before I go on writing my opinion , I would like to thank you as a reader ,especially if you are one of those who keep track of what I am writing.
Another thing I would really appreciate when you rate my opinions , try to be honest in judging my opinion , it does not matter if you agree with me or not, as long you are honest , and I really respect your point of view , no matter what.
I would really appreciate a feedback so I can improve myself and improve my opinions to help you as a reader , who really wants an honest , good opinion.
Ok today I will be talking about buying a computer and to be precise, lap tops.
Before buying a computer you should not rush , you should do your homework , which will be a good research. The first question you have to ask your self is what do I need a computer for ? Is it for fun and entertainment?, studying and making projects ?, programming and web page designing? The more you are honest with yourself, the more you will buy the right thing that is suitable for you.
Another way to help you make a buying decision , is how much are you willing to pay? I would love to have a Jaguar ( fancy car) but because I know that my budget is limited , a Jaguar is out of the question. Yes, I feel sad about it but that's reality and you have to face it .
Even if I can afford a Jaguar , I still have to put in mind , that I will need to buy parts in the long run and pay labour and tax , so the question now is , can I afford looking after a Jaguar?
In my case , the answer is no, so, I will stick with a Toyota which on the long run , I will be able to afford parts , labour and tax.
Now you are wondering , what a Jaguar and a Toyota got to do with buying a computer? I think the answer is simple , computers are a commodity like cars , you as a buyer have to understand that buying a computer is not the end of the line , there are still hidden costs coming ahead and you have to put that in mind.
Another piece of advice , don't buy something which you will not use it in the long run. Ask yourself how many times you have bought things , then you played with it for a while , then it will end up on a shelf collecting dust....hehehe
Take me for example, I have bought a Zip drive , I hardly use it after I bought my cd burner (more convenient storage device) , now if I sell that Zip drive I will lose on it, simply because my Zip drive is 100MB and the new Zip drives are 250 MB and there is even now the new jazz drives that can handle up to couple Gigs.
Bottom line for that point is, you have to realize that computers and computers hardware utilities are developing very fast , prices of older stuff in the same field are going down and you as a consumer , lose big time , because you did not put that in consideration!
Depreciation( the lose in price value of an item due to usage) of value is a very strong point that many buyers don't put in to consideration.
So, like I said, do your homework good before buying the item or the computer.
To do research on computers , you can come over here at epinions , or try out that site www.zdtv.com , they have lots of tips on computers (desk top) and lap top.
Lap top computers have one advantage on desk top computers , mobility.
Mobility is very essential to businessmen and professionals ,but on the other hand buying a lap top, you lose on some speed and quality , considering you are paying the same amount of money.
Take me for example I bought a lap top (266Mhz pentium mmx , 4GB hard drive, 24x Cdrom) for 2700 Canadian dollars two years ago. My brother in law bought his PC desk top (850Mhz , 20GB hard drive, dvd cd rom , 8x4x4x cd burner ,17' super vga screen) for only 2300 Canadian dollars.
Well, as you see his superiority of money value and quality !
Another thing you have to put in mind if you live in the country side like me , the service for desk top computers is much easier and affordable comparing to the lap top computers that you have to send over and pay high price to parts and labour.
So, I had to travel 4 hours to the nearest big city to fix my PC or send it by courier, but my brother in law can easily fix his PC in town 45 minutes away!

I think you should also read my opinion about Toshiba lap tops , in case you want to share my experience with my lap top.
Another thing you should put in mind is , which way you gonna buy it , will you pay the whole amount for it or will you lease it?
What happened with me was a little bit painful because I made a wrong decision at the time I bought my lap top. One day I decided to buy a new lap top , I went to a nice store in town (Soundafex), the salesman was very friendly and we were exchanging ideas and opinions, I was so happy getting that PC, I leased my lap top ,I signed a void check for them so that they the financing company can withdraw from my bank account, of course because I live near a little town , they had to fax my void check to the main office (financing company) in Toronto. So, I was paying a big amount of money on interest. One day I decided to calculate how much I will be paying in total after I finish paying out my computer.
I was paying 109.96 Canadian dollars per month for 36 months.
So, after calculating, I found out I was paying almost 50% extra after I pay off my computer , which was not smart!
Another thing also happened to me is that when I called the financing company to find out how much exactly I was paying in interest and how did they calculate the amount I will be paying per month , I got the b.i.t.c.h.y attitude , as if it's not my business. Then her final answer was, I don't know and the accountants who look after that stuff are not available. I tried several times to call them and discuss the same thing but I got the same answer which really p.i.s.s.e.d me off.
I did not realize that I was paying a compound interest till it was too late to go back.
I thought that say the interest was 20% , I thought I will be paying 20% extra on the total amount of the PC , but I realized that I was paying way lot than that , they call it a compound interest and it adds up , leading up to, you are paying about 50 % extra on the total value of the PC.
I.e. If the total price of the PC is $1 you will be paying $1.5 after you pay out your PC. In little figures its not much but when we talk $2700 , its $1350 , another computer at that!
I even went to a bank to ask for an accountants opinion, as I did not understand, how they mention in the contract that the finance is say, 20% and I end up paying 50% extra , but the accountant , mentioned that every company have it's own formula for such calculations and he could not really help me!
The only guy who helped me figuring out that compound interest was a cool guy called Lloyd which was working in Soundafex at that time. My salesman went mean on me and said that he doesn't know about that issue! (which was not an expected attitude from a friendly salesman at the time I bought the computer), leaving me lost in the store without even caring. (they got their money and now you get the treatment).
Me trying to get back at that bad woman(I don't want to use bad words so I won't offend any respected reader like you), which was my customer service. I stopped paying for a while and to make sure that they will not be able to take their money. I withdrew all the money I got in the bank account leaving only couple dollars to keep my account open , just to get there attention I explained that to them on the phone later and I was willing to pay , all I asked for, was how did they calculated my interest but after we reached an agreement and I had to go to town to send a void check and pay the bank extra charge for (insufficient funds). As a result I had to pay extra for late fees , after that I went to another series of frustration , instead of them calling me and explaining things , they decided to repossess my PC, though I have paid them, through the bank and I had to go specially to town to send them a void check. I had to pay the repo man (who should repossess the computer ) instead of paying them directly through the bank. I had to send another void check to the repo man, I had to do couple trips to town , getting a void check and faxing it. The money I gave him which was $400 Canadian dollars (paying for 3 months) reached them as $200 , which really made me mad.
When I called them back to get an explanation they said the money you sent does not reach in the same value amount. I.e. if you send $50 through the bank it does not reach them as $50 but say $35 as the bank charge service!
It did not make any sense to me, I send $400 , how could it reach them $200?( I guess the repo man took a nice share).
In the end to save my head from headache with them I called the finance company and I made a deal with them so I can pay the whole amount , and pay it out with cash. I ended paying more than the computers worth , all because I wanted to understand how they calculated the interest but since I signed an agreement with them I had to pay, or else they will ruin my credit.
Bottom line, pay your due amount on time and don't try to get them back because you will end up paying more than it's worth.
Actually the best way is to buy stuff by cash , you will save on the long run and avoid lots of frustration.
Bottom line think twice before you decide on buying , collect all the information needed ,try to understand all the terms on any lease agreement before you sign. It's a contract and you have to for fill the agreement , even if you think that you are paying too much!

Thank you for reading.
source: http://www.epinions.com

The right way to buy a car

Your no-nonsense guide to getting the right car at the right price.

Buying a car can be quite daunting. With so many makes, models and finance options available and other decisions, it can be difficult to find the deal that leaves you 100% happy.
However, the following pointers should help you make an educated decision when buying a new or used car.
Where to buy?

There are number of ways to buy a new or used car – a car dealership isn’t your only option. For example, there are independent dealers, importers, brokers, auction, online, car supermarkets or privately.

Here we weigh up the pros and cons of each of them:

Car and Independent Dealers
Using a dealer to buy your new or used car can be convenient as you can have a test drive and the salesman should be more versed in the car details as compared to say buying a car from a broker, or by buying a car online.

Dealers will offer deals such as free insurance or low-rate finance. January – traditionally a very slow month for car dealers who offer extra specials incentives to try and get your custom - is also a time where you may be able to snap up a bargain.

Most new cars come with a two or three warranty (most with breakdown cover included as well for the same period).

If you have a car to part exchange, the car dealer will normally take it as part of a deposit, which means it is off your hands without the hassle of trying to sell it privately. However, do bear in mind that you will not get full the market value for it.

However, the downside of buying from a car dealership is that their prices can be higher than elsewhere as they need to cover the cost of the showroom and staff.

And, if there aren’t any finance incentives at the dealership, choosing their finance scheme will be, in most cases, expensive.

Importers
If you a buy a car in from Europe, you do stand to save money, though in some cases, UK deals are increasingly competitive. Lower prices over here and exchange rate fluctuations mean imports aren’t quite the outstanding bargains they used to be.

Brokers
A broker is an intermediary who negotiates with a dealer on your behalf to get you a cut-price car. Car brokers use their bulk –buying power to secure discounts which they then pass on to the customer (after they’ve taken their cut of course!)

Auction
You can be sure of snapping up a bargain if you buy at auction, but it is best if you visit a few auctions before taking the plunge. Visit and learn the ropes or take a knowledgeable friend. With Auctions, you will get more legal protection at an auction than buying privately.

Car Supermarkets
Car Supermarkets offer a huge choice at competitive prices. However, there is little room for negotiation and you may get a low bid for your part-exchange and limited pre-sales checks.

Some car supermarkets also charge you extra for a warranty (if the maker’s cover has expired), a history check and road tax.

Online
This process is all carried out online. You can visit a manufacturer’s website or a specialist online car broker such as JamJar. Everything can be completed online - finding and choosing of the car, the specification options, finance options, delivery details, and, in some cases even part exchanges.

The disadvantage to this service that you can not test drive the car.

Privately
Buying privately is a risky way to get a car as you have very little legal protection should anything go wrong. Many dealers masquerade as private sellers to duck their legal responsibilities, so always check that the log book details match up.

Always take someone who knows about cars along with you and always view any private car in broad daylight when any dinks, dents and damage are visible!

Financing your new car

Once you’ve decided where to buy your next car, you need to think about finance.

Very few of us buy a car with cash, and borrowing money is the only option. However, there are so many different types of finance to choose from, it can be difficult knowing which is the right one for you.

Hire Purchase (HP)
HP is where a deposit is followed by regular monthly repayment. However, the car is owned by the finance company until the loan is repaid. So, if you fail to maintain the finance payments you could lose the vehicle.

Hire Purchase is fairly easy to obtain and widely available, and with it you also get additional protection under the Consumer Credit Act

Personal Loan (as opposed to Manufacturer’s finance)
A personal loan is probably the cheapest way to buy a new or used car as personal loan providers tend to offer lower interest rates than traditional other car financing methods. Also, as you are classed as a ‘cash purchaser’ (because you already have the finance in place) you are in a strong position to negotiate a good deal.

As the loan will not be secured on the vehicle, the car is owned outright by you.

Manufacturers schemes
These are offered by manufacturers, dealers, finance companies and some banks for the purchase of new or nearly new cars.
More often than not, you will be paying interest at a higher interest rate than that offered on a personal loan.
With manufacturers schemes, you can part exchange your own vehicle and may also need to make a deposit. You will then have a finance agreement for the remainder of the cost of the vehicle. As with HP, if you do fail to keep up the repayments on the vehicle, it may be repossessed.

Personal Contract Purchase (PCP)
PCP schemes available from car dealers as well as banks. You pay a small deposit and a set amount of monthly payments. When the contract ends, you have three options:

• you can hand the car back and owe nothing,
• you can pay the balance (which, in any contract you sign, will be stated as the Minimum Guaranteed Future Value) and keep the car,
• you can trade it in for another, and begin a new PCP.

PCPs are best for people who like a new car every two or three years. If you are looking to keep a car long term, then personal or hire-purchase loans will be cheaper.

By now you should have a good idea of where to buy your car from and how to finance your purchase. Here are…

Ten top tips on what to do when buying …

…. from a car dealer or broker

• Do your research first – get a good idea of what car you want and how much you are prepared for pay for it and stick to the price
• When the salesman asks you what your budget is, always come in at least £500 under what you are really prepared to pay. Salesmen will always add £500 on top of your budget because by the time you are sitting down and talking about figures with him or her, it is obvious you really want the car and will find a way to finance the ‘extra’ £500
• If you are part exchanging your vehicle, check out it’s value somewhere like Parkers Price guide. While you will never get 100% market value on your p/x from a dealer, at least you have a rough figure as to what it should be.
• Always be confident, polite, but firm. You are likely to get a better deal if you come across as someone who won’t be messed about with!
• Consider buying an ex-demo. These are normally no older than three months’ old, but you can expect to get up to 15% off the new price!

….. privately
• Always take someone with you to give a second opinion – two pairs of eyes are better than one and go during broad daylight so that any scrapes or dents will show up
• Always meet the seller at their house so you can check they are genuine and that all documentation tallies up
• Test drive the car and listen out for any noises, as well to check that there are no ‘blind spots’ and that the car feels comfortable
• If you feel the car is right for you, arrange to have an independent survey carried out by one of the motoring organisations. This will highlight any flaws or potential problems.
• Always be confident, politeComputer Technology Articles, but firm. You are likely to get a better deal if you come across as someone who won’t be messed about with!

source: http://www.streetdirectory.com

way to success THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE

Praise for
The 80/20 Principle
‘Congratulations! The 80/20 Principle is terrific.’
Al Ries, bestselling author of Focus and Positioning
‘Koch is a passionate 80/20er. Read this and you will be too’.
Andrew Campbell, Ashridge Strategic Management Centre
‘Both astute and entertaining, this is an intriguing book to
help people concentrate on not wasting their lives’.
Professor Theodore Zeldin, St Anthony’s College, Oxford
‘Through multiple examples, and a punchy down-to-earth
commentary, Koch offers the first really useful advice we’ve seen in a
management book for years.’
Business Age

For a very long time, the Pareto law [the 80/20 Principle] has
lumbered the economic scene like an erratic block on the landscape:
an empirical law which nobody can explain.
Josef Steindl
God plays dice with the Universe. But they’re loaded dice. And the
main objective is to find out by what rules they were loaded and how
we can use them for our own ends.
Joseph Ford
We cannot be certain to what height the human species may aspire. . .
We may therefore safely acquiesce in the pleasing conclusion that
every age of the world has increased, and still increases, the real
wealth, the happiness, the knowledge, and perhaps the virtue, of the
human race.
Edward Gibbon
Contents
Revised Acknowledgements ix
Part One. Overture
1 Welcome to the 80/20 Principle 3
2 How to Think 80/20 21
Part Two. Corporate Success Needn’t Be a Mystery
3 The Underground Cult 45
4 Why Your Strategy is Wrong 61
5 Simple is Beautiful 89
6 Hooking the Right Customers 108
7 The Top 10 Business Uses of the 80/20 Principle 124
8 The Vital Few Give Success to You 136
Part Three. Work Less, Earn and Enjoy More
9 Being Free 147
10 Time Revolution 158
11 You Can Always Get What You Want 179
12 With a Little Help From Our Friends 191
13 Intelligent and Lazy 204
14 Money, Money, Money 224
15 The Seven Habits of Happiness 238
Part Four: Crescendo
16 Progress Regained 257
Notes and References 285
Index 299
Revised
Acknowledgements
This has been the most painful and well-researched book I have ever
written. There is a certain irony here, since the 80/20 Principle tells us that I
could have obtained a book 80 per cent as good in 20 per cent of the time.
This would certainly have been my inclination and only the reader can tell
whether the extra effort has been worthwhile. I think it has, but I have lost
all objectivity. The effort involved has been much more collective than for
any of my previous books. Don’t believe the false modesty of those who
write generously that their books have been ‘team efforts’. In the end only
an author (or authors) can write a book. But I want to thank some
individuals without whom this book would either not have existed or would
have been vastly inferior.
First is Mark Allin, then at Pitman Publishing and now my partner in
Capstone Publishing, who first had the idea of the book.
Second is Nicholas Brealey. He has put terrific insight into the book. I am
glad that the sales are rewarding this! According to the Von Manstein
principle (see Chapter 13), people like Nicholas who are smart and
industrious will not be as successful as those who are smart and lazy. To
become a real star, Nicholas must work a great deal less. I have a theory
that if he published half the number of books, and put all his effort into
these, he’d make even more money. I hope my next book will not be one to
get the axe! I am very grateful for his persistence on this book.
Sally Lansdell has been the ‘third person’ collaborating to get the
structure and text right. She is clearly a gifted publisher in her own right.
Next, my researcher on the book, Nick Oosterlinck, did a terrific job of
reconstructing the history of the 80/20 Principle from 1897 to 1997. He has
now disappeared from my radar screen, but if he would like to get in touch I
would be delighted to dispense some champagne his way.
I should also thank not only Mr Pareto for originating the 80/20 Principle,
but also Mr Juran, Mr Zipf, Mr Krugman and the unsung heroes at IBM in
the 1960s for elaborating it. And also the hundreds of people from all walks
of life and disciplines who have written magazine articles about the 80/20
Principle, many of whom I have quoted extensively as evidence of the way
in which the principle can be used. I have made every effort to acknowledge
these people in the references, but if there are any omissions please accept
my apologies and let me know so that correction can by made in any future
editions. I am particularly grateful to David Parker, lecturer in managerial
economics and business strategy at the University of Birmingham Business
School, whose work on the application of chaos theory to business strategy
is full of brilliant insights, many of which I have appropriated.
Finally, every true believer needs his trusted sceptics. Patrick Weaver and
Lee Dempsey have fulfilled this role admirably, and it is much appreciated.
Richard Koch
Cape Town
January 1998
Part One
Overture
The universe is wonky!
What is the 80/20 Principle? The 80/20 Principle tells us that in any
population, some things are likely to be much more important than
others. A good benchmark or hypothesis is that 80 per cent of results
or outputs flow from 20 per cent of causes, and sometimes from a
much smaller proportion of powerful forces.
Everyday language is a good illustration. Sir Isaac Pitman, who
invented shorthand, discovered that just 700 common words make up
two-thirds of our conversation. Including the derivatives of these
words, Pitman found that these words account for 80 per cent of
common speech. In this case, fewer than I per cent of words (the New
Oxford Shorter Oxford English Dictionary lists over half a million
words) are used 80 per cent of the time. We could call this an 80/1
principle. Similarly, over 99 per cent of talk uses fewer than 20 per
cent of words: we could call this a 99/20 relationship.
The movies illustrate the 80/20 Principle. A recent study shows that
1.3 per cent of movies earn 80 per cent of box office revenues,
producing virtually an 80/1 rule (see pages 17–18).
The 80/20 Principle is not a magic formula. Sometimes the
relationship between results and causes is closer to 70/30 than to
80/20 or 80/1. But it is very rarely true that 50 per cent of causes lead
to 50 per cent of results. The universe is predictably unbalanced. Few
things really matter.
Truly effective people and organizations batten on to the few
powerful forces at work in their worlds and turn them to their
advantage.
Read on to find out how you can do the same . . .
Welcome to the
80/20 Principle
For a very long time, the Pareto law [the 80/20 Principle] has lumbered
the economic scene like an erratic block on the landscape; an empirical
law which nobody can explain.
Josef Steindl1
The 80/20 Principle can and should be used by every intelligent person in
their daily life, by every organization, and by every social grouping and
form of society. It can help individuals and groups achieve much more, with
much less effort. The 80/20 Principle can raise personal effectiveness and
happiness. It can multiply the profitability of corporations and the
effectiveness of any organization. It even holds the key to raising the quality
and quantity of public services while cutting their cost. This book, the first
ever on the 80/20 Principle, 2 is written from a burning conviction, validated
in personal and business experience, that this principle is one of the best
ways of dealing with and transcending the pressures of modern life.
1
OVERTURE
4
What is the 80/20 Principle?
The 80/20 Principle asserts that a minority of causes, inputs or effort usually
lead to a majority of the results, outputs or rewards. Taken literally, this
means that, for example, 80 per cent of what you achieve in your job comes
from 20 per cent of the time spent. Thus for all practical purposes, fourfifths
of the effort—a dominant part of it—is largely irrelevant. This is
contrary to what people normally expect. So the 80/20 Principle states that
there is an inbuilt imbalance between causes and results, inputs and outputs,
and effort and reward. A good benchmark for this imbalance is provided by
the 80/20 relationship: a typical pattern will show that 80 per cent of outputs
result from 20 per cent of inputs; that 80 per cent of consequences flow
from 20 per cent of causes; or that 80 per cent of results come from 20 per
cent of effort. Figure 1 shows these typical patterns.
In business, many examples of the 80/20 Principle have been validated.
20 per cent of products usually account for about 80 per cent of dollar sales
value; so do 20 per cent of customers. 20 per cent of products or customers
usually also account for about 80 per cent of an organization’s profits.
In society, 20 per cent of criminals account for 80 per cent of the value of
all crime. 20 per cent of motorists cause 80 per cent of accidents. 20 per
cent of those who marry comprise 80 per cent of the divorce statistics (those
who consistently remarry and redivorce distort the statistics and give a
lopsidedly pessimistic impression of the extent of marital fidelity). 20 per
cent of children attain 80 per cent of educational qualifications available.
In the home, 20 per cent of your carpets are likely to get 80 per cent of
the wear. 20 per cent of your clothes will be worn 80 per cent of the time.
And if you have an intruder alarm, 80 per cent of the false alarms will be set
off by 20 per cent of the possible causes.
The internal combustion engine is a great tribute to the 80/20 Principle.
80 per cent of the energy is wasted in combustion and only 20 per cent gets
to the wheels; this 20 per cent of the input generates 100 per cent of the
output! 3
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
5
Figure 1. The 80/20 Principle
OVERTURE
6
Pareto’s discovery: systematic and predictable
lack of balance
The pattern underlying the 80/20 Principle was discovered in 1897, exactly
100 years ago, by Italian economist Vilfredo Pareto (1848–1923). His
discovery has since been called many names, including the Pareto Principle,
the Pareto Law, the 80/20 Rule, the Principle of Least Effort and the
Principle of Imbalance; throughout this book we will call it the 80/20
Principle. By a subterranean process of influence on many important
achievers, especially business people, computer enthusiasts and quality
engineers, the 80/20 Principle has helped to shape the modern world. Yet it
has remained one of the great secrets of our time—and even the select band
of cognoscenti who know and use the 80/20 Principle only exploit a tiny
proportion of its power.
So what did Vilfredo Pareto discover? He happened to be looking at
patterns of wealth and income in nineteenth-century England. He found that
most income and wealth went to a minority of the people in his samples.
Perhaps there was nothing very surprising in this. But he also discovered
two other facts that he thought highly significant. One was that there was a
consistent mathematical relationship between the proportion of people (as a
percentage of the total relevant population) and the amount of income or
wealth that this group enjoyed.4 To simplify, if 20 per cent of the population
enjoyed 80 per cent of the wealth,5 then you could reliably predict that 10
per cent would have, say, 65 per cent of the wealth, and 5 per cent would
have 50 per cent. The key point is not the percentages, but the fact that the
distribution of wealth across the population was predictably unbalanced.
Pareto’s other finding, one that really excited him, was that this pattern of
imbalance was repeated consistently whenever he looked at data referring to
different time periods or different countries. Whether he looked at England
in earlier times, or whatever data were available from other countries in his
own time or earlier, he found the same pattern repeating itself, over and
over again, with mathematical precision.
Was this a freak coincidence, or something that had great importance
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
7
for economics and society? Would it work if applied to sets of data relating
to things other than wealth or income? Pareto was a terrific innovator,
because before him no one had looked at two related sets of data—in this
case, the distribution of incomes or wealth, compared to the number of
income earners or property owners—and compared percentages between the
two sets of data. (Nowadays this method is commonplace, and has led to
major breakthroughs in business and economics.)
Sadly, although Pareto realized the importance and wide range of his
discovery, he was very bad at explaining it. He moved on to a series of
fascinating but rambling sociological theories, centring on the role of élites,
which were hijacked at the end of his life by Mussolini’s fascists. The
significance of the 80/20 Principle lay dormant for a generation. While a
few economists, especially in the US, 6 realized its importance, it was not
until after the Second World War that two parallel yet completely different
pioneers began to make waves with the 80/20 Principle.
1949: Zipf’s Principle of Least Effort
One of these pioneers was the Harvard professor of philology, George K
Zipf. In 1949 Zipf discovered the ‘Principle of Least Effort’, which was
actually a rediscovery and elaboration of Pareto’s principle. Zipf’s principle
said that resources (people, goods, time, skills or anything else that is
productive) tended to arrange themselves so as to minimize work, so that
approximately 20–30 per cent of any resource accounted for 70–80 per cent
of the activity related to that resource.7
Professor Zipf used population statistics, books, philology and industrial
behaviour to show the consistent recurrence of this unbalanced pattern. For
example, he analysed all the Philadelphia marriage licences granted in 1931
in a 20-block area, demonstrating that 70 per cent of the marriages occurred
between people who lived within 30 per cent of the distance.
Incidentally, Zipf also provided a scientific justification for the messy
desk for justifying clutter with another law: frequency of use draws near
OVERTURE
8
to us things that are frequently used. Intelligent secretaries have long known
that files in frequent use should not be filed!
1951: Juran’s Rule of the Vital Few and the rise of Japan
The other pioneer of the 80/20 Principle was the great quality guru,
Romanian-born US engineer Joseph Moses Juran (born 1904), the man
behind the Quality Revolution of 1950–90. He made what he alternately
called the ‘Pareto Principle’ and the ‘Rule of the Vital Few’ virtually
synonymous with the search for high product quality.
In 1924, Juran joined Western Electric, the manufacturing division of
Bell Telephone System, starting as a corporate industrial engineer and later
setting up as one of the world’s first quality consultants.
His great idea was to use the 80/20 Principle, together with other
statistical methods, to root out quality faults and improve the reliability and
value of industrial and consumer goods. Juran’s path-breaking Quality
Control Handbook was first published in 1951 and extolled the 80/20
Principle in very broad terms:
The economist Pareto found that wealth was non-uniformly distributed in
the same way [as Juran’s observations about quality losses]. Many other
instances can be found—the distribution of crime amongst criminals, the
distribution of accidents among hazardous processes, etc. Pareto’s
principle of unequal distribution applied to distribution of wealth and to
distribution of quality losses.8
No major US industrialist was interested in Juran’s theories. In 1953 he was
invited to Japan to lecture, and met a receptive audience. He stayed on to
work with several Japanese corporations, transforming the value and quality
of their consumer goods. It was only once the Japanese threat to US
industry had become apparent, after 1970, that Juran was taken seriously in
the West. He moved back to do for US industry what he had done for the
Japanese. The 80/20 Principle was at the heart of this global quality
revolution.
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
9
From the 1960s to the 1990s: progress from using the
80/20 Principle
IBM was one of the earliest and most successful corporations to spot and
use the 80/20 Principle, which helps to explain why most computer systems
specialists trained in the 1960s and 1970s are familiar with the idea.
In 1963, IBM discovered that about 80 per cent of a computer’s time is
spent executing about 20 per cent of the operating code. The company
immediately rewrote its operating software to make the most used 20 per
cent very accessible and user friendly, thus making IBM computers more
efficient and faster than competitors’ machines for the majority of
applications.
Those who developed the personal computer and its software in the next
generation, such as Apple, Lotus and Microsoft, applied the 80/20 Principle
with even more gusto to make their machines cheaper and easier to use for a
new tranche of customers, including the now celebrated ‘dummies’ who
would previously have given computers a very wide berth.
Winner take all
A century after Pareto, the implications of the 80/20 Principle have surfaced
in a recent controversy over the astronomic and ever-rising incomes going
to superstars and those very few people at the top of a growing number of
professions. Film director Steven Spielberg earned $165 million in 1994.
Joseph Jamial, the most highly paid trial lawyer, was paid $90 million.
Merely competent film directors or lawyers, of course, earn a tiny fraction
of these sums.
The twentieth century has seen massive efforts to level incomes, but
inequality, removed in one sphere, keeps popping up in another. In the USA
from 1973 to 1995, average real incomes rose by 36 per cent, yet the
comparable figure for non-supervisory workers fell by 14 per cent. During
the 1980s, all of the gains went to the top 20 per cent of earners, and a
mind-boggling 64 per cent of the total increase went to the top
OVERTURE
10
1 per cent! The ownership of shares in the US is also heavily concentrated
within a small minority of households: 5 per cent of US households own
about 75 per cent of the household sector’s equity. A similar effect may be
seen in the role of the dollar: almost 50 per cent of world trade is invoiced
in dollars, far above America’s 13 per cent share of world exports. And,
while the dollar’s share of foreign exchange reserves is 64 per cent, the ratio
of American GDP to global output is just over 20 per cent. The 80/20
Principle will always reassert itself, unless conscious, consistent and
massive efforts are made and sustained to overcome it.
Why the 80/20 Principle is so important
The reason that the 80/20 Principle is so valuable is that it is
counterintuitive. We tend to expect that all causes will have roughly the
same significance. That all customers are equally valuable. That every bit of
business, every product and every dollar of sales revenue is as good as
another. That all employees in a particular category have roughly equivalent
value. That each day or week or year we spend has the same significance.
That all our friends have roughly equal value to us. That all enquiries or
phone calls should be treated in the same way. That one university is as
good as another. That all problems have a large number of causes, so that it
is not worth isolating a few key causes. That all opportunities are of roughly
equal value, so that we treat them all equally.
We tend to assume that 50 per cent of causes or inputs will account
for 50 per cent of results or outputs. There seems to be a natural, almost
democratic, expectation that causes and results are generally equally
balanced. And, of course, sometimes they are. But this ‘50/50 fallacy’ is
one of the most inaccurate and harmful, as well as the most deeply rooted,
of our mental maps. The 80/20 Principle asserts that when two sets of
data, relating to causes and results, can be examined and analysed, the
most likely result is that there will be a pattern of
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
11
imbalance. The imbalance may be 65/35, 70/30, 75/25, 80/20, 95/5, or
99.9/0.1, or any set of numbers in between. However, the two numbers in
the comparison don’t have to add up to 100 (see page 23).
The 80/20 Principle also asserts that when we know the true relationship,
we are likely to be surprised at how unbalanced it is. Whatever the actual
level of imbalance, it is likely to exceed our prior estimate. Executives may
suspect that some customers and some products are more profitable than
others, but when the extent of the difference is proved, they are likely to be
surprised and sometimes dumbfounded. Teachers may know that the
majority of their disciplinary troubles or most truancy arises from a
minority of pupils, but if records are analysed the extent of the imbalance
will probably be larger than expected. We may feel that some of our time is
more valuable than the rest, but if we measure inputs and outputs the
disparity can still stun us.
Why should you care about the 80/20 Principle? Whether you realize it or
not, the principle applies to your life, to your social world and to the place
where you work. Understanding the 80/20 Principle gives you great insight
into what is really happening in the world around you.
The overriding message of this book is that our daily lives can be greatly
improved by using the 80/20 Principle. Each individual can be more
effective and happier. Each profit-seeking corporation can become very
much more profitable. Each non-profit organization can also deliver much
more useful outputs. Every government can ensure that its citizens benefit
much more from its existence. For everyone and every institution, it is
possible to obtain much more that is of value, and avoid what has negative
value, with much less input of effort, expense or investment.
At the heart of this progress is a process of substitution. Resources that
have weak effects in any particular use are not used, or are used sparingly.
Resources that have powerful effects are used as much as possible. Every
resource is ideally used where it has the greatest value. Wherever possible,
weak resources are developed so that they can mimic the behaviour of the
stronger resources.
Business and markets have used this process, to great effect, for hundreds
of years. The French economist J-B Say coined the word
OVERTURE
12
around 1800, saying that ‘the entrepreneur shifts economic resources out of
an area of lower productivity into an area of higher productivity and yield’.
But one fascinating implication of the 80/20 Principle is how far businesses
and markets still are from producing optimal solutions. For example, the
80/20 Principle asserts that 20 per cent of products, or customers or
employees, are really responsible for about 80 per cent of profits. If this is
true—and detailed investigations usually confirm that some such very
unbalanced pattern exists— the state of affairs implied is very far from
being efficient or optimal. The implication is that 80 per cent of products, or
customers or employees, are only contributing 20 per cent of profits. That
there is great waste. That the most powerful resources of the company are
being held back by a majority of much less effective resources. That profits
could be multiplied if more of the best sort of products could be sold,
employees hired or customers attracted (or convinced to buy more from the
firm).
In this kind of situation one might well ask: why continue to make the 80
per cent of products that only generate 20 per cent of profits? Companies
rarely ask these questions, perhaps because to answer them would mean
very radical action: to stop doing four-fifths of what you are doing is not a trivial
change.
What J-B Say called the work of entrepreneurs, modern financiers call
arbitrage. International financial markets are very quick to correct
anomalies in valuation, for example between exchange rates. But business
organizations and individuals are generally very poor at this sort of
entrepreneurship or arbitrage, at shifting resources from where they have
weak results to where they have powerful results, or at cutting off low-value
resources and buying more high-value resources. Most of the time, we do
not realize the extent to which some resources, but only a small minority,
are super-productive—what Joseph Juran called the ‘vital few’—while the
majority—the ‘trivial many’—exhibit little productivity or else actually
have negative value. If we did realize the difference between the vital few
and the trivial many in all aspects of our lives, and if we did something
about it, we could multiply anything that we valued.
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
13
The 80/20 Principle and chaos theory
Probability theory tells us that it is virtually impossible for all the
applications of the 80/20 Principle to occur randomly, as a freak of chance.
We can only explain the principle by positing some deeper meaning or
cause that lurks behind it.
Pareto himself grappled with this issue, trying to apply a consistent
methodology to the study of society He searched for ‘theories that picture
facts of experience and observation’, for regular patterns, social laws or
‘uniformities’ that explain the behaviour of individuals and society.
Pareto’s sociology failed to find a persuasive key. He died long before the
emergence of chaos theory, which has great parallels with the 80/20
Principle and helps to explain it.
The last third of the twentieth century has seen a revolution in the way
that scientists think about the universe, overturning the prevailing wisdom
for the past 350 years. That prevailing wisdom was a machine-based and
rational view, which itself was a great advance on the mystical and random
view of the world which was held in the Middle Ages. The machine-based
view converted God from being an irrational and unpredictable force into a
more user-friendly clockmaker-engineer.
The view of the world held from the seventeenth century and still
prevalent today, except in advanced scientific circles, was immensely
comforting and useful. All phenomena were reduced to regular, predictable,
linear relationships. For example, a causes b, b causes c, and a + c cause d.
This world view enabled any individual part of the universe—the operation
of the human heart, for example, or of any individual market—to be
analysed separately, because the whole was the sum of the parts and vice
versa.
But in the second half of the twentieth century it seems much more
accurate to view the world as an evolving organism where the whole system
is more than the sum of its parts, and where relationships between the parts
are non-linear. Causes are difficult to pin down, there are complex
interdependencies between causes, and causes and effects are blurred. The
snag with linear thinking is that it doesn’t always work, it is
OVERTURE
14
an oversimplification of reality. Equilibrium is illusory or fleeting. The
universe is wonky.
Yet chaos theory, despite its name, does not say that everything is a
hopeless and incomprehensible mess. Rather, there is a self-organizing logic
lurking behind the disorder, a predictable non-linearity—something which
economist Paul Krugman has called ‘spooky’, ‘eerie’ and ‘terrifyingly
exact’. 9 The logic is more difficult to describe than to detect, and is not
totally dissimilar to the recurrence of a theme in a piece of music. Certain
characteristic patterns recur, but with infinite and unpredictable variety.
Chaos theory and the 80/20 Principle illuminate
each other
What have chaos theory and related scientific concepts got to do with the
80/20 Principle? Although no one else appears to have made the link, I
think the answer is: a great deal.
! The principle of imbalance
The common thread between chaos theory and the 80/20 Principle is the
issue of balance—or, more precisely, imbalance. Both chaos theory and the
80/20 Principle assert (with a great deal of empirical backing) that the
universe is unbalanced. They both say that the world is not linear; cause and
effect are rarely linked in an equal way. Both also place great store by selforganization:
some forces are always more forceful than others and will try
to grab more than their fair share of resources. Chaos theory helps to
explain why and how this imbalance happens by tracing a number of
developments over time.
! The universe is not a straight line
The 80/20 Principle, like chaos theory, is based around the idea of nonWELCOME
TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
15
linearity. A great deal of what happens is unimportant and can be
disregarded. Yet there are always a few forces that have an influence way
beyond their numbers. These are the forces that must be identified and
watched. If they are forces for good, we should multiply them. If they are
forces we don’t like, we need to think very carefully about how to
neutralize them. The 80/20 Principle supplies a very powerful empirical test
of non-linearity in any system: we can ask, do 20 per cent of causes lead to
80 per cent of results? Is 80 per cent of any phenomenon associated with
only 20 per cent of a related phenomenon? This is a useful method to flush
out non-linearity, but it is even more useful because it directs us to
identifying the unusually powerful forces at work.
! Feedback loops distort and disturb balance
The 80/20 Principle is also consistent with, and can be explained by
reference to, the feedback loops identified by chaos theory, whereby small
initial influences can become greatly multiplied and produce highly
unexpected results, which nevertheless can be explained in retrospect. In the
absence of feedback loops, the natural distribution of phenomena would be
50/50—inputs of a given frequency would lead to commensurate results. If
is only because of positive and negative feedback loops that causes do not
have equal results. Yet it also seems to be true that powerful positive
feedback loops only affect a small minority of the inputs. This helps to
explain why those small minority of inputs can exert so much influence.
We can see positive feedback loops operating in many areas, explaining
how it is that we typically end up with 80/20 rather than 50/50 relationships
between populations. For example, the rich get richer, not just (or mainly)
because of superior abilities, but because riches beget riches. A similar
phenomenon exists with goldfish in a pond. Even if you start with goldfish
almost exactly the same size, those that are slightly bigger become very
much bigger, because, even with only slight initial advantages in stronger
propulsion and larger mouths, they are able to capture and gobble up
disproportionate amounts of food.
OVERTURE
16
! The tipping point
Related to the idea of feedback loops is the concept of the tipping point. Up
to a certain point, a new force—whether it is a new product, a disease, a
new rock group or a new social habit such as jogging or roller-blading—
finds it difficult to make headway. A great deal of effort generates little by
way of results. At this point many pioneers give up. But if the new force
persists and can cross a certain invisible line, a small amount of additional
effort can reap huge returns. This invisible line is the tipping point.
The concept comes from the principles of epidemic theory. The tipping
point is ‘the point at which an ordinary and stable phenomenon—a lowlevel
flu outbreak—can turn into a public-health crisis’, 10 because of the
number of people who are infected and can therefore infect others. And
since the behaviour of epidemics is non-linear and they don’t behave in the
way we expect, ‘small changes—like bringing new infections down to thirty
thousand from forty thousand—can have huge effects. . . It all depends
when and how the changes are made.’11
! First come, best served
Chaos theory advocates ‘sensitive dependence on initial conditions’12—
what happens first, even something ostensibly trivial, can have a
disproportionate effect. This resonates with, and helps to explain, the 80/20
Principle. The latter states that a minority of causes exert a majority of
effects. One limitation of the 80/20 Principle, taken in isolation, is that it
always represents a snapshot of what is true now (or, more precisely, in the
very recent past when the snapshot was taken). This is where chaos theory’s
doctrine of sensitive dependence on initial conditions is helpful. A small
lead early on can turn into a larger lead or a dominant position later on, until
equilibrium is disturbed and another small force then exerts a
disproportionate influence.
A firm that, in the early stages of a market, provides a product that is 10
per cent better than its rivals may end up with 100 or 200 per cent greater
market share, even if the rivals later provide a better product. In
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
17
the early days of motoring, if 51 per cent of drivers or countries decide to
drive on the right rather than the left of the road, this will tend to become
the norm for nearly 100 per cent of road users. In the early days of using a
circular clock, if 51 per cent of clocks go what we now call ‘clockwise’
rather than ‘counter-clockwise’, this convention will become dominant,
although clocks could just as logically have moved to the left. In fact, the
clock over Florence cathedral moves counterclockwise and shows 24
hours.13 Soon after 1442 when the cathedral was built, the authorities and
clockmakers standardized on a 12-hour, ‘clockwise’ clock, because the
majority of clocks had those features. Yet if 51 per cent of clocks had ever
been like the clock over Florence cathedral, we would now be reading a 24-
hour clock backwards.
These observations regarding sensitive dependence on initial conditions
do not exactly illustrate the 80/20 Principle. The examples given involve
change over time, whereas the 80/20 Principle involves a static breakdown
of causes at any one time. Yet there is an important link between the two.
Both phenomena help to show how the universe abhors balance. In the
former case, we see a natural flight away from a 50/50 split of competing
phenomena. A 51/49 split is inherently unstable and tends to gravitate
towards a 95/5, 99/1 or even 100/0 split. Equality ends in dominance: that is
one of the messages of chaos theory. The 80/20 Principle’s message is
different yet complementary It tells us that, at any one point, a majority of
any phenomenon will be explained or caused by a minority of the actors
participating in the phenomenon. 80 per cent of the results come from 20
per cent of the causes. A few things are important; most are not.
The 80/20 Principle sorts good movies from bad
One of the most dramatic examples of the 80/20 Principle at work is with
movies. Two economists14 have just made a study of the revenues and
lifespans of 300 movies released over an 18-month period. They found that
four movies— just 1.3 per cent of the total—earned 80 per cent of box
office revenues; the other 296 movies or 98.7 per cent earned only
OVERTURE
18
20 per cent of the gross. So movies, which are a good example of
unrestricted markets at work, produce virtually an 80/1 rule, a very clear
demonstration of the principle of imbalance.
Even more intriguing is why. It transpires that movie goers behave just
like gas particles in random motion. As identified by chaos theory, gas
particles, pingpong balls or movie goers all behave at random, but produce
a predictably unbalanced result. Word of mouth, from reviews and the first
audiences, determines whether the second set of audiences will be large or
small, which determines the next set and so on. Movies like Independence
Day or Mission Impossible continue to play to packed houses, while other
‘star-studded and expensive movies, like Waterworld or Daylight, very
quickly play to smaller and smaller houses, and then none at all. This is the
80/20 Principle working with a vengeance.
A guide to this guidebook
Chapter 2 explains how you can put the 80/20 Principle into practice and
explores the distinction between 80/20 Analysis and 80/20 Thinking, both
of which are useful methods derived from the 80/20 Principle. 80/20
Analysis is a systematic, quantitative method of comparing causes and
effects. 80/20 Thinking is a broader, less precise and more intuitive
procedure, comprising the mental models and habits that enable us to
hypothesize what are the important causes of anything important in our
lives, to identify these causes, and to make sharp improvements in our
position by redeploying our resources accordingly.
Part Two: Corporate Success Needn’t be a Mystery summarizes the most
powerful business uses of the 80/20 Principle. These uses have been tried
and tested and found to be of immense value, yet remain curiously
unexploited by most of the business community. There is little in my
summary that is original, but anyone seeking major profit improvement,
whether for a small or large business, should find this a very useful primer
WELCOME TO THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
19
and the first ever to appear in a book.
Part Three: Work Less, Earn and Enjoy More shows how the 80/20
Principle can be used to raise the level at which you are operating in both
your work and personal life. This is a pioneering attempt to apply the 80/20
Principle on a novel canvas; and the attempt, although I am sure it is
imperfect and incomplete in many ways, does lead to some surprising
insights. For example, 80 per cent of the typical person’s happiness or
achievement in life occurs in a small proportion of that life. The peaks of
great personal value can usually be greatly expanded. The common view is
that we are short of time. My application of the 80/20 Principle suggests the
reverse: that we are actually awash with time and profligate in its abuse.
Part Four: Crescendo—Progress Regained draws the themes together and
positions the 80/20 Principle as the greatest secret engine of progress
available to us all. It hints at the uses that could be made of the 80/20
Principle for the public good as well as for corporate wealth creation and
personal advancement.
Why the 80/20 Principle brings good news
I want to end this introduction on a personal rather than a procedural note. I
believe that the 80/20 Principle is enormously hopeful. Certainly, the
principle brings home what may be evident anyway: that there is a tragic
amount of waste everywhere, in the way that nature operates, in business, in
society and in our own lives. If the typical pattern is for 80 per cent of
results to come from 20 per cent of inputs, it is necessarily typical too that
80 per cent, the great majority, of inputs are having only a marginal—20 per
cent—impact.
The paradox is that such waste can be wonderful news, if we can use the
80/20 Principle creatively, not just to identify and castigate low productivity
but to do something positive about it. There is enormous scope for
improvement, by rearranging and redirecting both nature and our
OVERTURE
20
own lives. Improving on nature, refusing to accept the status quo, is the
route of all progress: evolutionary, scientific, social and personal. George
Bernard Shaw put it well: ‘The reasonable man adapts himself to the world.
The unreasonable one persists in trying to adapt the world to himself.
Therefore all progress depends on the unreasonable man.’15
The implication of the 80/20 Principle is that output can be not just
increased but multiplied, if we can make the low-productivity inputs nearly
as productive as the high-productivity inputs. Successful experiments with
the 80/20 Principle in the business arena suggest that, with creativity and
determination, this leap in value can usually be made.
There are two routes to achieving this. One is to reallocate the resources
from unproductive to productive uses, the secret of all entrepreneurs down
the ages. Find a round hole for a round peg, a square hole for a square peg,
and a perfect fit for any shape in between. Experience suggests that every
resource has its ideal arena, where the resource can be tens or hundreds of
times more effective than in most other arenas.
The other route to progress—the method of scientists, doctors, preachers,
computer systems designers, educationalists and trainers—is to find ways to
make the unproductive resources more effective, even in their existing
applications; to make the weak resources behave as though they were their
more productive cousins; to mimic, if necessary by intricate rote-learning
procedures, the highly productive resources. The few things that work
fantastically well should be identified, cultivated, nurtured and multiplied.
At the same time, the waste—the majority of things that will always prove
to be of low value to man and beast—should be abandoned or severely cut
back.
As I have been writing this book and observed thousands of examples of
the 80/20 Principle, I have had my faith reinforced: faith in progress, in
great leaps forward, and in mankind’s ability, individually and collectively,
to improve the hand that nature has dealt. Joseph Ford comments: ‘God
plays dice with the universe. But they’re loaded dice. And the main
objective is to find out by what rules they were loaded and how we can use
them for our own ends.’16
The 80/20 Principle can help us achieve precisely that.
How to
Think 80/20
Chapter 1 explained the concept behind the 80/20 Principle; this chapter
will discuss how the 80/20 Principle works in practice and what it can do
for you. Two applications of the principle, 80/20 Analysis and 80/20
Thinking, provide a practical philosophy which will help you understand
and improve your life.
Definition of the 80/20 Principle
The 80/20 Principle states that there is an inbuilt imbalance between causes
and results, inputs and outputs, and effort and reward. Typically, causes,
inputs or effort divide into two categories:
! the majority, that have little impact
! a small minority, that have a major, dominant impact.
2
OVERTURE
22
Typically also, results, outputs or rewards are derived from a small
proportion of the causes, inputs or effort aimed at producing the results,
outputs or rewards.
The relationship between causes, inputs or efforts on the one hand, and
results, outputs or rewards on the other, is therefore typically unbalanced.
When this imbalance can be measured arithmetically, a good bench mark
for the imbalance is the 80/20 relationship—80 per cent of results, outputs
or rewards are derived from only 20 per cent of the causes, inputs or effort.
About 80 per cent of the world’s energy is consumed by 15 per cent of the
‘world’s population, for example.1 80 per cent of the world’s wealth is
possessed by 25 per cent of the world’s people.2 In health care, ‘20 percent
of your population base and/or 20 percent of its disease elements will
consume 80 percent of your resources’.3
Figures 2 and 3 show this 80/20 pattern. Let us imagine that a company
has 100 products and has found out that the most profitable 20 products
account for 80 per cent of all profits. In Figure 2, the bar on the left
comprises the 100 products, each occupying an equal hundredth of the
space.
Figure 2.
HOW TO THINK 80/20
23
In the bar on the right are the total profits of the company from the 100
products. Imagine that the profits from the one most profitable product are
filled in from the top of the right-hand bar downwards. Let us say that the
most profitable product makes 20 per cent of total profits. Figure 2 therefore
shows that one product, or 1 per cent of the products, occupying one
hundredth of the space on the left, makes 20 per cent of the profits. The
shaded areas represent this relationship.
If we continue counting the next most profitable product and so on down
the bar, until we have the profits from the top 20 products, we can then
shade in the right-hand bar according to how much of the total profit these
top 20 products make. We show this in Figure 3, where we see (in our
fictitious example) that these 20 products, 20 per cent of the number of
products, comprise 80 per cent of the total profits (in the shaded area).
Conversely, in the white area, we can see the flip side of this relationship:
80 per cent of the products only make, in total, 20 per cent of the profits.
The 80/20 numbers are only a benchmark, and the real relationship may
be more or less unbalanced than 80/20. The 80/20 Principle asserts,
Figure 3. A typical 80/20 pattern
OVERTURE
24
however, that in most cases the relationship is much more likely to be closer
to 80/20 than to 50/50. If all of the products in our example made the same
profit, then the relationship would be as shown in Figure 4.
The curious but crucial point is that, when such investigations are
conducted, Figure 3 turns out to be a much more typical pattern than Figure
4. Nearly always, a small proportion of total products produces a large
proportion of profits.
Of course, the exact relationship may not be 80/20. 80/20 is both a
convenient metaphor and a useful hypothesis, but it is not the only pattern.’
Sometimes, 80 per cent of the profits come from 30 per cent of the
products; sometimes 80 per cent of the profits come from 15 per cent or
even 10 per cent of the products. The numbers compared do not have to add
up to 100, but the picture usually looks unbalanced, much more like Figure
3 than Figure 4.
It is perhaps unfortunate that the numbers 80 and 20 add up to 100. This
makes the result look elegant (as, indeed, would a result of 50/50, 70/30,
99/1 or many other combinations) and it is certainly memorable, but it
makes many people think that we are dealing with just one set of data, one
100 per cent. This is not so. If 80 per cent of people are right-handed and 20
Figure 4. An unusual 50/50 pattern
HOW TO THINK 80/20
25
per cent are left-handed, this is not an 80/20 observation. To apply the 80/20
Principle you have to have two sets of data, both adding up to 100 per cent,
and one measuring a variable quantity owned, exhibited or caused by the
people or things making up the other 100 per cent.
What the 80/20 Principle can do for you
Every person I have known who has taken the 80/20 Principle seriously has
emerged with useful, and in some cases life-changing, insights. You have to
work out your own uses for the principle: they will be there if you look
creatively. Part Three (Chapters 9 to 15) will guide you on your odyssey,
but I can illustrate with some examples from my own life.
How the 80/20 Principle has helped me
When I was a raw student at Oxford, my tutor told me never to go to
lectures. ‘Books can be read far faster” he explained. ‘But never read a book
from cover to cover, except for pleasure. When you are working, find out
what the book is saying much faster than you would by reading it through.
Read the conclusion, then the introduction, then the conclusion again, then
dip lightly into any interesting bits. ‘What he was really saying was that 80
per cent of the value of a book can be found in 20 per cent or fewer of its
pages, and absorbed in 20 per cent of the time most people would take to
read it through.
I took to this study method and extended it. At Oxford there is no system
of continuous assessment and the class of degree earned depends entirely on
Finals, the examinations taken at the end of the course. I discovered from
the ‘form book’, that is by analysing past examination papers, that at least
80 per cent (sometimes 100 per cent) of an examination could be well
answered with knowledge from 20 per cent or fewer
OVERTURE
26
of the subjects that the exam was meant to cover. The examiners could
therefore be much better impressed by a student who knew an awful lot
about relatively little, rather than a fair amount about a great deal. This
insight enabled me to study very efficiently. Somehow, without working
very hard, I ended up with a congratulatory First Class degree. I used to
think this proved that Oxford dons were gullible. I now prefer to think,
perhaps improbably, that they were teaching us how the world worked.
I went to work for Shell, serving my time at a dreadful oil refinery. This
may have been good for my soul, but I rapidly realized that the best-paying
jobs, for young and inexperienced people such as I lay in management
consultancy. So I went to Philadelphia, and picked up an effortless MBA
from Wharton (scorning the boot-camp style so-called learning experience
from Harvard). I joined a leading US consultancy that on day one paid me
four times what Shell had paid me when I left. No doubt 80 per cent of the
money to be had by people of my tender age was concentrated in 20 per
cent of the jobs.
Since there were too many colleagues in the consultancy who were
smarter than me, I moved to another US strategy ‘boutique’. I identified it
because it was growing faster than the firm I had joined, yet had a much
smaller proportion of really smart people.
Who you work for is more important than what you do
Here I stumbled across many paradoxes of the 80/20 Principle. 80 per cent
of the growth in the strategy consultancy industry—then, as now, growing
like gangbusters—was being appropriated by firms that then had, in total,
fewer than 20 per cent of the industry’s professional staff. 80 per cent of
rapid promotions were also available in just a handful of firms. Believe me,
talent had very little to do with it. When I left the first strategy firm and
joined the second, I raised the average level of intelligence in both.
Yet the puzzling thing was that my new colleagues were more effective
than my old ones. Why? They didn’t work any harder. But they
HOW TO THINK 80/20
27
followed the 80/20Principle in two key ways. First, they realized that for
most firms, 80 per cent of profits come from 20 per cent of clients. In the
consulting industry that means two things: large clients and long-term
clients. Large clients give large assignments, which means you can use a
higher proportion of lower-cost, younger consultants. Long-term client
relationships create trust and raise the cost to the client of switching to
another consulting firm. Long-term clients tend not to be price sensitive.
In most consulting firms, the real excitement comes from winning new
clients. In my new firm, the real heroes were those who worked on the
largest existing clients for the longest possible time. They did this by
cultivating the top bosses of those client corporations.
The second key insight the consulting firm had was that in any client, 80
per cent of the results available would flow from concentrating on the 20
per cent of most important issues. These were not necessarily the most
interesting ones from a curious consultant’s viewpoint. But, whereas our
competitors would look superficially at a whole range of issues and then
leave them for the client to act (or not) on the recommendations, we kept
plugging away at the most important issues until we had bludgeoned the
client into successful action. The clients’ profits often soared as a result, as
did our consulting budgets.
Are you working to make others rich or is it the reverse?
I soon became convinced that, for both consultants and their clients, effort
and reward were at best only loosely linked. It was better to be in the right
place than to be smart and work hard. It was best to be cunning and focus
on results rather than inputs. Acting on a few key insights produced the
goods. Being intelligent and hard working did not. Sadly, for many years,
guilt and conformity to peer-group pressure kept me from fully acting on
this lesson; I worked far too hard.
By this time, the consulting firm had several hundred professional staff
and about 30 people, including myself, who were called partners. But 80 per
cent of the profits went to one man, the founder, even though
OVERTURE
28
numerically he constituted less than 4 per cent of the partnership and a
fraction of 1 per cent of the consulting force.
Instead of continuing to enrich the founder, two other junior partners and
I spun off to set up our own firm doing exactly the same thing. We in turn
grew to have hundreds of consultants. Before long, although the three of us,
on any measure, did less than 20 per cent of the firm’s valuable work, we
enjoyed over 80 per cent of the profits. This, too, caused me guilt. After six
years I quit, selling my shares to the other partners. At this time, we had
doubled our revenues and profits every year and I was able to secure a good
price for my shares. Shortly after, the recession of 1990 hit the consulting
industry. Although I will counsel you later to give up guilt, I was lucky with
my guilt. Even those who follow the 80/20 Principle need a bit of luck, and
I have always enjoyed far more than my share.
Wealth from investment can dwarf wealth from working
With 20 per cent of the money received, I made a large investment in the
shares of one corporation, Filofax. Investment advisers were horrified. At
the time I owned about 20 shares in quoted public companies, but this one
stock, 5 per cent of the number of shares I owned, accounted for about 80
per cent of my portfolio. Fortunately, the proportion proceeded to grow still
further, as over the next three years Filofax shares multiplied several times
in value. When I sold some shares, in 1995, it was at nearly 18 times the
price I had paid for my first stake.
I made two other large investments, one in a start-up restaurant called
Belgo and the other in MSI, a hotel company that at the time owned no
hotels. Together, these three investments at cost comprised about 20 per
cent of my net worth. But they have accounted for more than 80 per cent of
my subsequent investment gains, and now comprise over 80 per cent of a
much larger net worth.
As Chapter 14 will show, 80 per cent of the increase in wealth from
most long-term portfolios comes from fewer than 20 per cent of the
investments. It is crucial to pick this 20 per cent well and then
HOW TO THINK 80/20
29
concentrate as much investment as possible into it. Conventional wisdom is
not to put all your eggs in one basket. 80/20 wisdom is to choose a basket
carefully, load all your eggs into it, and then watch it like a hawk.
How to use the 80/20 Principle
There are two ways to use the 80/20 Principle, as shown in Figure 5.
Traditionally, the 80/20 Principle has required 80/20 Analysis, a
quantitative method to establish the precise relationship between
causes/input/effort and results/outputs/rewards. This method uses the
Figure 5. Two ways to use the 80/20 Principle
OVERTURE
30
possible existence of the 80/20 relationship as a hypothesis and then gathers
the facts so that the true relationship is revealed. This is an empirical
procedure which may lead to any result ranging from 50/50 to 99.9/0.1. If
the result does demonstrate a marked imbalance between inputs and outputs
(say a 65/35 relationship or an even more unbalanced one), then normally
action is taken as a result (see below).
A new and complementary way to use the 80/20 Principle is what I call
80/20 Thinking. This requires deep thought about any issue that is
important to you, and asks you to make a judgement on whether the 80/20
Principle is working in that area. You can then act on the insight. 80/20
Thinking does not require you to collect data or actually test the hypothesis.
Consequently, 80/20 Thinking may on occasion mislead you—it is
dangerous to assume, for example, that you already know what the 20 per
cent is if you identify a relationship—but I will argue that 80/20 Thinking is
much less likely to mislead you than is conventional thinking. 80/20
Thinking is much more accessible and faster than 80/20 Analysis, although
the latter may be preferred when the issue is extremely important and you
find it difficult to be confident about an estimate.
We look first at 80/20 Analysis, and then at 80/20 Thinking.
80/20 Analysis
80/20 Analysis examines the relationship between two sets of comparable
data. One set of data is always a universe of people or objects, usually a
large number of 100 or more, that can be turned into a percentage. The other
set of data relates to some interesting characteristic of the people or objects,
that can be measured and also turned into a percentage.
For example, we might decide to look at a group of 100 friends, all of
whom are at least occasional beer drinkers, and compare how much beer
they drank last week. So far, this method of analysis is common to many
HOW TO THINK 80/20
31
statistical techniques. What makes 80/20 Analysis unique is that the
measurement ranks the second set of data in descending order of
importance, and makes comparisons between percentages in the two sets of
data.
In our example, then, we will ask all our 100 friends how many glasses of
beer they drank last week and array the answers in a table in descending
order. Figure 6 shows the top 20 and bottom 20 from the table.
80/20 Analysis can compare percentages from the two sets of data (the
friends and the amount of beer drunk). In this case, we can say that 70 per
cent of the beer was drunk by just 20 per cent of the friends. This would
therefore give us a 70/20 relationship. Figure 7 introduces an 80/20
frequency distribution chart (or 80/20 chart for short) to summarize the data
visually.
Why is this called 80/20 Analysis?
When comparing these relationships, the most frequent observation, made
long ago (probably in the 1950s), was that 80 per cent of the quantity being
measured came from 20 per cent of the people or objects. 80/20 has become
shorthand for this type of unbalanced relationship, whether or not the
precise result is 80/20 (statistically, an exact 80/20 relationship is unlikely).
It is the convention of 80/20 that it is the top 20 per cent of causes that is
cited, not the bottom. 80/20 Analysis is my name for the way that the 80/20
Principle has generally been used to date, that is in a quantitative and
empirical way, to measure possible relationships between inputs and
outputs.
We could equally well observe from the data on our beer-drinking friends
that the bottom 20 per cent of people only consumed 30 glasses, or 3 per
cent of the total. It would also be perfectly legitimate to call this a 3/20
relationship, although this is rarely done. The emphasis is nearly always on
the heavy users or causes. If a brewery was conducting a promotion, or
wanted to find out what beer drinkers thought about their range of beers, it
would be most useful to go to the top 20.
We might also want to know what percentage of our friends
OVERTURE
32
Figure 6.
HOW TO THINK 80/20
33
Figure 7. 80/20 frequency distribution chart of beer drinkers
combined to account for 80 per cent of total beer consumption. In this case,
inspection of the part of the table not displayed (the middle part) would
show that Mike G, the 28th biggest drinker with 10 glasses, took the
cumulative total to 800 glasses. We could express this relationship,
therefore, as 80/28: 80 per cent of total beer was drunk by just 28 per cent
of our friends.
It should be clear from this example that 80/20 Analysis may result in any
set of findings. Clearly, individual findings are more interesting and
potentially more useful where there is an imbalance. If, for example, we had
found that all of our friends had drunk exactly eight glasses each, the
brewery would not have been very interested in using our group for a
promotion or research. In this case, we would have had a 20/20 relationship
(20 per cent of beer was drunk by the ‘top’ 20 per cent of friends) or an
80/80 relationship (80 per cent of beer was drunk by 80 per cent of friends).
OVERTURE
34
Bar charts show 80/20 relationships best
An 80/20 Analysis is best displayed pictorially, by looking at two bars—as
is particularly appropriate for our example! (Figures 2–4 above were bar
charts.) The first bar in Figure 8 contains our 100 beer-drinking friends,
each filling 1 per cent of the space, starting with the biggest beer drinker at
the top and ending with the smallest beer drinkers at the bottom. The second
bar contains the total amount of beer drunk by each (and all) of our friends.
At any point, we can see for a given percentage of our friends, how much
beer they accounted for.
Figure 8 shows what we discovered from the table (and could also see
from Figure 7): that the top 20 per cent of beer drinkers accounted for 70
per cent of the beer drunk. The simple bars in Figure 8 take the data from
Figure 7 and display them from top to bottom instead of from left to right. It
doesn’t matter which display you prefer. If we wanted to illustrate what
percentage of our friends drank 80 per cent of the beer, we would draw the
bar charts slightly differently, as in Figure 9, to show the 80/28 relationship:
28 per cent of our friends drank 80 per cent of the beer.
Figure 8.
HOW TO THINK 80/20
35
Figure 9.
What is 80/20 Analysis used for?
Generally, to change the relationship it describes, or to make better use of
it!
One use is to concentrate on the key causes of the relationship, the 20 per
cent of inputs that lead to 80 per cent (or whatever the precise number is) of
the outputs. If the top 20 per cent of beer drinkers account for 70 per cent of
beer consumed, this is the group that a brewery should concentrate on
reaching, in order to attract as high a share as possible of the business from
the 20 per cent, and possibly also to increase their beer consumption still
further. For all practical purposes, the brewery may decide to ignore the 80
per cent of beer drinkers who only consume 30 per cent of the beer; this
simplifies the task immensely.
Similarly, a firm that finds that 80 per cent of its profits come from 20 per
cent of its customers should use this information to concentrate on keeping
that 20 per cent happy and increasing the business carried out with them.
This is much easier, as well as more rewarding, than paying
OVERTURE
36
equal attention to the whole customer group. Or, if the firm finds that 80 per
cent of its profits come from 20 per cent of its products, it should put most
of its efforts behind selling more of those products.
The same idea applies to non-business applications of 80/20 Analysis. If
you analysed the enjoyment you derived from all your leisure activities and
found that 80 per cent of the enjoyment derived from 20 per cent of the
activities, which currently took only 20 per cent of your leisure time, it
would make sense to increase the time allocation from 20 to at least 80 per
cent.
Take transport as another example. 80 per cent of traffic jams occur on 20
per cent of roads. If you drive on the same route to work each day, you will
know that roughly 80 per cent of delays usually occur at 20 per cent of the
intersections. A sensible reaction would be for traffic authorities to pay
particular attention to traffic phasing on those 20 per cent of jam-creating
intersections. While the expense of such phasing might be too much for 100
per cent of junctions 100 per cent of the time, it would be money well spent
in the key 20 per cent of locations for 20 per cent of the day.
The second main use of 80/20 Analysis is to do something about the
‘underperforming’ 80 per cent of inputs that contribute only 20 per cent of
the output. Perhaps the occasional beer drinkers can be persuaded to drink
more, for example by providing a blander product. Perhaps you could work
out ways to get greater enjoyment out of the ‘underperforming’ leisure
activities. In education, interactive teaching systems now replicate the
technique used by college professors where questions are addressed
randomly to any student, in order to combat the 80/20 rule, where 80
percent of classroom participation comes from 20 percent of the trainees. In
US shopping malls it has been found that women (some 50 per cent of the
population) account for 70 per cent of the dollar value of all purchases.4 One
way to increase the 30 per cent of sales to men might be to build stores
specifically designed for them. Although this second application of 80/20
Analysis is sometimes very useful, and has been put to great effect in
industry in improving the productivity of underperforming factories, it is
generally harder work and less rewarding than the first use.
HOW TO THINK 80/20
37
Don’t apply 80/20 Analysis in a linear way
In discussing the uses of 80/20 Analysis, we must also briefly address its
potential abuses. Like any simple and effective tool, 80/20 Analysis can
also be misunderstood, misapplied and, instead of being the means to an
unusual insight, serve as the justification for conventional thuggery. 80/20
Analysis, applied inappropriately and in a linear way, can also lead the
innocent astray—you need constantly to be vigilant against false logic.
Let me illustrate this with an example from my own new profession, the
book trade. It is easy to demonstrate that, in most times and places, about 20
per cent of book tides comprise about 80 per cent of books sold. For those
who are steeped in the 80/20 Principle, this is not surprising. It might seem
a short hop to the conclusion that bookshops should cut the range of books
they stock or, indeed, that they should concentrate largely or exclusively on
‘bestsellers’. Yet what is interesting is that in most cases, instead of sending
profits up, restricting range has sent profits down.
This does not invalidate the 80/20 Principle, for two reasons. The key
consideration is not the distribution of books sold, but what customers want.
If customers go to the trouble of visiting a bookstore they want to find a
reasonable range of books (as opposed to a kiosk or supermarket, where
they don’t expect range). Bookstores should concentrate on the 20 per cent
of customers who account for 80 per cent of their profits and find out what
those 20 per cent of customers want.
The other reason is that what matters even when considering books
(as opposed to customers) is not the distribution of sales—the 20 per cent
of books that represent 80 per cent of sales—but the distribution of
profits—the 20 per cent of titles that generate 80 per cent of profits. Very
often, these are not the socalled bestsellers, books written by well-known
authors. In fact, a study in the US revealed that ‘best sellers rep- resent
about 5% of total sales’.5 The true bestsellers are often those books that
never make it into the charts but sell a reliable quantity year in and year
out, often at high margins. As the same US research comments, ‘Core
inventory represents those books that sell season-in and season-out. They
are the “80” in the 80/20 rule, often accounting for the lion’s share of
OVERTURE
38
sales in a particular subject.’
This illustration is salutary. It does not invalidate 80/20 Analysis at all,
since the key questions should always be which customers and products
generate 80 per cent of profits. But it does show the danger of not thinking
clearly enough about how the analysis is applied. When using the 80/20
Principle, be selective and be contrarian. Don’t be seduced into thinking
that the variable that everyone else is looking at—in this case, the books on
the latest bestseller list—is what really matters. This is linear thinking. The
most valuable insight from 80/20 Analysis will always come from
examining non-linear relationships that others are neglecting. In addition,
because 80/20 Analysis is based on a freezeframe of the situation at a
particular point rather than incorporating changes over time, you must be
aware that if you inadvertently freeze the wrong or an incomplete picture,
you will get an inaccurate view.
80/20 Thinking and why it is necessary
80/20 Analysis is extremely useful. But most people are not natural
analysts, and even analysts cannot stop to investigate the data every time
they have to make a decision—it would bring life to a shuddering halt. Most
important decisions have never been made by analysis and never will be,
however clever our computers become. Therefore, if we want the 80/20
Principle to be a guide in our daily lives, we need something less analytical
and more instantly available than 80/20 Analysis. We need 80/20 Thinking.
80/20 Thinking is my phrase for the application of the 80/20
Principle to daily life, for non-quantitative applications of the principle. As
with 80/20 Analysis, we start with a hypothesis about a possible imbalance
between inputs and outputs but, instead of collecting data and analysing
them, we estimate them. 80/20 Thinking requires, and with practice enables,
us to spot the few really important things that are happening
HOW TO THINK 80/20
39
and ignore the mass of unimportant things. It teaches us to see the wood for
the trees.
80/20 Thinking is too valuable to be confined to causes where data and
analysis are perfect. For every ounce of insight generated quantitatively,
there must be many pounds of insight arrived at intuitively and
impressionistically. This is why 80/20 Thinking, although helped by data,
must not be constrained by it.
To engage in 80/20 Thinking, we must constantly ask ourselves: what is
the 20 per cent that is leading to 80 per cent? We must never assume that
we automatically know what the answer is, but take some time to think
creatively about it. What are the vital few inputs or causes, as opposed to
the trivial many? Where is the haunting melody being drowned by the
background noise?
80/20 Thinking is then used in the same way as the results from 80/20
Analysis: to change behaviour and, normally, to concentrate on the most
important 20 per cent. You know that 80/20 Thinking is working when it
multiplies effectiveness. Action resulting from 80/20 Thinking should lead
us to get much more from much less.
When we are using the 80/20 Principle we do not assume that its results
are good or bad or that the powerful forces we observe are necessarily good.
We decide whether they are good (from our own perspective), and either
determine to give the minority of powerful forces a further shove in the
right direction, or work out how to frustrate their operation.
The 80/20 Principle turns conventional
wisdom upside down
Application of the 80/20 Principle implies that we should do the
following:
OVERTURE
40
! celebrate exceptional productivity, rather than raise average efforts
! look for the short cut, rather than run the full course
! exercise control over our lives with the least possible effort.
! be selective, not exhaustive
! strive for excellence in few things, rather than good performance in
many
! delegate or outsource as much as possible in our daily lives and be
encouraged rather than penalized by tax systems to do this (use gardeners,
car mechanics, decorators and other specialists to the maximum,
instead of doing the work ourselves)
! choose our careers and employers with extraordinary care, and if possible
employ others rather than being employed ourselves
! only do the thing we are best at doing and enjoy most
! look beneath the normal texture of life to uncover ironies and oddities
! in every important sphere, work out where 20 per cent of effort can
lead to 80 per cent of returns
! calm down, work less and target a limited number of very valuable
goals where the 80/20 Principle will work for us, rather than pursuing
every available opportunity
! make the most of those few ‘lucky streaks’ in our life where we are at
our creative peak and the stars line up to guarantee success.
There are no boundaries to the 80/20 Principle
No sphere of activity is immune from the influence of the 80/20 Principle.
Like the six wise, blind Indian men who tried to discern the shape of an
elephant, most users of the 80/20 Principle only know a fraction of its scope
and power. Becoming an 80/20 thinker requires active participation and
creativity on your part. If you want to benefit from 80/20 Thinking, you
have to do it!
Now is a good time to start. If you want to begin with applications
HOW TO THINK 80/20
41
for your organization, go straight on to Part Two, which documents most of
the important business applications of the 80/20 Principle. If you are more
immediately interested in using the principle to make major improvements
in your life, skip to Part Three, a novel attempt to relate the 80/20 Principle
to the fabric of our daily lives.
Part Two
Corporate Success
Needn’t Be a Mystery
The Underground
Cult
Now we see in a mirror dimly, but then we shall see face to face. Now I
know in part; then I shall understand fully.
1 Corinthians 13:12
It is difficult to gauge the extent to which the 80/20 Principle is already
known in business. This is almost certainly the first book on the subject, yet
in my research I was easily able to find several hundred articles referring to
the use of 80/20 in all kinds of businesses, all over the world. Many
successful firms and individuals swear by the use of the 80/20 Principle,
and most holders of MBAs have heard of it.
Yet considering that the 80/20 Principle has affected the lives of hundreds
of millions of people even though they may be unaware of it, it remains
strangely uncelebrated. It is time to put this right.
3
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
46
The first 80/20 wave: the quality revolution
The quality revolution which took place between 1950 and 1990 transformed
the quality and value of branded consumer goods and other
manufactures. The quality movement has been a crusade to obtain
consistently higher quality at lower cost, by the application of statistical and
behavioural techniques. The objective, now almost reached with many
products, is to obtain a zero rate of product defects. It is possible to argue
that the quality movement has been the most significant driver of higher
living standards throughout the world since 1950.
The movement has an intriguing history. Its two great messiahs, Joseph
Juran (born 1904) and W Edwards Deming (born 1900), were both
Americans (although Juran was born in Romania). Respectively an
electrical engineer and a statistician, they developed their ideas in parallel
after the Second World War, but found it impossible to interest any major
US corporation in the quest for extraordinary quality. Juran published the
first edition of his Quality Control Handbook, the bible of the quality
movement, in 1951, but it received a very flat reception. The only serious
interest came from Japan and both Juran and Deming moved there in the
early 1950s. Their pioneering work took an economy known at the time for
shoddy imitations and transformed it into a powerhouse of high quality and
productivity.
It was only when Japanese goods, such as motorcycles and photocopiers,
began to invade the US market that most American (and other western)
corporations began to take the quality movement seriously. From 1970, and
especially after 1980, Juran, Deming and their disciples undertook an
equally successful transformation of western quality standards, leading to
huge improvements in the level and consistency of quality, dramatic
reductions in fault rates, and large falls in manufacturing costs.
The 80/20 Principle was one of the key building blocks of the quality
movement. Joseph Juran was the most enthusiastic messiah of the principle,
although he called it ‘the Pareto Principle’ or ‘the Rule of the Vital Few’. In
the first edition of the Quality Control Handbook, Juran
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
47
commented that ‘losses’ (that is, manufactured goods that have to be
rejected because of poor quality) do not arise from a large number of
causes:
Rather, the losses are always maldistributed in such a way that a small
percentage of the quality characteristics always contributes a high
percentage of the quality loss. *
The footnote commented that:
*The economist Pareto found that wealth was non-uniformly distributed in
the same way. Many other instances can be found— the distribution of
crime amongst criminals, the distribution of accidents among hazardous
processes, etc. Pareto’s principle of unequal distribution applied to
distribution of wealth and to distribution of quality losses.1
Juran applied the 80/20 Principle to statistical quality control. The approach
is to identify the problems causing lack of quality and to rank them from the
most important—the 20 per cent of defects causing 80 per cent of quality
problems—to the least important. Both Juran and Deming came to use the
phrase 80/20 increasingly, encouraging diagnosis of the few defects causing
most of the problems.
Once the ‘vital few’ sources of off-quality product have been identified,
effort is focused on dealing with these issues, rather than trying to tackle all
the problems at once.
As the quality movement has progressed from an emphasis on quality
‘control through to the view that quality must be built into products in the
first place, by all operators, and to total quality management and
increasingly sophisticated use of software, the emphasis on 80/20
techniques has grown, so that today almost all quality practitioners are
familiar with 80/20. Some recent references illustrate the ways in which the
80/20 Principle is now being used.
In a recent article in the National Productivity Review, Ronald J Recardo
asks:
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
48
Which gaps adversely affect your most strategic consumers? As with many
other quality problems, Pareto’s Law prevails here too: if you remedy the
most critical 20 percent of your quality gaps, you will realize 80 percent
Of the benefits. This _first 80 percent typically includes your breakthrough
improvements.2
Another writer, focusing on corporate turnarounds, comments:
For every step in your business process, ask yourself. If it adds value or
provides essential support. If it does neither, it’s waste. Cut it. [This is] the
80/20 rule, revisited: You can eliminate 80 percent of the waste by
spending only 20 percent of what it would cost you to get rid of 100
percent Of the waste. Go for the quick gain now.3
The 80/20 Principle was also used by Ford Electronics Manufacturing
Corporation in a quality program that won the Shingo prize:
Just-in-time programs have been applied using the 80/20 rule (80 percent
of the value is spread over 20 percent of the volume) and top-dollar
usages are analyzed constantly. Labor and overhead performance were
replaced by Manufacturing Cycle Time analysis by product line, reducing
product cycle time by 95 percent.4
New software incorporating the 80/20 Principle is being used to raise
quality:
[With the ABC DataAnalyzer] the data is entered or imported into the
spreadsheet area, where you highlight it and click on your choice of six
graph types: histograms, control charts, run charts, scatter diagrams, pie
charts and Pareto charts.
The Pareto chart incorporates the 80 to 20 rule, which might show, for
instance, that out of 1,000 customer complaints roughly 800 can be
eliminated by correcting only 20 per cent of the causes.5
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
49
The 80/20 Principle is also being increasingly applied to product design and
development. For example, a review of the use that the Pentagon has made
of total quality management explains that:
Decisions made early in the development process fix the majority of life
cycle costs. The 80/20 rule describes this outcome, since 80 percent of the
life-cycle costs are usually locked in after only 20 percent of the
development time.6
The impact of the quality revolution on customer satisfaction and value, and
on the competitive positions of individual firms and indeed of whole
nations, has been little noted but is truly massive. The 80/20 Principle was
clearly one of the ‘vital few’ inputs to the quality revolution. But the
underground influence of the 80/20 Principle does not stop there. It also
played a key role in a second revolution that combined with the first to
create today’s global consumer society.
The second 80/20 wave:
the information revolution
The information revolution that began in the 1960s has already transformed
work habits and the efficiency of large tracts of business. It is Just
beginning to do more than this: to help change the nature of the
organizations that are today’s dominant force in society The 80/20 Principle
was, is and will be a key accessory of the information revolution, helping to
direct its force intelligently.
Perhaps because they were close to the quality movement, the computing
and software professionals behind the information revolution were
generally familiar with the 80/20 Principle and used it extensively. To judge
by the number of computing and software articles that refer to the 80/20
Principle, most hardware and software developers understand and
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
50
use it in their daily work.
The information revolution has been most effective when using the 80/20
Principle’s concepts of selectivity and simplicity. As two separate project
directors testify:
Think small. Don’t plan to the nth degree on the first day. The return on
investment usually follows the 80/20 rule: 80 percent of the benefits will be
found in the simplest 20 percent of the system, and the final 20 percent of
the benefits will come from the most complex 80 percent of the system.7
Apple used the 80/20 Principle in developing the Apple Newton Message
Pad, an electronic personal organizer:
The Newton engineers took advantage of a slightly modified version [of
80/20]. They found that .01 percent of a person’s vocabulary was
sufficient to do 50 percent of the things you want to do with a small
handheld computer8
Increasingly, software is substituting for hardware, using the 80/20
Principle. An example is the RISC software invented in 1994:
RISC is based on a variation of the 80/20 rule. This rule assumes that most
software spends 80 percent of its time executing only 20 percent of the
available instructions. RISC processors . . . optimize the performance of
that 20 percent, and keep chip size and cost down by eliminating the other
80 percent. RISC does in software what CISC [the previously dominant
system] does in silicon.9
Those who apply software know that, even though it is incredibly efficient,
usage follows 80/20 patterns. As one developer states:
The business world has long abided by the 80/20 rule. It’s especially true
for software, where 80 percent of a product’s uses take advantage of only
20 Percent of its capabilities. That means that most of us pay for what we
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
51
don’t want or need. Software developers finally seem to understand this,
and many are betting that modular applications will solve the problem.10
Design of software is crucial, so that the most used functions are the easiest
to use. The same approach is being used for new database services:
How do WordPerfect and other software developers [do] it? First, they
identify what customers want most of the time and how they want to do
it—the old 80/20 rule (people use 20 percent of a program’s functions 80
percent of the time). Good software developers make high- use functions
as simple and automatic and inevitable as possible.
Translating such an approach to today’s database services would mean
looking at key customer use all the time. . . How many times do customers
call search service support desks to ask which file to pick or where a file
can be found? Good design could eliminate such calls.11
Wherever one turns, effective innovations in information—in data storage,
retrieval and processing—focus heavily on the 20 per cent or fewer of
keyneeds.
The information revolution has a
long way to run
The information revolution is the most subversive force business has ever
known. Already the phenomenon of ‘information power to the people’ has
given knowledge and authority to front-line workers and technicians,
destroying the power and often the jobs of middle management who were
previously protected by proprietary knowledge. The information revolution
has also decentralized corporations physically: the phone, the fax, the PC,
the modem and the increasing miniaturization and mobility of
these technologies have already begun to destroy the power of
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
52
corporate palaces and those who sit, or used to sit, in them. Ultimately, the
information revolution will help to destroy the profession of management
itself, thus enabling much greater direct value creation by ‘doers’ in
corporations for their key customers.12 The value of automated information
is increasing exponentially, much faster than we can use it. The key to using
this power effectively, now and in the future, lies in selectivity: in applying
the 80/20 Principle.
Peter Drucker points the way:
A database, no matter how copious, is not information. It is information’s
ore. . . The information a business most depends on is available, if at all,
only in a primitive and disorganized form. For what a business needs the
Most for its decisions—especially its strategic ones—are data about what
goes on outside of it. It is only outside the business where there are
results, opportunities, and threats.13
Drucker argues that we need new ways of measuring wealth creation. Ian
Godden and I call these new tools ‘automated performance measures’14;
they are just beginning to be created by some corporations. But well over 80
per cent (probably around 99 per cent) of the information revolution’s
resources are still being applied to counting better what we used to count
(‘paving over the cowpats’) rather than creating and simplifying measures
of genuine corporate wealth creation. The tiny proportion of effort that uses
the information revolution to create a different sort of corporation will have
an explosive impact.
The 80/20 Principle is still the best-kept
business secret
Considering the importance of the 80/20 Principle and the extent to
which it is known by managers, it remains extremely discreet. Even the
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
53
80/20 term itself caught on very slowly and without any visible landmarks.
Given the piecemeal use and gradual spread of the 80/20 Principle, it
remains underexploited, even by those who recognize the idea. It is
extremely versatile. It can be profitably applied to any industry and any
organization, any function within an organization and any individual job.
The 80/20 Principle can help the chief executive, line managers, functional
specialists and any knowledge worker, down to the lowest level or the
newest trainee. And although its uses are manifold, there is an underlying,
unifying logic that explains why the 80/20 Principle works and is so
valuable.
Why the 80/20 Principle works in business
The 80/20 Principle applied to business has one key theme—to generate the
most money with the least expenditure of assets and effort.
The classical economists of the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries
developed a theory of economic equilibrium and of the firm that has
dominated thinking ever since. The theory states that under perfect
competition firms do not make excess returns, and profitability is either
zero or the ‘normal’ cost of capital, the latter usually being defined by a
modest interest charge. The theory is internally consistent and has the sole
flaw that it cannot be applied to real economic activity of any kind, and
especially not to the operations of any individual firm.
The 80/20 theory of the firm
In contrast to the theory of perfect competition, the 80/20 theory of the firm
is both verifiable (and has, in fact, been verified many times) and helpful as
a guide to action. The 80/20 theory of the firm goes like this:
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
54
! In any market, some suppliers will be much better than others at satisfying
customer needs. These suppliers will obtain the highest price
realizations andalso the highest market shares.
! In any market, some suppliers will be much better than others at minimizing
expenditure relative to revenues. In other words, these suppliers’
products will cost less than other suppliers, for equivalent output and revenue;
or, alternatively, they will be able to generate equivalent output with
lower expenditure.
! Some suppliers will generate much higher surpluses than others. (I use
the phrase ‘surpluses’ rather than ‘profits’, because the latter normally
implies the profit available for shareholders. The concept of surplus
implies the level of funds available for profits or reinvestment, over and
above what is needed normally to keep the wheels turning.) Higher surpluses
will result in one or more of the following: (1) greater reinvestment
in product and service, to produce greater superiority and appeal
to customers; (2) investment in gaining market share through greater sales
and marketing effort, and/or takeovers of other firms; (3) higher returns
to employees, which will tend to have the effect of retaining and attracting
the best people in the market; and/or (4) higher returns to shareholders,
which will tend to raise share prices and lower the cost of capital,
facilitating investment and/or takeovers.
! Over time, 80 per cent of the market will tend to be supplied by 20 per
cent or fewer of the suppliers, who will normally also be more profitable.
At this point it is possible that the market structure may reach an
equilibrium, although it will be a very different kind of equilibrium from
that beloved of the economists’ perfect competition model. In the 80/20
equilibrium, a few suppliers, the largest, will offer customers better value
for money and have higher profits than smaller rivals. This is frequently
observed in real life, despite being impossible according to the theory of
perfect competition. We may term our more realistic theory the 80/20 law
of competition.
But the real world does not generally rest long in a tranquil equilibrium.
Sooner or later (usually sooner), there are always changes to market
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
55
structure caused by competitors’ innovations.
! Both existing suppliers and new suppliers will seek to innovate and
obtain a high share of a small but defensible part of each market (a ‘market
segment’). Segmentation of this kind is possible by providing a more
specialized product or service ideally suited to particular types of customer.
Over time, markets will tend to comprise more market segments.
Within each of these segments, the 80/20 law of competition will operate.
The leaders in each specialist segment may either be firms operating largely
or exclusively in that segment or industry generalists, but their success will
be dependent, in each segment, on obtaining the greatest revenue with the
lowest expenditure of effort. In each segment, some firms will be much
better than others at doing this, and will tend to accumulate segment market
share as a result.
Any large firm will operate in a large number of segments, that is, in a
large number of customer/product combinations where a different formula
is required to maximize revenue relative to effort, and/or where different
competitors are met. In some of these segments, the individual large firm
will generate large surpluses, and in other segments much lower surpluses
(or even deficits). It will tend to be true, therefore, that 80 per cent of
surpluses or profits are generated by 20 per cent of segments, and by 20 per
cent of customers and by 20 per cent of products. The most profitable
segments will tend to (but will not always) be where the firm enjoys the
highest market shares, and where the firm has the most loyal customers
(loyalty being defined by being longstanding and least likely to defect to
competitors).
! Within any firm, as with all entities dependent on nature and human
endeavour, there is likely to be an inequality between inputs and outputs, an
imbalance between effort and reward. Externally, this is reflected in the fact
that some markets, products and customers are much more profitable than
others. Internally, the same principle is reflected by the fact that some
resources, be they people, factories, machines or permutations of these, will
produce very much more value relative to their cost than will other
resources. If we were able to measure it (as we can with some jobs, such as
those of salespeople), we would find that some people generate a
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
56
very large surplus (their attributable share of revenue is very much greater
than their full cost), whereas many people generate a small surplus or a
deficit. Firms that generate the largest surpluses also tend to have the
highest average surplus per employee, but in all firms the true surplus
generated by each employee tends to be very unequal: 80 per cent of the
surplus is usually generated by 20 per cent of employees.
! At the lowest level of aggregation of resources within the firm, for
example an individual employee, 80 per cent of the value created is likely to
be generated in a small part, approximately 20 per cent, of the time when,
through a combination of circumstances including personal characteristics
and the exact nature of the task, the employee is operating at several times
his or her normal level of effectiveness.
! The principles of unequal effort and return therefore operate at all levels
of business: markets, market segments, products, customers, departments
and employees. It is this lack of balance, rather than a notional equilibrium,
that characterizes all economic activity. Apparently small differences create
large consequences. A product has only to be 10 per cent better value than
that of a competing product to generate a sales difference of 50 per cent and
a profit difference of 100 per cent.
Three action implications
One implication of the 80/20 theory of firms is that successful firms operate
in markets where it is possible for that firm to generate the highest revenues
with the least effort. This will be true both absolutely, that is, relative to
monetary profits; and relatively, that is, in relation to competition. A firm
cannot be judged successful unless it has a high absolute surplus (in
traditional terms, a high return on investment) and also a higher surplus than
its competitors (higher margins).
A second practical implication for all firms is that it is always possible to
raise the economic surplus, usually by a large degree, by focusing only on
those market and customer segments where the largest surpluses are
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
57
currently being generated. This will always imply redeployment of
resources into the most surplus-generating segments, and will normally also
imply a reduction in the total level of resource and expenditure (in plain
words, fewer employees and other costs).
Firms rarely reach the highest level of surplus that they could attain, or
anywhere near it, both because managers are often not aware of the
potential for surplus and because they often prefer to run large firms rather
than exceptionally profitable ones.
A third corollary is that it is possible for every corporation to raise the
level of surplus by reducing the inequality of output and reward within the
firm. This can be done by identifying the parts of the firm (people, factories,
sales offices, overhead units, countries) that generate the highest surpluses
and reinforcing these, giving them more power and resources; and,
conversely, identifying the resources generating low or negative surpluses,
facilitating dramatic improvements and, if these are not forthcoming,
stopping the expenditure on these resources.
These principles constitute a useful 80/20 theory of the firm, but they
must not be interpreted too rigidly or deterministically. The principles work
because they are a reflection of relationships in nature, which are an
intricate mixture of order and disorder, of regularity and irregularity.
Look for ‘irregular’ insights from the
80/20 Principle
It is important to try to grasp the fluidity and force driving 80/20
relationships. Unless you appreciate this, you will interpret the 80/20
Principle too rigidly and fail to exploit its full potential.
The world is full of small causes that, when combined, can have
momentous consequences. Think of a saucepan of milk that, when heated
above a certain temperature, suddenly changes form, swelling up and
bubbling over. One moment you have a nice, orderly pan of hot
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
58
milk; the next moment you can either have a wonderful cappucino or, if you
are a second too late, a mess on top of your stove. Things take a little more
time in business, but one year you can have an excellent and very profitable
IBM dominating the computer industry and, before long, a combination of
small causes results in a blinded monolith staggering to avoid destruction.
Creative systems operate away from equilibrium. Cause and effect, input
and output, operate in a non-linear way. You do not usually get back what
you put in; you may sometimes get very much less and sometimes get very
much more. Major alterations in a business system can flow from
apparently insignificant causes. At any one time, people of equal
intelligence, skill and dedication can produce quite unequal results, as a
result of small structural differences. Events cannot be predicted, although
predictable patterns tend to recur.
Identify lucky streaks
Control is therefore impossible. But it is possible to influence events and,
perhaps even more important, it is possible to detect irregularities and
benefit from them. The art of using the 80/20 Principle is to identify which
way the grain of reality is currently running and to exploit that as much as
possible.
Imagine you are in a crazy casino, full of unbalanced roulette wheels. All
numbers pay odds of 35 to 1, but individual numbers come up more or less
frequently at different tables. At one, number five comes up one time in
twenty, at another table it only comes up one time in fifty. If you back the
right number at the right table, you can make a fortune. If you stubbornly
keep backing number five at a table where it comes up one time in fifty,
your money will all disappear, regardless of how high your starting bank.
If you can identify where your firm is getting back more than it is putting
in, you can up the stakes and make a killing. Similarly, if you can work out
where your firm is getting back much less than it is investing, you can cut
your losses.
THE UNDERGROUND CULT
59
In this context, the ‘where’ can be anything. It can be a product, a market,
a customer or type of customer, a technology, a channel of distribution, a
department or division, a country, a type of transaction or an employee, type
of employee or team. The game is to spot the few places where you are
making great surpluses and to maximize them; and to identify the places
where you are losing and get out.
We have been trained to think in terms of cause and effect, of regular
relationships, of average levels of return, of perfect competition and of
predictable outcomes. This is not the real world. The real world comprises a
mass of influences, where cause and effect are blurred, and where complex
feedback loops distort inputs; where equilibrium is fleeting and often
illusory; where there are patterns of repeated but irregular performance;
where firms never compete head to head and prosper by differentiation; and
where a few favoured souls are able to corner the market for high returns.
Viewed in this light, large firms are incredibly complex and constantly
changing coalitions of forces, some of which are going with the grain of
nature and making a fortune, while others are going against the grain and
stacking up huge losses. All this is obscured by our inability to disentangle
reality and by the calming, averaging and highly distorting effects of
accounting systems. The 80/20 Principle is rampant but largely unobserved.
What we are generally allowed to see in business is the net effect of what
happens, which is by no means the whole picture. Beneath the surface there
are warring positive and negative inputs that combine to produce the effect
we can observe above the surface. The 80/20 Principle is most useful when
we can identify all the forces beneath the surface, so that we can stop the
negative influences and give maximum power to the most productive
forces.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
60
How companies can use the 80/20
Principle to raise profits
Enough of history, philosophy and theory! We now switch gears to the
intensely practical. Any individual business can gain immensely through
practical application of the 80/20 Principle. It is time to show you how.
Chapters 4 to 7 cover the most important ways to raise profits via the
80/20 Principle. Chapter 8 closes Part Two with hints on how to embed
80/20 Thinking into your business life, so that you can gain an unfair
advantage over colleagues and competitors alike.
We start in the next chapter with the most important use of the 80/20
Principle in any firm: to isolate where you are really making the profits and,
just as important, where you are really losing money. Every business person
thinks they know this already, and nearly all are wrong. If they had the right
picture, their whole business would be transformed.
Why Your
Strategy Is Wrong
Unless you have used the 80/20 Principle to redirect your strategy, you can
be pretty sure that the strategy is badly flawed. Almost certainly, you don’t
have an accurate picture of where you make, and lose, the most money. It is
almost inevitable that you are doing too many things for too many people.
Business strategy should not be a grand and sweeping overview. It should
be more like an underview, a peek beneath the covers to look in great detail
at what is going on. To arrive at a useful business strategy, you need to look
carefully at the different chunks of your business, particularly at their
profitability and cash generation.
Unless your firm is very small and simple, it is almost certainly true that
you make at least 80 per cent of your profits and cash in 20 per cent of your
activity, and in 20 per cent of your revenues. The trick is to work out which
20 per cent.
4
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
62
Where are you making the most money?
Identify which parts of the business are making very high returns, which are
just about washing their faces and which are disasters. To do this we will
conduct an 80/20 Analysis of profits by different categories of business:
! by product or product group/type
! by customer or customer group/type
! by any other split which appears to be relevant for your business for
which you have data; for example by geographical area or distribution
channel
! by competitive segment.
Start with products. Your business will almost certainly have information
by product or product group. For each, look at the sales over the last period,
month, quarter or year (decide which is most reliable) and work out the
profitability after allocating all costs.
How easy or difficult this will be depends on the state of your
management information. What you need may all be readily available, but if
not you will have to build it up yourself. You are bound to have sales by
product or product line and almost certainly the gross margin (sales less
cost of sales).You will also know the total costs for the whole business (all
the overhead costs).What you then have to do is to allocate all the overhead
costs to each product group on some reasonable basis.
The crudest way is to allocate costs on a percentage of turnover. A
moment’s thought, however, should convince you that this will not be very
accurate. Some products take a great deal of salespeople’s time relative to
their value, for example, and others take very little. Some are heavily
advertised and others not at all. Some require a lot of fussing around in
manufacturing whereas others are straightforward.
Take each category of overhead cost and allocate it to each product
group.
Do this for all the costs, then look at the results.
Typically some products, representing a minority of turnover, are very
profitable; most products are modestly or marginally profitable; and some
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
63
are really making large losses once you allocate all the costs.
Figure 10 shows the numbers for a recent study I conducted of an
electronic instrumentation group. Figure 11 gives the same data visually;
look at this if you prefer pictures to numbers.
$000
Product
Sales
Income
Return on
sales (%)
Product group A 3,750 1,330 35.5
Product group B 17,000 5,110 30.1
Product group C 3,040 601 25.1
Product group D 12,070 1,880 15.6
Product group E 44,110 5,290 12.0
Product group F 30,370 2,990 9.8
Product group G 5,030 (820) (15.5)
Product group H 4,000 (3,010) (75.3)
Total 119,370 13,380 11.2
Figure 10. Electronic Instruments Inc, sales and profits table by product
group
We can see from the two figures that Product Group A accounts for only
3 per cent of sales, but for 10 per cent of profits. Product Groups A, B and
C account for 20 per cent of sales, but for 53 per cent of profits. This
becomes very clear if we compile an 80/20 Table or an 80/20 Chart, as in
Figures 12 and 13 respectively.
We have not yet found the 20 per cent of sales that account for 80 per
cent of profits, but we are on our way. If not 80/20, then 67/30: 30 per cent
of product sales account for almost 67 per cent of profits. Already you may
be thinking about what can be done to raise the sales of Product
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
64
Figure 11. Electronic Instruments Inc, sales and profit chart by product
group
Groups A, B and C. For example, you might want to reallocate all sales
effort from the other 80 per cent of business, telling salespeople to
concentrate on doubling the sales of Products A, B and C and not to worry
about the rest. If they succeeded in doing this, sales would only go up by 20
per cent, but profits would rise more than 50 per cent.
You might also already be thinking about cutting costs, or raising prices,
in Product Groups D, E and F; or about radical retrenchment or total exit
from Product Groups G and H.
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
65
Percentage of sales Percentage of profits
Product Group Cumulative Group Cumulative
Product group A 3.1 3.1 9.9 9.9
Product group B 14.2 17.3 38.2 48.1
Product group C 2.6 19.9 4.6 52.7
Product group D 10.1 30.0 14.1 66.8
Product group E 37.0 67.0 39.5 106.3
Product group F 25.4 92.4 22.4 128.7
Product group G 4.2 96.6 (6.1) 122.6
Product group H 3.4 100.0 (22.6) 100.0
Figure 12. Electronic Instruments Inc, 80/20 Table
Figure 13. Electronic Instruments Inc, 80/20 Chart
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
66
What about customer profitability?
After products, go on to look at customers. Repeat the analysis, but look at
total purchases by each customer or customer group. Some customers pay
high prices but have a high cost to serve: these are often smaller customers.
The very big customers may be easy to deal with and take large volumes of
the same product, but screw you down on price. Sometimes these
differences balance out, but often they do not. For the group we are calling
Electronic Instruments Inc the results are shown in Figures 14 and 15.
$000
Customer
Sales
Income
Return on
sales (%)
Customer type A 18,350 7,865 42.9
Customer type B 11,450 3,916 34.2
Customer type C 43,100 3,969 9.2
Customer type D 46,470 (2,370) (5.1)
Total 119,370 13,380 11.2
Figure 14. Electronic Instruments Inc, sales and profits table by customer
group
A word of explanation about the customer groups. Type A customers are
small, direct accounts paying very high prices and giving very fat gross
margins. They are quite expensive to service but the margins more than
compensate for this. Type B customers are distributors who tend to place
large orders and have very low costs to serve, yet for one reason or another
find it acceptable to pay fairly high prices, mainly because the electronic
components bought are a tiny fraction of their total product costs. Type C
customers are export accounts paying high prices. The snag with them,
however, is that they are very expensive to service. Type D customers are
large manufacturers who bargain very hard on price and also demand a
great deal of technical support and many ‘specials’.
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
67
Figure 15. Electronic Instruments Inc, sales and profits chart by customer
group
Figures 16 and 17 show the 80/20 Table and 80/20 Chart respectively for
the customer groups.
These figures reveal a 59/15 rule and an 88/25 rule: the most profitable
customer category accounts for 15 per cent of revenues but 59 per cent of
profits, and the most profitable 25 per cent of customers Yields 88 per cent
of profits. This is partly because the most profitable customers tend to take
the most profitable products, but also because they pay more in relation to
their cost to service.
The analysis led to a successful campaign to find more A and B
customers: the small direct customers and the distributors. Even taking
account of the cost of the campaign, the result was very profitable. Prices
for C customers (the export accounts) were selectively raised and ways
found to lower the cost of servicing some of them, particularly by greater
use of telephone rather than face-to-face selling. The D customers (large
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
68
Percentage of sales Percentage of profits
Customer Type Cumulative Type Cumulative
Customer type A 15.4 15.4 58.9 58.9
Customer type B 9.6 25.0 29.3 88.2
Customer type C 36.1 61.1 29.6 117.8
Customer type D 38.9 100.0 (17.8) 100.0
Figure 16. Electronic Instruments Inc, 80/20 Table by customer type
Figure 17. Electronic Instruments Inc, 80/20 Chart by customer type
manufacturers) were dealt with individually: nine of these accounted for 97
per cent of D sales. In some cases technical development services were
charged for separately; in others prices were raised; and three accounts
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
69
were tactically ‘lost’ to the company’s most hated competitor after a
bidding war. The managers really wanted the competitor to enjoy these
losses!
80/20 Analysis applied to a
consultancy firm
After products and customers, take any other split of business that appears
especially relevant to your business. There was no special analysis in the
case of the instrumentation company, but to illustrate the point consider the
simple split of sales and profits for a strategy consultancy shown in Figures
18 and 19.
These figures exhibit a 56/21 rule: large projects constitute only 21 per
cent of turnover but give 56 per cent of profits.
$000
Business split
Sales
Profits
Return on
Sales%
Large projects 35,000 16,000 45.7
Small projects 135,000 12,825 9.5
Total 170,000 28,825 17.0
Figure 18. Strategy Consulting Inc, table of profitability of large versus small
projects
Another analysis, shown in Figures 20 and 21, splits the business into
‘old’ clients (more than three years old),’new’ clients (less than six months
old) and those in between.
These figures tell us that 26 per cent of the business (old clients) made up
84 per cent of the profits: an 84/26 rule. The message here was to strive
above all to keep and expand long-serving clients, who were the
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
70
Figure 19 Strategy Consulting Inc, chart of profitability of large versus small
clients
$000
Business split
Sales
Profits
Return on
sales (%)
Old clients 43,500 24,055 55.3
Intermediate clients 101,000 12,726 12.6
New clients 25,500 (7,956) 31.2
Total 170,000 28,825 17.0
Figure 20 Strategy Consulting Inc, table of profitability of old versus new
Clients
least price sensitive and who could be served most cheaply. New clients
who do not turn into longserving clients were recognized as being loss
makers, leading to a much more selective approach to pitching for business:
pitches were only made where it was believed the company concerned
would turn into a long-term client.
Figures 22 and 23 summarize a third analysis for the consultants,
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
71
Figure 21. Strategy Consulting Inc, chart of profitability of old versus new
clients
$000
Business split
Sales
Profits
Return on
sales (%)
M&A 37,600 25,190 67.0
Strategic analysis 75,800 11,600 15.3
Operational projects 56,600 7,965 14.1
Total 170,000 28,825 17.0
Figure 22. Strategy Consulting Inc, table of profitability by project type
which divided projects into work on mergers and acquisitions (M&A),
strategic analysis and operational projects.
This split demonstrated an 87/22 rule: the M&A work was wildly
profitable, giving 87 per cent of profits for 22 per cent of revenues. Efforts
were redoubled to sell more M&A work!
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
72
Figure 23. Strategy Consulting Inc, chart of profitability by project type
Operational projects for old clients, when analysed separately, turned out at
about break-even, while large losses were made on operational projects for
new clients. This led to a decision not to undertake the latter, while old
clients were either charged much more for this kind of project or
encouraged to farm them out to specialist operational consultancies.
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
73
Segmentation is the key to understanding
and driving up profitability
The best way to examine the profitability of your business is to break it
down into competitive segments. While analyses by product, customer or
any other relevant split are usually very valuable, the greatest insights come
from a combination of customers and products into ‘dollops’ of business
defined with reference to your most important competitors. Although this is
not as difficult as it may sound, very few organizations break up their
business in this way, so a short exposition is necessary.
What is a competitive segment?
A competitive segment is a part of your business where you face a different
competitor or different competitive dynamics.
Take any part of your business that comes to mind: a product, a customer,
a product line sold to a customer type, or any other split that may be
important to you (for example, consultants may think of M&A work). Now
ask yourself two simple questions:
! Do you face a different main competitor in this part of your business
compared to the rest of it? If the answer is yes, then that part of the business
is a separate competitive segment (or simply segment for short).
If you are up against a specialist competitor, your profitability win
depend on the interaction of your product and service against theirs. Which
do consumers prefer? And what is your total cost to deliver the product or
service relative to your competitor’s? Your profitability will be as much
determined by your competitor as by anything else.
It is therefore sensible to think of this area of your business separately, to
determine a strategy for it that will beat (or collude with) your competitor. It
is certainly sensible to look at its profitability separately too: you
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
74
may have a surprise. But even if the part of your business you are looking at
has the same competitor as another part of your business (for example, your
main competitor in Product A is the same as in Product B), then you need to
ask another question.
! Do you and your competitor have the same ratio Of sales or market
share inthe two areas, or are they relatively stronger in one area and you
relatively stronger in another?
For example, if you have 20 per cent market share in Product A and the
largest competitor has 40 per cent (they are twice as big as you), is it the
same ratio in Product B: are they twice as big as you there? If you have 15
per cent market share in Product B but your competitor only has 10 per
cent, then there is a different relative competitive position in the two
products.
There will be real reasons for this. Consumers may prefer your brand in
Product B but your competitor’s in Product A. Possibly the competitor
doesn’t care much about what happens in Product B. Perhaps you are
efficient and price competitive in Product B whereas the reverse is true in
Product A. At this stage you don’t need to know the reasons. All you need
to do is observe that, although you face the same competitor, the balance of
advantage is different in the two areas. They are therefore separate segments
and will probably exhibit different profitability
Thinking about competitors puts you straight on to the
key business splits
Instead of starting with a conventional business definition, such as a
product or the output from different parts of your organization, thinking
about competitive segments lobs you straight at the most important way to
split and think about your business.
At the instrumentation company referred to earlier, managers just
could not agree among themselves how to analyse the business. Some
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
75
thought that products were the key dimension. The view of others was that
the most important split was whether the customers were in the pipeline
business (broadly, oil companies) or in continuous process industries (such
as food manufacturers). A third faction held that the US business was very
different from the export business. Since they started from different
assumptions, all of which were to some degree valid, it was very difficult to
make progress either in organizing the business or in communicating with
each other.
Dividing the business into competitive segments demolished these
arguments. The rule is simple: if you don’t face different competitors, or
different relative competitive positions, it’s not a separate segment. We
quickly arrived at a rather inelegant, but very clear, set of segments that
everyone could understand.
For a start, it was clear that the competitors were very different in most,
but not all, products. Where the competitors were the same, with similar
relative competitive positions, we lumped the products together. In most
other cases we kept the products apart.
Then we asked whether the competitive positions were different for
pipeline customers as distinct from process customers. In all but one
product, the answer was no. But in that one product, liquid density
machines, the largest competitors were different. We therefore settled for
two segments here: liquid density pipeline and liquid density process.
Finally, we asked whether the competitors or competitive positions were
different in each segment in the US and in international business. In most
cases the answer was yes. If the international business was significant
enough, we asked the same question for different countries: was it the same
competitor in the UK as in France or Asia? Where the competitors were
different, we subdivided the business into separate segments.
We ended up with a patchwork quilt of 15 large segments (very small
ones we reaggregated to avoid unnecessary work), usually defined by
product and geographic region, but in one case by product and customer
type (this was liquid density, where the segments were liquid density
pipeline worldwide and liquid density process worldwide). Each segment
had a different competitor or different competitive positions. We then
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
76
analysed the split of sales and profits for each of the segments, and this is
shown in Figures 24 and 25.
$000
Segment
Sales
Profits
Return
on
sales (%)
1 2,250 1,030 45.8
2 3.020 1,310 43.4
3 5,370 2,298 42.8
4 2,000 798 39.9
5 1,750 532 30.4
6 17,000 5,110 30.1
7 3,040 610 25.1
8 7,845 1,334 17.0
9 4,224 546 12.9
10 13,000 1,300 10.0
11 21,900 1,927 8.8
12 18,100 779 4.3
13 10,841 (364) (3.4)
14 5.030 (820) (15.5)
15 4,000 (3,010) (75.3)
Total 119,370 13,380 11.2
Figure 24. Electronic Instruments Inc, table of profitability by segment
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
77
Figure 25. Electronic Instruments Inc, chart of profitability by segment
To highlight the imbalance between the split of revenues and profits, we
can again construct either an 80/20 Table (Figure 26) or an 80/20 Chart
(Figure 27).
We can see from these figures that the top six segments comprise only
26.3 per cent of total sales, but 82.9 per cent of profits: so here we have an
83/26 rule.
What did Electronic Instruments do to boost profits?
Figures 26 and 27 focused attention on three types of business.
The most profitable quarter of the business, segments 1–6, was classified
initially as top priority A businesses, to be grown most aggressively. More
than 80 per cent of profits came from these segments, yet they were
receiving only an average amount of management time in line with their
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
78
Percentage of sales Percentage of profits
Segment Type Cumulative Type Cumulative
1 1.9 1.9 7.7 7.7
2 2.5 4.4 9.8 17.5
3 4.5 8.9 17.2 34.7
4 1.7 10.6 6.0 40.7
5 1.5 12.1 4.0 44.7
6 14.2 26.3 38.2 82.9
7 2.5 28.8 4.6 87.5
8 6.6 35.4 10.0 97.5
9 3.5 38.9 4.1 101.6
10 10.9 49.8 9.7 111.3
11 18.3 68.1 14.4 125.7
12 15.2 83.3 5.8 131.5
13 9.1 92.4 -2.7 128.8
14 4.2 96.6 -6.0 122.6
15 3.4 100.0 -22.6 100.0
Figure 26. Electronic Instruments Inc, 80120 Table of sales and profits by
segment
turnover. A decision was taken to raise the amount of time spent on these
businesses to two-thirds of the total. The salesforce focused on trying to sell
more of these products, both to existing customers and to new ones. It was
realized that the group could afford to offer extra services or to cut prices
slightly and still enjoy very good returns.
The second set of businesses comprised segments 7–12. In total these
made up 57 per cent of total sales and 49 per cent of total profits; in other
words, on average, slightly below-average profitability These segments
were classified as B priority, although clearly some segments in this
category (such as 7 and 8) were more interesting than others (such as 11 and
12). The priority to be accorded to these segments also depended on the
answers to the two questions posed at the start of the chapter, that is, on
whether each segment was a good market to be in and on how well the
company was positioned in each segment. The answers to these questions
are described in the final part of this chapter.
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
79
Figure 27 Electronic Instruments Inc, 80/20 Chart of profitability by segment
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
80
At this stage, a decision was taken to cut the amount of management time
spent on the B segments from around 60 per cent to about half this level.
Prices on some of the less profitable segments were also raised.
The third category, designated X priority, comprised the loss-making
segments 13–15. A decision on what to do about these segments was
deferred, as for the B category, until after analysis of market attractiveness
and the strength of the company’s position in each market.
Provisionally, however, it was possible to reset priorities as laid out in
Figure 28.
Priority Segments
of sales
Percentage
of profits Percentage Actions
A 1–6 26.3 82.9 Raise sales effort
Raise management time
Flexibility on price
B 7–12 57.0 48.5 Lower management time
Lower sales effort
Raise some prices
X 13–15 16.7 (31.4) Review viability
Total 100.0 100.0
Figure 28. Electronic Instruments Inc, result of 80/20 Analysis
Before reaching final decisions on any segment, however, the
instrumentation group’s top management examined the two other questions,
besides profitability, that are key to strategy:
! Is the segment an attractive market to be in?
! How well is the firm positioned in each segment?
Figure 29 shows the final strategy conclusions for Electronic Instruments
Inc.
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
81
Segment Market attractive? Firm well Profitability
positioned?
1 Yes Yes Very high
2 Yes Yes Very high
3 Yes Yes Very high
4 Yes Yes Very high
5 Yes Yes High
6 Yes Yes High
7 Yes Moderately High
8 Yes Moderately Fairly high
9 Yes No OK
10 Not very Yes OK
11 Not very Yes OK
12 No Moderately Poor
13 Yes Improving Loss making
14 No Moderately Loss making
15 No No Loss making
Figure 29. Electronic Instruments Inc, strategic diagnosis
What actions followed this diagnosis?
All of the A profit segments were also attractive markets they were
growing, had high barriers to entry for new competitors, had more demand
than capacity, faced no threat from competing technologies and had high
bargaining power visà- vis both customers and component suppliers. As a
result, nearly all the competitors in these markets made good money.
My client was also well positioned in each segment, meaning that it
had a high market share and was one of the top three suppliers. Its technology
was above average and its cost position better than average (that
is, lower cost) compared to its competitors.
Since these were also the most profitable segments, the analysis
confirmed the implications of the 80/20 profit comparison. Segments 1-6
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
82
therefore remained A segments and effort was concentrated on keeping all
existing business and gaining market share in these segments by increasing
sales to current customers and converting new ones.
The strategy could now be refined for some of the other segments in the
B category. Segment 9 was interesting. Profitability was moderate, but this
was not because the market was unattractive: on the contrary, it was highly
attractive, with most of the other players making very good profits. But my
client had a low market share and a high cost position in this segment,
largely because they were using old technology.
To update the technology would have taken a terrific effort and would
have been very expensive. A decision was made, therefore, to ‘harvest’ the
segment, which meant cutting the effort going to protect the business and
raising prices. This was expected to lead to a loss in sales but, for a time, to
higher profits. In fact, cutting the effort and raising prices did raise margins,
but led to very little loss of sales in the short term. It turned out that the
customers were mainly locked in to the old technology themselves and had
little choice of alternative suppliers until they switched over to the new
technology. For my client profitability rose from 12.9 per cent to over 20
per cent, although it was recognized that this might be a temporary fillip.
Segments 10 and 11 were ones where the instrumentation group had
leading market shares, but they were structurally unattractive markets.
Market size was declining, there was overcapacity and the customers held
all the cards and could negotiate very keen prices. Despite the fact that it
was a market leader, my client decided to deemphasize these segments and
all new investment was cancelled.
Although for different reasons, the same decision applied to segment
12.The market was even more unattractive and the firm had only a moderate
market share. All new marketing programmes, as well as investments, were
sidelined.
What about the X category, the loss makers? Here it was found that two
of the three segments, 14 and 15, were large but deeply unattractive markets
in which the firm was in any case only a marginal player. A decision was
made to leave both segments, in one case by selling part of a
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
83
factory to a competitor. The price realized was very low, but at least there
was some cash benefit and some jobs were preserved in addition to the
losses being stopped. In the other case operations had to be closed
altogether.
Segment 13, also in the X group, experienced a different fate. Although
the group lost money in this business, it was a structurally attractive market:
growing at 10 per cent per annum and with most competitors making high
returns. In fact, although the group was making a loss after allocating all
costs, the gross margin in the segment was quite high. Its problem was that
it had only entered the market the previous year and was having to make
heavy investments in technology and sales effort. But it was gaining market
share and, if it kept up its rate of progress, could hope to become one of the
largest suppliers within three years. At that stage, with higher sales to
spread the costs, it could expect to make high returns. It decided to put even
more effort into segment 13 so that the group could become a ‘scale player’
(that is, operate at the minimum size necessary to be profitable) as soon as
possible.
Don’t take 80/20 Analysis to simplistic
conclusions
Segment 13 in the above example helps to illustrate the point that 80/20
Analysis of profits does not give us all the right answers. The analysis is
bound to be a snapshot at a point in time and cannot (to start with) provide a
picture of the trend or of forces that could change profitability. Profitability
analysis of the 80/20 type is a necessary but not a sufficient condition of
good strategy.
On the other hand, it is undoubtedly true that the best way to start
making money is to stop losing money. Note that, with the exception of
segment 13, the simple 80/20 profit analysis would have given more or
less the right result in 14 out of the 15 segments, comprising over 90 per
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
84
cent of revenues. This does not mean that strategic analysis should stop with
80/20 Analysis, but that it should start with it. For the full answer you must
look at segment market attractiveness and at how well the firm is positioned
in each segment. The actions taken by the instrumentation group are
summarized in Figure 30.
Segments Priority Characteristics Actions
1–6 A Attractive markets Heavy management focus
Good market shares Sales effort raised
High profitability Flexibility to gain sales
7–8 B Attractive markets Hold position
Moderate positions No special initiatives
Good profitability
9 C Attractive market Harvest (lower costs,
Poor technology and raise prices)
market share
10–11 C Unattractive markets Less effort
Good market shares
Profitability OK
12 C Unattractive market Much less effort
Moderate position
Profitability poor
13 A Attractive market Gain share quickly
Subscale but
improving position
Loss making
14–15 Z Unattractive markets Sell/close
Moderate/poor
Positions
Loss making
Figure 30. Electronic Instruments Inc, actions taken after all 80/20 Analyses
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
85
80/20 as a guide to the future—developing
your firm into a different animal
This concludes our strategic review of existing business segments, where it
is advisable to start with 80/20 profit analyses. As we have seen, these
analyses are indispensable in arriving at segment strategy. But we have still
not by any means exhausted the use of the 80/20 Principle in strategy. The
principle is also of enormous value in identifying the next leaps forward for
your business.
We tend to assume that our organizations, and our industries, are doing
pretty much the best they can. We tend to think that our business world is
highly competitive and has reached some sort of equilibrium or end-game.
Nothing could be further from the truth!
It would be far better to start from the proposition that your industry is all
screwed up and could be structured much more effectively to provide what
customers want. And as far as your organization is concerned, your
ambition could be to transform it within the next decade, so that in 10 years’
time your people will look back, shake their heads ruefully and say to each
other: ‘I can’t believe we used to do things that way. We must have been
crazy!’.
Innovation is the name of the game: it is absolutely crucial to future
competitive advantage. We tend to think that innovation is difficult, but
with creative use of the 80/20 Principle innovation can be both easy and
fun! Consider, for example, the following ideas:
! 80 per cent of the profits made by all industries are made by 20 per
cent of industries. Make a list of the most profitable industries that you
are aware of—such as pharmaceuticals or consulting—and ask why your
industry can’t be more like these.
! 80 per cent of the profits made in any industry are made by 20 per
cent of firms. If you aren’t one of these, what are they doing right that
you’re not?
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
86
! 80 per cent of value perceived by customers relates to 20 per cent of
what an organization does. What is that 20 per cent in your case? What
is stopping you doing more of it? What is preventing you from ‘making’
an even more extreme version of that 20 per cent?
! 80 per cent of what an industry does yields no more than 20 per cent
of the benefit to its customers. What is that 80 per cent? Why not abolish
it? For instance, if you are a banker, why do you have branches? If you
provide services, why not organize their provision via the telephone and
the personal computer? Where might less be better, as with self-service?
Could the customer be engaged in providing some of the services?
! 80 per cent of the benefit from any product or service can be provided
at 20 per cent of the cost. Many consumers would buy a stripped-down,
very cheap product. Is anyone providing it in your industry?
! 80 per cent of any industry’s profits come from 20 per cent of its customers.
Do you have a disproportionate share of these? If not, what
would you need to do to get it?
Why do you need people?
Some examples of industry transformations may help. My grandmother
used to run a corner grocery store. She received orders, would pick them out
and then I (or some more reliable boy) would deliver them on a bike. Then
a supermarket opened in the town. It engaged its customers in picking their
own groceries and carting them back home. In return the supermarket
offered a wider range, lower prices and a car park. Soon my grandmother’s
customers were flocking to the supermarket.
Some industries, such as petrol retailing, cottoned on to self-service
quickly. Others, such as furniture retailing and banking, thought it was not
for them. Every few years a new competitor, such as Ikea in furniture,
proves that there is new life in the very old idea of self-service.
Discounting is also a perennial transformation strategy. Offer less
WHY YOUR STRATEGY IS WRONG
87
choice, fewer frills, less service and much cheaper prices. 80 per cent of
sales are concentrated in 20 per cent of products—just stock these. Another
place I used to work, a wine merchant, stocked 30 different types of claret.
Who needed that amount of choice? The firm was taken over by a discount
chain and now a wine warehouse has opened up down the road.
Who would have thought 50 years ago that people would have wanted
fast-food outlets? And today, who realizes that accessible mega-restaurants,
the sort that offer a limited and predictable menu in glitzy surroundings at
reasonable prices but insist that you give back the table after 90 minutes,
constitute a death warrant for traditional owner-run restaurants?
Why do we insist on using people to do things that machines can do much
more cheaply? When will airlines start to use robots to serve you? Most
people prefer humans, but machines are more reliable and much cheaper.
Machines may give 80 per cent of the benefit at 20 per cent of the cost. In
some cases, as with cash machines (automatic teller machines, also known
as holes in the wall), they provide a much better service, much faster and at
a fraction of the cost. In the next century only old fogies like me will prefer
to deal with humans and even I will have my doubts.
Are carpets obsolete?
I want to leave you to your own imagination. Just one final example, where
use of the 80/20 Principle has transformed a company’s fortunes and could
conceivably change a whole industry.
Consider the Interface Corporation of Georgia, now an $800 million
carpet supplier. It used to sell carpets; now it leases them, installing carpet
tiles rather than whole carpets. Interface realized that 20 per cent of any
carpet receives 80 per cent of the wear. Normally a carpet is replaced when
most of it is still perfectly good. Under Interface’s leasing scheme, carpets
are regularly inspected and any worn or damaged carpet tile is
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
88
replaced. This lowers costs for both Interface and the customer. A trivial
80/20 observation has transformed one company and could lead to
widespread future changes in the industry.
Conclusion
The 80/20 Principle suggests that your strategy is wrong. If you make most
of your money out of a small part of your activity, you should turn your
company upside down and concentrate your efforts on multiplying this
small part. Yet this is only part of the answer. Behind the need for focus
lurks an even more powerful truth about business, and it is to this theme that
we turn next.
Simple Is
Beautiful
My effort is in the direction of simplicity. People in general have so little
and it costs so much to buy even the barest necessities (let alone the
luxuries to which I think everyone is entitled) because nearly everything
we make is much more complex than it needs to be. Our clothing, our
food, our household furnishings—all could be much simpler than they now
are and at the same time be betterlooking.
Henry Ford1
We saw in the previous chapter that nearly all businesses have within them
chunks of business with widely varying profitability. The 80/20 Principle
suggests something quite outrageous as a working hypothesis: that onefifth
of a typical company’s revenues account for four-fifths of its profits
and cash. Conversely, four-fifths of the average company’s revenues
account for only one-fifth of profits and cash. This is a bizarre hypothesis.
If we assume that one such business has sales of £100 million and total
profits of £5 million, for the 80/20 Principle to be correct £20 million
of sales has to produce £4 million of profits— a return on sales of 20 per
5
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
90
cent; while £80 million of sales has to produce just £1 million of profits, a
return on sales of just 1.25 per cent. This means that the top fifth of business
is sixteen times more profitable than the rest of the business.
What is extraordinary is that when it is tested, the hypothesis generally
turns out to be correct, or not very far wide of the mark.
How can this be true? It is intuitively obvious that some business chunks
may be considerably more profitable than others. But 16 times better? It
almost beggars belief. And, routinely, executives who commission productline
profitability exercises often do refuse to believe the results when first
presented with them. Even when they have checked the assumptions and
verified them, they still end up baffled.
The next stage is often for managers to refuse to get rid of the 80 per cent
of business that is unprofitable, on the apparently reasonable grounds that
the 80 per cent makes a very large contribution to overheads. Removing the
80 per cent, they say, would clearly decrease profits, because you simply
couldn’t remove 80 per cent of your overhead in any sensible time frame.
When faced with these objections, corporate analysts or consultants
generally give way to the managers. Only the most horribly unprofitable
business is removed. And only minor efforts are made to increase the
extremely profitable business.
Yet all this is a dreadful compromise, based on a misunderstanding. Few
people stop to ask why the unprofitable business is so bad. Even fewer stop
to think whether you could in practice, as well as in theory, have a business
solely composed of the most profitable chunks and get rid of 80 per cent of
the overhead.
The truth is that the unprofitable business is so unprofitable because it
requires the overheads and because having so many different chunks of
business makes the organization horrendously complicated. It is equally
true that the very profitable business does not require the overheads, or only
a very small portion of them. You could have a business solely composed of
the profitable business and it could make the same absolute returns,
provided that you organized things differently.
And why is this so? The reason is the same. It is that simple is beautiful.
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
91
Business people seem to love complexity. No sooner is a simple business
successful than its managers pour vast amounts of energy into making it
very much more complicated. But business returns abhor complexity. As
the business becomes more complex, its returns fall dramatically. This is
not just because more marginal business is being taken. It is also because
the act of making a business more complex depresses returns more
effectively than any other means known to humanity
It follows that the process can be reversed. A complex business can be
made more simple and returns can soar. All it takes is an understanding of
the costs of complexity (or the value of simplicity) and courage to remove
at least four-fifths of lethal managerial overhead.
Simple is beautiful—complex is ugly
Those of us who believe in the 80/20 Principle will never succeed in
transforming industry until we can demonstrate that simple is beautiful and
why. Unless people understand this, they will never be willing to give up 80
per cent of their current business and overheads.
So we need to go back to basics and revise the common view of the roots
of business success. To do so, we must get involved in a current controversy
over whether size in business is a help or a hindrance. By resolving this
dispute, we will also be able to show why simple is beautiful.
For something very interesting, and unprecedented, is happening to
our industrial structure. Since the Industrial Revolution companies
have become both bigger and more diversified. Until the end of the
nineteenth century, nearly all companies were national or subnational,
having the vast bulk of their revenues confined to their home country;
and nearly all were in just one line of business. The twentieth century has
seen a series of transformations, changing the nature both of business and of
our daily lives. First, thanks largely to Henry Ford’s sensationally
successful quest to ‘democratize’ the automobile, there was the burgeoning
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
92
power of the assembly line, multiplying the revenues of the average firm,
creating mass branded consumer goods for the first time in history, slashing
the real cost of those goods and giving more and more power to the largest
enterprises. Then there was the emergence of so-called multinational
enterprises, that initially took the Americas and Europe, and later the whole
world, as their canvas. Next came the conglomerates, a new breed of
corporation that refused to confine itself to one line of business and rapidly
spread its tentacles across many industrial sectors and a myriad of products.
Then the invention and refinement of the hostile takeover, fuelled equally
by management ambition and the financial lubrication of leverage, gave
further impetus to size. Finally, in the last 30 years of the century, the
determination of industrial leaders, mainly from Japan, to seize global
leadership in their priority markets and as much market share as feasible
provided the final reinforcement to the cult of corporate size.
For various reasons, therefore, the first 75 years of the twentieth century
witnessed a progressive and apparently unstoppable expansion in the size of
industrial enterprise and, until recently, in the proportion of business
activity taken by the largest firms. But in the past two decades, the latter
trend has suddenly, and dramatically, gone into reverse. In 1979, the
Fortune 500 largest US firms accounted for nearly 60 per cent of US gross
national product, but by the early 1990s this had slumped to just 40 per
cent.
Does this mean that small is beautiful?
No. This is definitely the wrong answer. There is absolutely nothing
wrong with the belief long held by business leaders and strategists that
scale and market share are valuable. Extra scale gives greater volume over
which to spread fixed costs, especially the overhead costs that make up
the lion’s share of all costs (now that factories have been made so efficient).
Market share, too, helps to raise prices. The most popular firm, that
with the highest market share, the best reputation and brands and the
most loyal customers, should command a price premium over lowerSIMPLE
IS BEAUTIFUL
93
share competitors.
Yet why is that larger firms are losing market share to smaller firms? And
why does it happen that in practice, as opposed to theory, the advantages of
scale and market share fail to translate into higher profitability? Why is it
that firms often see their sales mushroom yet their returns on sales and
capital actually fall, rather than rise as the theory would predict?
The cost of complexity
The most important answer is the cost of complexity. The problem is not
extra scale, but extra complexity
Additional scale, without additional complexity, will always give lower
unit costs. To deliver to one customer more of one product or service,
provided that it is exactly the same, will always raise returns.
Yet additional scale is rarely just more of the same. Even if the customer
is the same, the extra volume usually comes from adapting an existing
product, providing a new product and/or adding more service. This requires
expensive overhead costs that are usually hidden, but always real. And if
new customers are involved it is far worse. There are high initial costs in
recruiting customers and they generally have different needs to existing
customers, causing even greater complexity and cost.
Internal complexity has huge hidden costs
When new business is different to existing business, even if it is only
slightly different, costs tend to go up, not just pro rata with the volume
increase but well ahead of it. This is because complexity slows down simple
systems and requires the intervention of managers to deal with the new
requirements. The cost of stopping and starting again, of communication
(and miscommunication) between extra people and above all the cost of the
‘gaps’ between people, when partially completed work is set down to await
someone else’s intervention and later picked up and passed
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
94
on into another gap—all these costs are horrendous and all the more
insidious because they are largely invisible. If the communication needs to
straddle different divisions, buildings and countries, the result is even
worse.
How this works is shown in Figure 31. Competitor B is larger than
competitor A, yet has higher costs. This is not because the scale curve
additional volume equals lower costs—doesn’t work. Rather, it is because
B’s extra volume has been bought at the cost of higher complexity. The
effect of this is massive, and much greater than the additional cost that is
visible relative to A. The scale curve operates, but its benefits are
overturned by the extra complexity.
Figure 31. The cost of complexity
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
95
Simple is beautiful explains the
80/20 Principle
Understanding the cost of complexity allows us to take a major leap
forward in the debate about corporate size. It is not that small is beautiful.
All other things being equal, big is beautiful. But all other thing are not
equal. Big is only ugly and expensive because it is complex. Big can be
beautiful. But it is simple that is always beautiful.
Even management scientists are belatedly realizing the value of
simplicity. A recent careful study of 39 middle-sized German companies,
led by Gunter Rommel,2 found that only one characteristic differentiated the
winners from the less successful firms: simplicity. The winners sold a
narrower range of products to fewer customers and also had fewer
suppliers. The study concludes that a simple organization was best at selling
complicated products.
This mental breakthrough helps to explain why and how the seemingly
outrageous claims of the 80/20 Principle, applied to corporate profits, can
actually be true. A fifth of revenues can produce four-fifths of profits. The
top 20 per cent of revenues can be 16 times more profitable than the bottom
20 per cent (or, where the bottom 20 per cent makes a loss, infinitely more
profitable!). Simple is beautiful explains a large part of why the 80/20
Principle works:
! Simple and pure market share is much more valuable than has
previously been recognized. The returns from pure scale have been
obscured by the cost of complexity associated with impure scale. And
different chunks of business have usually had different competitors and
different relative strength vis-à-vis those competitors. Where a business is
dominant in its narrowly defined niche, it is likely to make several times the
returns earned in niches where one faces a dominant competitor (the mirror
image).
! Parts of the business that are mature and simple can be amazingly
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
96
profitable. Cutting the number of products, customers and suppliers usually
leads to higher profits, partly because you can have the luxury of just
focusing on the most profitable activities and customers, but partly also
because the costs of complexity—in the form of overheads and
management—can be slashed.
! In different products, firms often have differences in the extent to which
they buy in goods and services from the outside (in the jargon, outsourcing).
Outsourcing is a terrific way to cut complexity and costs. The best approach
is to decide which is the part of the value-adding chain
(R&D/manufacturing/ distribution/selling/marketing/servicing) where your
company has the greatest comparative advantage—and then ruthlessly
outsource everything else. This can take out most of the costs of complexity
and enable dramatic reductions in headcount, as well as speeding up the
time it takes you to get a product to market. The result: much lower costs
and often significantly higher prices too.
! It can enable you to do away with all central functions and costs. If you
are just in one line of business, you don’t need a head office, regional head
offices or functional offices. And the abolition of the head office can have
an electric effect on profits. The key problem with head offices is not their
cost. It is the way they take away real responsibility and initiative from
those who do the work and add the value to customers. For the first time,
corporations can centre themselves around customer needs rather than
around the management hierarchy.
Before the head office is abolished, different chunks of business attract
different degrees of head office cost and interference. The most profitable
products and services are usually those that are left to get on with their own
life without any ‘help’ from the centre. This is why, when 80/20
profitability exercises have been carried out, executives are often staggered
to learn that the most neglected areas are the most profitable. It is no
accident. (And one of the unfortunate by products of 80/20 Analysis is
sometimes that the most profitable areas get a lot more attention from
managers at the top. As a result, they can begin to drop down the
profitability league table.)
! Finally, where a chunk of business is simple, the chances are that it is
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
97
closer to the customer. There is less management to get in the way.
Customers can be listened to and feel that they are important. People are
willing to pay a lot more for this. For customers, the quest for selfimportance
is at least as important as the quest for value. Simplicity raises
prices as well as lowering costs.
Contribution to overhead: one of the
lamest excuses for inaction
Frequently, managers faced with the results of 80/20 Analysis protest that
they cannot just focus on the most profitable segments. They point out that
the less profitable segments, and even the loss-making segments, make a
positive contribution to overheads. This is one of the lamest and most selfserving
defence mechanisms ever contrived.
If you focus on the most profitable segments, you can grow them
surprisingly fast—nearly always at 20 per cent a year and sometimes even
faster. Remember that the initial position and customer franchise are strong,
so it’s a lot easier than growing the business overall. The need for overhead
coverage from unprofitable segments can disappear pretty quickly.
Yet the truth is that you don’t need to wait. ‘If your eye offends you,
pluck it out!’ Just remove the offending overhead. If your will is strong, you
can always do it. The less profitable segments can sometimes be sold, with
or without their overheads, and always be closed. (Do not listen to
accountants who bleat about ‘exit costs’; a lot of these are just numbers on a
page with no cash cost. Even where there is a cash cost, there is normally a
very quick payback, one that will be much quicker, because of the value of
simplicity, than the bean counters will ever tell you.) A third option, often
the most profitable, is to harvest these segments, deliberately
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
98
losing market share. You let go of the less profitable customers and
products, cut off most support and sales effort, raise prices and allow sales
to decline at 5–20 per cent while you laugh all the way to the bank.
Go for the most simple 20 per cent
What is most simple and standardized is hugely more productive and cost
effective than what is complex. The simplest messages are the most
appealing and universal: to colleagues, consumers and suppliers. The
simplest structures and process flows are at once the most attractive and the
lowest cost. Letting the customer access your business system—as with all
forms of self-service— creates choice, economy, speed and spend.
Always try to identify the simplest 20 per cent of any product range,
process, marketing message, sales channel, product design, product
manufacture, service delivery or customer feedback mechanism. Cultivate
the simplest 20 per cent. Refine it until it is as simple as you can make it.
Standardize delivery of a simple product or service on as universal and
global a basis as possible. Pass up thrills, bells and whistles. Make the
simplest 20 per cent as high quality and consistent as imaginable. Whenever
something has become complex, simplify it; if you cannot, eliminate it.
Reducing complexity at Corning
How can a business in trouble use the 80/20 Principle to reduce complexity
and raise profits? An excellent case study is provided by Corning, which
produces ceramic substrates for automobile exhaust systems in Greenville,
Ohio, and Kaiserslautern, Germany.3
In 1992 the US business was doing badly and the next year the
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
99
German market fell sharply. Instead of panicking, the Corning executives
took a long, hard look at the profitability of all their products.
As in almost every firm around the world, the Corning executives had
used a standard cost approach to decide what to produce. But standard cost
systems are one of the most important reasons the 80/20 Principle has so
much to add: standard cost systems make it impossible to know true product
profitability, largely because they do not differentiate between high- and
low-volume products. When variable costs—such as overtime, training,
equipment modifications and downtime—were fully allocated at Corning,
the results caused astonishment.
Take two products made at Kaiserslautern: a high-volume, simple,
symmetrically shaped ceramic substrate, disguised here as the R10; and a
much lower-volume product, the R5, an odd-shaped substrate. The standard
cost of the R5 was 20 per cent more than that of the R 10. But when the
extra engineering and shopfloor effort to produce the R5 were fully costed,
it turned out to have an incredible cost, around 500, 000 per cent greater
than the R10!
Yet, on reflection, the data could be believed. The R10 virtually made
itself. The R5 required expensive engineers to hover over it, nudging it to
keep within specification. Therefore, if only R10s were made, far fewer
engineers would be needed. And that is what happened. By eliminating lowvolume,
unprofitable products, which contributed little to revenues and
negative amounts of profit, engineering capacity was reduced by 25 Per
cent.
The 50/5 Principle
The Corning analysis kept gravitating towards a very useful cousin of the
80/20 Principle—the 50/5 Principle.
The 50/5 Principle asserts that, typically, 50 per cent of a company’s
customers, products, components and suppliers will add less than 5 per cent
to revenues and profits. Getting rid of the low-volume (and negative value)
50 per cent of items is the key to reducing complexity.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
100
The 50/5 Principle worked at Corning. Out of 450 products produced at
Greenville, half produced 96.3 per cent of revenue; the other 50 per cent
yielded just 3.7 per cent. Depending on the period analysed, the German
plant showed that the low-volume 50 per cent of products produced only 2–
5 per cent of sales. In both locations, the bottom 50 per cent made losses.
More is worse
The road to hell is paved with the pursuit of volume. Volume leads to
marginal products, marginal customers and greatly increased managerial
complexity Since complexity is both interesting and rewarding to managers,
it is often tolerated or encouraged until it can no longer be afforded. At
Corning, they had filed up the plants with loss-making, complicating
business. The solution was to cut the number of products by more than half.
Instead of dealing with 1000 suppliers, purchases were consolidated
through the 200 suppliers who comprised 95 per cent of total supplies (a
95/20 Principle). The organization was streamlined and flattened.
At the heart of the market meltdown, Corning turned away business. This
might seem perverse, but it worked. A simpler, smaller operation rapidly
restored profits. Less was more.
Managers love complexity
At this point it is worth asking: why do supposedly profit-maximizing
organizations become complex, when this plainly destroys value?
One important answer, alas, is that managers love complexity.
Complexity is stimulating and intellectually challenging; it leavens boring
routine; and it creates interesting jobs for managers. Some people
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
101
believe that complexity obtrudes when no one is looking. No doubt—but
complexity is also sponsored by managers, just as it sponsors them. Most
organizations, even ostensibly commercial and capitalist ones, are
conspiracies of management against the interests of customers, investors
and the outside world generally. Unless firms are facing an economic crisis,
or have an unusual leader who favours investors and customers rather than
his or her own managers, excess management activity is virtually
guaranteed. It is in the interests of the managerial class in charge.4
Cost reduction through simplicity
There is thus a natural tendency for business, like life in general, to become
overcomplex. All organizations, especially large and complex ones, are
inherently inefficient and wasteful. They do not focus on what they should
be doing. They should be adding value to their customers and potential
customers. Any activity that does not fulfil this goal is unproductive. Yet
most large organizations engage in prodigious amounts of expensive,
unproductive activity.
Every person and every organization is the product of a coalition and the
forces within the coalition are always at war. The war is between the trivial
many and the vital few. The trivial many comprise the prevalent inertia and
ineffectiveness. The vital few are the breakthrough streaks of effectiveness,
brilliance and good fit. Most activity results in little value and little change.
A few powerful interventions have massive impact. The war is difficult to
observe: it is the same person, the same unit and the same organization
which produces both a mass of weak (or negative) output and a smattering
of highly valuable output. All we can discern is the overall result; we miss
both the garbage and the gems.
It follows that any organization always has great potential for cost
reduction and for delivering better value to customers: by simplifying what
it does and by eliminating low—or negative-value activities.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
102
Be mindful that:
! waste thrives on complexity; effectiveness requires simplicity
! the mass of activity will always be pointless, poorly conceived, badly
directed, wastefully executed and largely beside the point to customers
! a small portion of activity will always be terrifically effective and
valued by customers; it is probably not what you think it is; it is opaque and
buried within a basket of less effective activity
! all organizations are a mix of productive and unproductive forces:
people, relationships and assets
! poor performance is always endemic, hiding behind and succoured by a
smaller amount of excellent performance
! major improvements are always possible, by doing things differently
and by doing less.
Always recall the 80/20 Principle: if you study the output your firm
generates, the chances are that a quarter to a fifth of the activity accounts for
three-quarters or four-fifths of profits. Multiply that quarter or fifth.
Multiply the effectiveness of the rest, or cut it out.
Reducing costs using the 80/20 Principle
All effective techniques to reduce costs use three 80/20 insights:
simplification, through elimination of unprofitable activity; focus, on a few
key drivers of improvements; and comparison of performance. The last two
deserve elaboration.
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
103
Be selective
Do not tackle everything with equal effort. Cost reduction is an expensive
business!
Identify the areas (perhaps only 20 per cent of the whole business) that
have the greatest cost-reduction potential. Concentrate 80 per cent of your
efforts here.
You don’t want to get too bogged down in microanalysis. It can help to
apply the 80/20 rule. Ask yourself what are the major time sinks that you
can cut out, where are, the 80 per cent of the time delays and costs in your
current processes that you could target, and understand how you would
attack those.5
To be successful, one has to measure what really counts . . . most
organizations _fit Pareto’s rule: 80 percent of what is important is
supported by 20 percent of the costs . . . For example, a study in Pacific
Bell’s customer payment center found that 25 percent of the center’s work
was devoted to processing 0.1 percent of the payments. A third of the
payments were processed twice, and occasionally several times.6
In reducing cost or raising product and service quality, remember above all
that equal cost does not lead to equal customer satisfaction. A few parts of
cost are tremendously productive; but most cost has little or no relationship
to what customers value. Identify, treasure and multiply the few productive
costs; and get rid of the rest.
Using 80/20 Analysis to pinpoint improvement areas
80/20 Analysis can establish why particular problems arise and focus
attention on the key areas for improvement. To take a simple example, let’s
imagine that you are running a book publishing firm and that your
typesetting costs are 30 per cent above budget. Your product manager tells
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
104
you that there are 1001 reasons for the overrun: sometimes the authors are
late with the manuscript, sometimes the proofreaders or index compilers
take longer than planned, in many cases the book is longer than planned, the
charts and other figures often need correction and there are many other
special causes.
One thing you can do is to take a particular time period, say three months,
and carefully monitor the causes of the all typesetting cost overruns. You
should record the main reason for each overrun, and also the financial cost
penalty involved.
Figure 132 displays the causes in a table, ranking the most frequent cause
at the top and so on.
Causes Number %age Cumulative
percentage
1 Authors late with corrections 45 30.0 30.0
2 Authors late with original manuscript 37 24.7 54.7
3 Authors make too many corrections 34 22.7 77.4
4 Figures need correction 13 8.6 86.0
5 Book longer than planned 6 4.0 90.0
6 Proofreader late 3 2.0 92.0
7 Index compiler late 3 2.0 94.0
8 Permissions received late 2 1.3 95.3
9 Typesetter’s computer fault 1 0.67 96.0
10 Typesetter’s correction errors 1 0.67 96.6
11 Schedule changed by editor 1 0.67 97.3
12 Schedule changed by marketing 1 0.67 98.0
13 Schedule changed by printer 1 0.67 98.7
14 Fire at typesetter’s 1 0.67 99.3
15 Legal dispute with typesetter 1 0.67 100.0
Total 150 100 100
Figure 32. Causes of publisher’s typesetting overruns
Figure 33 converts this information to an 80/20 Chart. To construct this,
make the causes bars in descending order of importance, put the
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
105
number of causes per bar on the left-hand vertical axis and put the
cumulative percentage of causes on the right-hand vertical axis. This is
easily done and the visual summary of the data is quite powerful.
Figure 33. 80/20 Chart of causes of publisher’s typesetting overruns
We can see from Figure 33 that three of the fifteen problems (exactly 20 per
cent) cause nearly 80 per cent of the overruns. The cumulative line flattens
out quickly after the first five causes, telling you that you are reaching the
‘trivial many’ causes.
The major three causes all relate to authors. The publishing house could
solve this problem by writing into authors’ contracts a clause making them
liable for any extra typesetting costs caused by them being late or making
too many corrections. A minor change like this would eliminate over 80 per
cent of the problem.
Sometimes it is more useful to draw an 80/20 Chart on the basis of the
financial impact of the problem (or opportunity) rather than the number of
causes. The method is exactly the same.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
106
Compare performance
The 80/20 Principle states that there always are a few high-productivity
areas and many low-productivity ones. All of the most effective costreduction
techniques of the past 30 years, have used this insight (often with
conscious acknowledgement to the 80/20 Principle) to compare
performance. The onus is placed on the majority of laggards to improve
performance to the level of the best (sometimes taking the 90th percentile,
sometimes the 75th, usually within this range) or else to retire gracefully
from the field.
This is not the place to give chapter and verse on costreduction/
valueimprovement techniques such as benchmarking, best
demonstrated practice or reengineering. All of these are systematic
expansions of the 80/20 Principle and all, if (a big if pursued relentlessly,
can raise value to customers by tremendous amounts. Too often, however,
these techniques become the latest, evanescent management fad or selfcontained
programmes. They stand a much greater chance of success if
placed within the context of the very simple 80/20 Principle that should
drive all radical action:
! a minority of business activity is useful
! value delivered to customers is rarely measured and always unequal
! great leaps forward require measurement and comparison of the value
delivered to customers and what they will pay for it.
Conclusion: simplicity power
Because business is wasteful, and because complexity and waste feed on
each other, a simple business will always be better than a complex business.
Because scale is normally valuable, for any given level of complexity, it is
better to have a larger business. The large and simple business is the best.
SIMPLE IS BEAUTIFUL
107
The way to create something great is to create something simple. Anyone
who is serious about delivering better value to customers can easily do so,
by reducing complexity. Any large business is stuffed full of passengers—
unprofitable products, processes, suppliers, customers and, heaviest of all,
managers. The passengers obstruct the evolution of commerce. Progress
requires simplicity; and simplicity requires ruthlessness. This helps to
explain why simple is as rare as it is beautiful.
Hooking the
Right Customers
Those who analyze the reasons for their success know the 80/20 rule
applies. Eighty percent of their growth, profitability and satisfaction
comes from 20 percent of the clients. At a minimum, firms should identify
the top 20 percent to get a clear picture of desirable prospects for future
growth.
Vin Manaktala1
The 80/20 Principle is essential for doing the right kind of selling and
marketing and for relating this to any organization’s overall strategy,
including the whole process of producing and delivering goods and
services. We will show how to use the 80/20 Principle in this way. But first,
we have an obligation to clear away a lot of pseudo-intellectual
undergrowth about industrialization and marketing. For example, it is often
said that we live in a post-industrial world, that firms should not be
production led, that they should be marketing led and customer centred.
These are, at best, half-truths. A short historical excursion is necessary to
explain why.
In the beginning, most firms concentrated on their markets—their
important customers—with little or no thought. Marketing as a separate
6
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
109
function or activity was not necessary, yet the small business made sure that
it looked after its customers.
Then came the Industrial Revolution, which created big business,
specialization (Adam Smith’s pin factory) and eventually the production
line. The natural tendency of big business was, to subordinate customer
needs to the exigencies of low-cost mass production. Henry Ford famously
said that customers could have his Model T in ‘any colour as long as it’s
black’. Until the late 1950s, big business everywhere was overwhelmingly
production led.
It is easy for the sophisticated marketeer or businessperson today to sneer
at the primitiveness of the production-led approach. In fact the Fordist
approach was plainly the the right one for its time; the mission to simplify
goods and lower their cost, while making them more attractive, is the
foundation for today’s wealthy consumer society Products from the lowcost
factory progressively made goods in higher and higher categories
available (or, in the ghastly phrase, ‘affordable’) to consumers previously
excluded from the market. The creation of a mass market also created
spending power that had not previously existed, leading to a virtuous circle
of lower-cost production, higher consumption, greater employment, higher
purchasing power, greater unit volumes, lower unit costs, higher
consumption . . . and so on in a progressive, if not unbroken, upward spiral.
Viewed in this light, Henry Ford was not a production-driven troglodite: he
was a creative genius who did signal service to ordinary citizens. In 1909,
he said that his mission was to ‘democratize the automobile’. At the time,
the goal was laughable: only rich people had cars. But, of course, the massproduced
Model T, provided at a fraction of the cost of earlier cars, set the
ball rolling. For good and ill, and on the whole much more good than ill, we
enjoy the ‘horn of plenty’2 provided by the Fordist world.
Mass industrialization and innovation did not stop with automobiles.
Many products, from fridges to the Sony Walkman or the CD-Rom,
could not have been commissioned as a result of market research.
Nobody in the nineteenth century would have wanted frozen food,
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
110
because there were no freezers to keep it in. All the great breakthroughs
from the invention of fire and the wheel onward have been triumphs of
production which then created their own markets. And it is nonsense to say
that we live in a post-industrial world. Services are now being industrialized
in the same way that physical products were in the so-called industrial era.
Retailing, agriculture, flower production, language, entertainment, teaching,
cleaning, hotel provision and even the art of restauranteering—all these
used to be exclusively the province of individual service providers, nonindustrializable
and non-exportable. Now all these areas are being rapidly
industrialized and in some cases globalized.3
The 1960s rediscovered marketing and the 1990s
rediscovered customers
The success of the production-driven approach, with the focus on making
the product, expanding production and driving down costs, eventually
highlighted the approach’s own deficiencies. In the early 1960s, business
school professors like Theodore Levitt told managers to be marketing led.
His legendary Harvard Business Review article in 1960 called ‘Marketing
myopia’ encouraged industry to be ‘customer satisfying’ rather than ‘goods
producing’. The new gospel was electric. Business people fell over
themselves to win the hearts and minds of customers; a relatively new
branch of business studies, market research, was vastly expanded in order to
discover which new products customers wanted. Marketing became the hot
topic at business schools and marketing executives ousted those from
production backgrounds as the new generation of CEOs. The mass market
was dead; product and customer segmentation became the watchwords of
the wise. More recently, in the 1980s and 1990s, customer satisfaction,
customer centredness, customer delight and customer obsession have
become the stated goals of most enlightened and successful corporations.
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
111
The customer-led approach is both right and dangerous
It is absolutely right to be marketing led and customer centred. But it can
also have dangerous and potentially lethal side effects. If the product range
is extended into too many new areas, or if the obsession with customers
leads to recruiting more and more marginal consumers, unit costs will rise
and returns fall. With additional product range, overhead costs rise sharply,
as a result of the cost of complexity Factory costs are now so low that they
comprise only a small part of firms’ value added—typically less than 10 per
cent of a product’s selling price. The vast majority of firms’ costs lie
outside the factory. These costs can be penal if the product range is too
large.
Similarly, chasing too many customers can escalate marketing and selling
costs, lead to higher logistical costs and very often, most dangerously of all,
permanently lower prevailing selling prices, not just for the new customers,
for the old ones too.
The 80/20 Principle is essential here. It can provide a synthesis of the
production-led and marketing-led approaches, so that you concentrate only
on profitable marketing and profitable customer centredness (as opposed to
the unprofitable customer centredness very evident today).
The 80/20 marketing gospel
The markets and customers on which any firm should be centred must be
the right ones, typically a small minority of those that the company
currently owns. The conventional wisdom on being marketing led and
customer centred is typically only 20 per cent correct.
There are three golden rules:
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
112
! Marketing, and the whole firm, should focus on providing a stunning
product and service in 20 per cent of the existing product line—that small
part generating 80 per cent of fully costed profits.
! Marketing, and the whole firm, should devote extraordinary endeavour
towards delighting, keeping for ever and expanding the sales to the 20 per
cent of customers who provide 80 per cent of the firm’s sales and/or profits.
! There is no real conflict between production and marketing. You will
only be successful in marketing if what you are marketing is different and,
for your target customers, either unobtainable elsewhere, or provided by
you in a product/service/price package that is much better value than is
obtainable elsewhere. These conditions are unlikely to apply in more than
20 per cent of your current product line; and you are likely to obtain more
than 80 per cent of your true profits from this 20 per cent. And if these
conditions apply in almost none of your product lines, your only hope is to
innovate. At this stage, the creative marketeer must become product led. All
innovation is necessarily product led. You cannot innovate without a new
product or service.
Be marketing led in the few right product/market segments
Products accounting for 20 per cent of your revenues are likely to comprise
80 per cent of your profits, once you take into account all the costs,
including overheads, associated with each product. It is even more likely
that 20 per cent of your products account for 80 per cent of your profits. Bill
Roatch, the cosmetics buyer for Raley’s, a retailer in Sacramento,
California, comments:
Eighty percent of your profit comes from 20% of the products. The
question [for a retailer] is, how much of the 80% can you afford to
eliminate [without the risk o losing stature in cosmetics] . . . Ask the
cosmetics franchisers and they say it’ll hurt. Ask the retailers and they’ll
say you can cut some.4
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
113
The logical thing to do is to expand the area devoted to the 20 per cent of
most profitable and best-selling lipsticks and to delist some of the
slowestselling product. Major promotion can then be undertaken in-store on
the most profitable 20 per cent, in cooperation with the suppliers of these
top products. Note that there are always apparently good reasons trotted out
as to why you need the unprofitable 80 per cent of products, in this case the
fear of ‘losing stature’ by having a smaller product line. Excuses like this
rest on the strange view that shoppers like to see a lot of product they have
no intention of buying which distracts attention from the product they like
to buy. Whenever this has been put to the test, the answer in 99 per cent of
cases is that delisting marginal products boosts profits while not harming
customer perceptions one jot.
A company making automobile appearance products—waxes, polishes
and other car-cleaning accessories—marketed its products through car
washes. In theory this was logical, since car-wash owners would make
incremental profits through each sale of appearance products simply by
putting them on display in space that would otherwise serve no useful
function. The idea was that they would give the products premium floor
space and make an effort to sell them.
But when the auto appearance product business was sold and new
management conducted a comprehensive sales analysis, they found that 4
the classic 80/20 rule applied—meaning 80 percent of the company’s
revenues were generated at 20 percent of its retail sites’.5 When the new
CEO turned up at 50 car washes generating minimal sales, he found his
display hidden away in corners or other poor locations, allowing them to be
mistreated and often badly understocked.
The CEO harangued the owners of the car washes not selling many of his
products. He told them to pull their socks up and manage their point-of-sale
displays properly. This didn’t work. Instead, he should have concentrated
on the best 20 per cent of car washes. What were they doing right? Could
they do more of it? What did they have in common? How could more such
outlets be found? As the successful outlets were owned by large,
professionally run chains, he should have cultivated these outlets rather than
trying to improve the performance of the sole-proprietor sites.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
114
Be customer centred for the few right customers
Important as focus on the few best products is, it is much less important
than focusing on the few best customers. Many successful marketing
professionals have learnt this lesson. A few cases may be cited. In telecoms:
Direct your attention where the real threat of competition exists. In most
instances, the 80/20 rule still applies—80% of the revenue comes from
20% of the customers. Know who the top revenueproducing customers are
and make sure you meet their needs.6
In contract management:
Remember the old 80/20 rule. Keep in closest contact with the 20 percent
of your clients who give you 80 percent of your business. Every Sunday
evening, go through contract management files and jot a note, send a
card, or make a note to call anyone you haven’t had contact with for too
long.7
Since 1994 American Express has conducted many campaigns to strengthen
its franchise with the merchants and their customers who generate the
highest volume of Amex sales. Carlos Viera, director of sales for American
Express in South Florida, explains:
It’s the old 80/20 rule: the bulk of your business comes from 20 percent Of
your market. This campaign is more of a PR campaign to get people to
dine out more.8
Successful marketing is all about a focus on the relatively small number
of customers who are the most active in consuming your product or service.
A few customers buy a great deal while a great number buy very little.
The latter can be ignored. It is the core customer group that matters:
those that consume heavily and frequently. For example, Emmis
Broadcasting, which owns WQHT and WRKS radio stations, has
conducted successful marketing campaigns focused exclusively on its core
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
115
audiences, to increase the time they spend listening:
Instead of spending 12 hours a week with their favorite radio station, they
are now spending 25 hours a week with it . . . we focus on the 80/20 rule of
consumption with all of our stations . . . we get every single one of the
listeners in our target audience and milk every single quarter-hour we can
out of them.9
Focusing on 20 per cent of your customers is a great deal easier than
focusing on 100 per cent of them. Being customer centred on all of your
customers is pretty nigh impossible. But cherishing the core 20 per cent is
both feasible and highly rewarding.
Four steps to lock in your core customers
You cannot target the key 20 per cent until you know who they are. Firms
with a finite customer base can work this out individual customer by
individual customer. Firms selling to ten of thousands or millions of
consumers need to know who their key customers are (these might be
channels of distribution) and also the profile of the heavy and frequent
consumer.
Second, you need to provide quite exceptional or even ‘outrageous’
service to them. To create a super insurance agency of the future, advises
consultant Dan Sullivan, ‘you’d build 20 relationships and cover them like a
run with service. Not regular service, not good service. Outrageous service.
You’d anticipate their needs when you could and you’d rush like a SWAT
team when they asked you for anything else.’10 The real key is to provide
surprising service, above and beyond the call of duty and quite out of line
with prevailing industry standards. This may have a short-term cost but it
will have a long-term reward.
Third, target new products and services at the core 20 per cent of
customers, developing them solely for and with this group. In seeking to
gain market share, try above all to sell more to your existing core
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
116
customers. This is not,generally, a matter of sheer selling skills. Nor is it
largely a matter of selling more of existing products to them, although
frequent-buyer programmes nearly always give a high return and raise both
short and long-term profits. But much more important still is developing
improvements to existing products, or developing totally new products, that
are wanted by, and if possible developed in liaison with, your core
customers. Innovation should be grounded in the relationship with this
group.
Finally, you should aim to keep your core customers for ever. Your core
customers are money in the bank. If any of them drops out, your
profitability will suffer. It follows that quite extraordinary efforts to keep
your core customers, that look as though they are depressing profitability,
are bound to enhance it substantially over any meaningful time period.
Exceptional service may even help short-term profits, by encouraging core
customers to buy more. But profitability is only a scorecard providing an
after-the-fact measure of a business’s health. The real measure of a healthy
business lies in the strength, depth and length of its relationship with its
core customers. Customer loyalty is the basic fact that drives profitability in
any case. If you start to lose core customers, the business is crumbling
beneath your feet, whatever you do to dress up short-term earnings. If core
customers are deserting, sell the business as fast as you can, or fire the
management—fire yourself if you are the boss—and take whatever drastic
steps are necessary to win the core customers back or at least stop the
attrition. Conversely, if the core customers are happy, the long-term
expansion of the business is assured.
Serving the core 20 per cent of customers must be a
company-wide obsession
Only a focus on the key 20 per cent of customers can make marketing a
firm’s central process. We started this section by looking at the shift from
being production led to being marketing led. We then observed that the socalled
excesses of the marketing approach were a result of focusing on
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
117
100 per cent rather than 20 per cent of customers. For the key 20 per cent of
customers, no excess can possibly be excessive enough. You can spend up
to the limits of your cash and your energy and know that you will obtain an
excellent return.
Your organization cannot be centred on, 100 per cent of its customers: it
can be centred on 20 per cent. To be centred on these is the main job of any
marketing person. But this type of marketing is also the main job of
everyone in the firm. The customer will see and judge by the efforts of
everyone in the firm, seen and unseen. In this sense, the 80/20 Principle
breaks new ground. It is central to marketing, it makes marketing central to
the firm, but it also makes marketing the job of everyone in any
organization. And marketing, for all the organization’s members, must
mean providing ever higher levels of delight for the key 20 per cent of its
customers.
Selling
Sales is marketing’s close cousin: the front-line activity to communicate to
and, at least as important, to listen to customers. 80/20 Thinking, as we will
see next, is just as crucial for sales as for marketing.
The key to superior sales performance is to stop thinking averages and
start thinking 80/20. Average sales performance is very misleading. Some
sales people earn over £100, 000 per annum while a large minority barely
beat the minimum wage. Average performance means little to these people
or to their employers.
Take any salesforce and perform an 80/20 Analysis. It is odds on that you
will find an unbalanced relationship between sales and salespeople. Most
studies find that the top 20 per cent of salespeople generate between 70 and
80 per cent of sales.11 For those who do not realize the prevalence of 80/20
relationships in life, this is a pretty remarkable result. But for anyone in
business, it holds an important key to raising profits in short order. In the
short term, profits are tied to sales more closely than
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
118
to any other variable. Why does the 80/20 Principle apply to sales and what
can we do about it?
There are two sets of reasons why sales per salesperson vary so much.
The first set relates to pure salesforce performance issues; the second to
structural issues of customer focus.
Salesperson performance
Suppose that your analysis duplicates one recent example and you find that
20 per cent of your sales personnel are generating 73 per cent of your sales.
What should you do about it?
One obvious but often neglected imperative is to hang on to the high
performers. You shouldn’t follow the old adage: if it ain’t broke don’t fix it.
If it ain’t broke, make damn sure it doesn’t break. The next best thing to
staying close to your customers is to stay close to the top salespeople. Keep
them happy; this cannot be done mainly with cash.
Next, hire more of the same type of salesperson. This is not necessarily
people with the same qualifications. Personality and attitude can be much
more important. Put your sales superstars in a room together and work out
what they have in common. Better still, ask them to help you hire more
people like them.
Third, try to identify when the top salespeople sell the most and what they
did differently then. The 80/20 Principle applies to time as well as to people:
80 per cent of sales by each of your salespeople were probably generated in
20 per cent of their worktime. Try to identify so-called lucky streaks and
why they happened. One commentator makes the point well:
If you’re in sales, think back to the best streak you ever had. What did you
do differently that week? I don’t know if ball players or salespeople are
more superstitious . . . but the successful ones in each field tend to look at
the conditions that were present when they were on a hot streak and try,
try, try not to change them. Unlike a ball player, however, if you’re in
sales, and you’re on a hot streak, change your underwear.12
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
119
Fourth, get everyone to adopt the methods that have the highest ratio of
output to input. Sometimes it’s advertising, sometimes personal sales visits,
sometimes focused mail shots, sometimes it’s making telephone calls. Do
more of what makes best use of time and money. You could decide to
analyse this, but it may be quicker and cheaper simply to observe how the
top salespeople spend their time.
Fifth, switch a successful team from one area with an unsuccessful team
from another area. Do this as a genuine experiment: you will soon find out
whether the good team can beat the structural difficulties or vice versa. If
the good team cracks the problem in the previously difficult area but the
other team is foundering, ask the former team what to do: the answer may
lie in splitting the teams so that some are left in each area. Recently a client
of mine had terrific success in international sales but the domestic team was
demotivated and losing market share. I suggested switching teams. The
CEO demurred, because the export team had language talents that would be
wasted in domestic sales. Eventually he agreed to release one of the
international team, fired the sales director of domestic and put the young
man from international in charge. Suddenly, the previously unstoppable loss
of market share was reversed. Not all such stories will have a happy ending,
but in sales it is generally true that nothing fails like failure and vice versa.
Finally, what about salesforce training? ‘Is it worth investing in training
the lower 80% of the salesforce to enhance their performance levels, or is it
a waste of time because so many of them are destined to wash out
regardless of training?’13 As on any issue, ask yourself what answer the
80/20 Principle implies. My answer:
! Only train those who you are reasonably sure plan to stick around with
you for several years.
! Get those who are the best salespeople to train them, rewarding the sales
superstars according to the subsequent performance of their trainees.
! Invest the most training in those who perform best after the first
tranche of training. Take the best 20 per cent of the trainees and invest 80
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
120
per cent of the training effort in them. Stop training the bottom 50 per cent,
unless it is clear that you are obtaining a good payback even on this effort.
Many salesforce performance differentials do derive from pure selling skill,
but many do not. These structural factors can also be looked at in 80/20
terms.
Selling is not just having good sales techniques
80/20 Analysis can identify structural reasons that reach far beyond
individual competence. These structural factors are often much easier to
address, and even more rewarding, than dealing with individual merit. A
great deal often depends on the products being sold and the customers being
served:
Look at the salesforce. We find, for example, that 20 percent of our
salespeople are generating 73 percent of our sales; we find that 16 percent
of our products are accounting for 80 percent of sales; also, 22 Percent of
our customers are producing 77 percent of our sales. . . Looking further at
our salesforce, we find that Black has 100 active accounts. 20 of these
produce about 80 percent of Black’s sales. Green covers 100 counties, and
we _find that 80 percent of her customers are concentrated in only 24
counties. Mite sells 30 different products. Six account for 81 percent of her
sales.14
We have already highlighted the 80/20 Principle’s application to products
and customers in the section on marketing. Those in charge of sales-forces
should therefore:
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
121
! Focus every salesperson’s efforts on the 20 per cent of products that
generate 80 per cent of sales. Make sure that the most profitable products
attract four times the credit that an equivalent dollar of less profitable
products does. The salesforce should be rewarded for selling the most
profitable products, not the least profitable.
! Focus salespeople on the 20 per cent of customers who generate 80 per
cent of sales and 80 per cent of profits. Teach the salesforce to rank their
customers by sales and profits. Insist that they spend 80 per cent of their
time on the best 20 per cent of customers, even if they have to neglect some
of the less important customers.
Spending more time with the minority of high-volume customers should
result in higher sales to them. If opportunities to sell more existing products
have been exhausted, the salesforce should concentrate on providing
superior service, so that existing business will be protected, and on
identifying new products that the core customers want.
! Organize the highest volume and profit accounts under one salesperson
or team, regardless of geography. Have more national accounts and fewer
regional ones.
National accounts used to be confined to firms where one buyer had
responsibility for purchasing all of one product, regardless of the location to
which it went. Here it is plainly sensible to have an important buyer marked
by a senior national sales executive. But increasingly, large accounts should
be treated as national accounts and served by a dedicated person or team,
even where there are many local buying points. Rich Chiarello, senior vice
president of US sales at Computer Associates International, comments:
Out of the top 20 percent of organizations, I’m going to get 80 percent of
my revenue. I’m going to treat those companies as national accounts. I
don’t care if a rep flies all over the country, he’s going to own the
account, and we’re going to identify everyone in that organization and put
a plan in place to sell them our products.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
122
! Lower costs and use the telephone for less important accounts. A
frequent complaint of salesforces is that downsizing or spending more time
on large accounts can result in some sales territories having twice as many
accounts as can reasonably be covered. One solution is to drop some
accounts, but this should only be done as, a last resort. A better solution,
very often, is to centralize the 80 per cent of smaller accounts and provide a
telephone selling and ordering service. This can provide a more efficient
service much more cheaply than is possible by face-to-face selling.
! Finally, get the salesforce to revisit old customers who have provided
good business in the past. This can mean knocking on old doors or calling
old phone numbers.
This is an amazingly successful sales technique, amazingly neglected. An
old, satisfied customer is very likely to buy from you again. Bill Bain, the
founder of strategic consultants Bain & Company, used to sell bibles door
to door in the US Deep South. He tells of a lean spell, trudging from door to
door and making no new sales, before he had a blinding glimpse of the
obvious. He went back to the last customer who had bought a bible and sold
her another one! Another man following the same technique is one of the
top real estate brokers in the US, Nicholas Barsan, a Romanian emigrant.
He wins over $1 million of personal commissions each year and over a third
of these come from repeat customers. Mr Barsan literally knocks on old
doors and ask the homeowners (who were clients of his) if they’re ready to
sell.
Making use of these 80/20 structural influences can turn mediocre
salespeople into good ones and good ones into superstars. The impact of a
better salesforce on a firm’s bottom line is immediate. Even more important
is the longer-term impact on market share and customer delight of a
salesforce pulsating with energy and confidence, determined to deliver the
best to the core customer group, but still able to listen to what they really
want.
HOOKING THE RIGHT CUSTOMERS
123
The vital few customers
Some customers are vital. Most are not. Some sales efforts are wonderfully
productive. Most are inefficient. Some will lose you money.
Channel marketing and sales effort where you can offer a minority of
potential customers something that is unique, better or much better value
than they can obtain elsewhere, provided that you can make higher profits
in the process. Any successful enterprise draws its success from this simple,
and simplifying, principle.
The Top 10
Business Uses
of the 80/20 Principle
The versatility of the 80/20 Principle is legion: it can be used in almost any
area of function to direct strategic and financial improvement. Therefore,
my Top 10 applications of the 80/20 Principle, shown in Figure 34,
inevitably represent an arbitrary choice. In compiling the list, I took into
account the extent to which, historically, the business world has already
used the 80/20 Principle and also my own opinion of its potential and
underexploited value.
Previous chapters have already covered my top six uses: strategy in
Chapters 4 and 5; quality and information technology in Chapter 3; cost
reduction and service improvement in Chapter 5; and marketing and sales in
Chapter 6. The current chapter provides a summary of the other four
applications of the 80/20 Principle in my hit parade.
7
THE TOP 10 BUSINESS USES
125
1 Strategy
2 Quality
3 Cost reduction and service improvement
4 Marketing
5 Selling
6 Information technology
7 Decision taking and analysis
8 Inventory management
9 Project management
10 Negotiation
Figure 34. The Top 10 business applications of the 80/20 Principle
Decision taking and analysis
Business requires decisions: frequent, fast and often without much idea
whether they are right or wrong. Since 1950, business has increasingly been
blessed, or if you prefer plagued, by management scientists and analytical
managers incubated in business schools, accounting firm and consultancies,
who can bring analysis (usually linked to extensive and expensive data
gathering) to bear on any issue. Analysis has probably been the greatest US
growth industry of all in the past half-century and analysis has been
instrumental in some of the greatest US triumphs, such as the moon landing
and the incredible accuracy of bombing in the Gulf War.
Anglo-Saxon big business has taken analysis too far
But analysis has had its darker side: the escalation of corporate staffs that
are only now being properly dismantled; the infatuation with the latest
fads peddled by highly numerate consultants; the stock market’s obsession
with ever more sophisticated analysis of near-term earnings, despite the
fact that these capture only a small part of what a company is really
worth; and the withdrawal of intuitive confidence from the forefront of
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
126
so much of business. The latter has led not just to the pervasive reality
behind the cliché of ‘analysis paralysis’, but also to a change for the worse
in those who head the West’s great corporations. Analysis has driven out
vision, just as analysts have driven out visionaries from the CEO’s suite.
In short, you can have too much of a good thing and there is no doubt that
the US and the LTK exhibit a strange misallocation of analysis: the private
sector has far too much and the public sector far too little. Our large
corporations need much less, but much more useful, analysis.
The 80/20 Principle is analytical, but puts analysis in
its place
Remember the main tenets of the 80/20 Principle:
! The doctrine of the vital few and the trivial many: there are only a few
things that ever produce important results.
! Most efforts do not realize their intended results.
! What you see is generally not what you get: there are subterranean
forces at work.
! It is usually too complicated and too wearisome to work out what is
happening and it is also unnecessary: all you need to know is whether
something is working or not and change the mix until it is; then keep the
mix constant until it stops working.
! Most good events happen because of a small minority of highly
productive forces; most bad things happen because of a small minority of
highly destructive forces.
! Most activity, en masse and individually, is a waste of time. It will not
contribute materially to desired results.
THE TOP 10 BUSINESS USES
127
Five rules for decision taking with the 80/20 Principle
Rule one says that not many decisions are very important. Before deciding
anything, picture yourself with two trays in front of you—like the dreaded
In and Out trays on a desk—one marked Important Decisions and one
Unimportant Decisions. Mentally sort the decisions, remembering that only
one in twenty is likely to fall into the Important Decision box. Do not
agonize over the unimportant decisions and above all don’t conduct
expensive and time-consuming analysis. If possible, delegate them all. If
‘you can’t, decide which decision has a probability of 51 per cent of being
correct. If you can’t decide that quickly, spin a coin.
Rule two affirms that the most important decisions are often those made
only by default, because turning points have come and gone without being
recognized. For example, your chief money makers leave because you have
not been close enough to them to notice their disaffection or correct it. Or
your competitors develop a new product (as competitors to IBM did with
the PC) that you think is wrongly conceived and will never catch on. Or you
lose a leading market-share position without realizing it, because the
channels of distribution change. Or you invent a great new product and
enjoy a modest success with it, but someone else comes along and makes
billions out of a lookalike rolled out like crazy. Or the nerd working for you
in R&D ups and founds Microsoft.
When this happens, no amount of data gathering and analysis will help
you realize the problem or opportunity. What you need are intuition and
insight: to ask the right questions rather than getting the right answers to the
wrong questions. The only way to stand a reasonable chance of noticing
critical turning points is to stand above all your data and analysis for one
day a month and ask questions like:
! What uncharted problems and opportunities, that could potentially have
tremendous consequences, are mounting up without my noticing?
! What is working well when it shouldn’t, or at least was not intended to?
What are we unintentionally providing to customers that for some
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
128
reason they seem to appreciate greatly?
! Is there something going badly astray, where we think we know why but
where we might be totally wrong?
! Since something important is always happening underneath the surface,
without anyone noticing it, what could it be this time?
The third rule of 80/20 decision taking is for important decisions: gather 80
per cent of the data and perform 80 per cent of the relevant analyses in the
first 20 per cent of the time available, then make a decision 100 per cent of
the time and act decisively as if you were 100 per cent confident that the
decision is right. If it helps you to remember, call this the 80/20/100/100
rule of decision taking.
Fourth, if what you have decided isn’t working, change your mind early
rather than late. The market in its broadest sense—what works in
practice—is a much more reliable indicator than tons of analysis. So don’t
be afraid to experiment and don’t persevere with losing solutions. Do not
fight the market.
Finally, when something is working well, double and redouble your bets.
You may not know why it’s working so well, but push as hard as you can
while the forces of the universe are bending your way. Venture capitalists
know this. Most of the investments in their portfolio fail to meet their
expectations, but they are redeemed by a few superstar investments that
succeed beyond everyone’s wildest dreams. When a business keeps
performing below its budgets, you may be sure you have a dog. When a
business consistently outperforms expectations, there is at least a good
chance that it can be multiplied by ten or a hundred times. In these
circumstances, most people settle for modest growth. Those who seize the
day become seriously rich.
THE TOP 10 BUSINESS USES
129
Inventory management
We saw in Chapter 5 that simplicity requires few products. Managing stock
is another key discipline flowing from the 80/20 Principle. Good stock
keeping, following the 80/20 Principle, is vital to profits and cash; it is also
an excellent check on whether a business is pursuing simplicity or
complexity
Nearly all businesses have far too much stock, partly because they have
too many products and partly because they have too many variants of each
product. Stock is measured in stock-keeping units (SKUs), with one unit for
each variant.
Stock almost invariably follows some sort of 80/20 distribution: that is,
around 80 per cent of stock only accounts for 20 per cent of volume or
revenues. This means that slow-moving stock is very expensive and cash
guzzling to keep and probably involves product that is inherently
unprofitable in any case.
I can cite two recent examples of stock review. In one of them:
Upon analyzing the data, Pareto’s 80/20 rule held close to true: 20
percent of the SKUs picked represented 75 percent of the daily volume.
These picks were primarily full cases and typically required multiple cases
per SKU The remaining 80 percent of the SKUs represented only 25
percent of the daily volume. These picks amounted to only a few pieces per
SKU per day.1
The 20 per cent was very profitable and the 80 per cent unprofitable.
Another case comes from a warehouse introducing an electronic system;
before doing so it decided to see if it had the right stock in the first place:
A preliminary study showed that the 80/20 rule didn’t fit. Rather than 20
percent of the SKUs accounting for 80 percent of warehouse activity, only
0.5 percent Oust 144 SKUS) account for 70 percent of the activity.2
Again, while I know nothing at all about the product, it is a safe bet that
the top 0.5 per cent of SKUs by volume are a great deal more profitable
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
130
than the other 99.5 per cent.
An example which is very important to me, because correcting it made
me a lot of money, is that of Filofax. My partner at the time, Robin Field,
takes up the story.
While Filofax design and features had remained static [in the late 1980s],
the product line width had expanded beyond all control. The same basic
binder was available in a bewildering variety of sizes and a huge
assortment of—mainly exotic—skins. Name a creature and Filofax would
have ordered several thousand binders made of its hide and proudly
placed them in its catalogue and in stock. I don’t know what a Karung is,
but I inherited an awful lot of its skin in 1990. Similarly, name a subject:
bridge, chess, photography, bird watching, windsurfing, and Filofax
would have commissioned several specialist inserts, had tens of thousands
of them printed and put them in inventory. . . The result was, Of course,
not only a huge overhang of worthless stock, not only an administrative
burden of vast complexity, but total confusion among our retailers.3
Although good stock management is vital, there are only four key points to
it. The most strategic point—cut down radically on your unprofitable
product—has already been covered in Chapter 3.
For any given number of products, you should cut down on the number of
variants, starting with the slowest movers. Simply cut them out of the
product range, as Filofax did. Do not listen to anyone who tells you that the
slow movers are really needed. If this was so, they’d move much faster. Try
to export the problem and cost of inventory management to other parts of
the value-added chain—to your suppliers or to your customers. The ideal
solution is for your stock never to come near your facilities. With modern
information technology this is increasingly possible and can raise service
standards while simultaneously cutting costs.
Finally, if you must hold a certain amount of stock, there are many
tactical ways to use the 80/20 Principle to cut costs and speed up picking
and packing:
THE TOP 10 BUSINESS USES
131
The 80/20 rule is reliable in many applications, meaning that about 80
Percent of the activity involves only about 20 percent of the inventory. The
areas divided by size and weight . . . can now also be divided by part
number into areas of high or low activity. In general, fast-moving items
should be located as close to the shoulder–hip zone as possible, to
minimize operator movement and reducefatigue.4
Inventory management in the future
Despite its historical overtones of the brown coat and the dusty store,
inventory management is a fast-moving and exciting area. ‘Virtual
inventory’, with on-line order processing, is becoming widespread,
lowering costs but also improving service to distributors and customers.
Innovators such as Baxter International’s hospital supply business are
having great success with ‘customerintimate’ inventory systems. In all
cases, progress is being driven by focus: focus on the most important
customers, focus on a simple product line, simply tracked and simply
delivered.
The 80/20 Principle is also alive and well in another increasingly
important component of corporate value creation: project management.
Project management
Management structures are being exposed as inadequate and worse. They
usually destroy more value than they add. One way of destroying or
circumventing structures, so as to create value for valuable customers, is the
project. Many of the most energetic people in business, from chief
executives down, do not really have a job: rather, they pursue a number of
projects.
Project management is an odd task. On the one hand, a project involves a
team: it is a cooperative and not a hierarchical arrangement. But on the
other hand, the team members usually do not know fully
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
132
what to do, because the project requires innovation and ad hoc
arrangements. The art of the project manager is to focus all team members
on the few things that really matter.
Simplify the objective
First, simplify the task. A project is not a project: almost invariably, a
project is several projects. There may be a central theme in the project and a
series of satellite concerns. Alternatively, there may be three or four themes
wrapped up in the same project. Think of any project with which you are
familiar and you will see the point.
Projects obey the law of organizational complexity The greater the
number of a project’s aims, the effort to accomplish the project
satisfactorily increases, not in proportion, but geometrically.
80 per cent of the value of any project will come from 20 per cent of its
activities; and the other 80 per cent will arise because of needless
complexity. Therefore do not start your project until you have stripped it
down to one simple aim. Jettison the baggage.
Impose an impossible time scale
This will ensure that the project team does only the really high-value tasks:
Faced with an impossible time scale, [project members] will identify and
implement the 20 percent of the requirement that delivers 80 percent of the
benefit. Again, it is the inclusion of the ‘nice to have’ features that turn
potentially sound projects into looming catastrophes.5
Impose stretch targets. Desperate situations inspire creative solutions. Ask
for a prototype in four weeks. Demand a live pilot in three months. This
will force the development team to apply the 80/20 rule and really make it
work. Take calculated risks.6
THE TOP 10 BUSINESS USES
133
Plan before you act
The shorter the time allowed for a project, the greater proportion of time
which should be allowed for its detailed planning and thinking through.
When I was a partner at management consultants Bain & Company, we
proved conclusively that the best-managed projects we undertook—those
that had the highest client and consultant satisfaction, the least wasted time
and the highest margins—were those where there was the greatest ratio of
planning time to execution time.
In the planning phase, write down all the critical issues that you are trying
to resolve. (If there are more than seven of these, bump off the least
important.) Construct hypotheses on what the answers are, even if these are
pure guesswork (but take your best guesses).Work out what information
needs to be gathered or processes need to be completed to resolve whether
you are right or not with your guesses. Decide who is to do what and when.
Replan after short intervals, based on your new knowledge and any
divergences from your previous guesses.
Design before you implement
Particularly if the project involves designing a product or service, ensure
you have the best possible answer in the design phase before you start
implementation. Another 80/20 rule says that 20 per cent of the problems
with any design project cause 80 per cent of the costs or overruns; and that
80 per cent of these critical problems arise in the design phase and are
hugely expensive to correct later, requiring massive rework and in some
cases retooling.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
134
Negotiation
Negotiation completes my Top 10 applications of the 80/20 Principle in
business. Not surprisingly, negotiation has been much studied. The 80/20
Principle adds just two points, but they can be crucial.
Few points in a negotiation really matter
20 per cent or fewer of the points at issue will comprise over 80 per cent of
the value of the disputed territory. You may think this will be obvious to
both sides, but people like to win points, even completely unimportant ones.
Similarly, they respond to concessions, even trivial ones.
Therefore, build up a long list of spurious concerns and requirements
early in a negotiation, making them seem as important to you as possible .
These points must, however, be inherently unreasonable, or at least
incapable of concession by the other party without real hurt (otherwise they
will gain credit for being flexible and conceding the points). Then, in the
closing stages of the negotiation, you can concede the points that are
unimportant to you in exchange for more than a fair share of the really
important points.
For instance, imagine that you are negotiating with a sole supplier for the
prices on 100 parts of a key product you make. 80 per cent of the cost of
any product rests in 20 per cent of the parts. You should only really be
concerned about the prices of these 20 parts. But if you concede the asking
price on the other 80 parts too early in the negotiation, you lose valuable
bargaining chips. You should therefore construct reasons for the prices on
some of the unimportant 80 parts being important to you, perhaps by
exaggerating the number of units you are likely to consume.
Don’t peak too early
Second, it has often been observed that most negotiations go through a
THE TOP 10 BUSINESS USES
135
phony war and only get going in earnest when the deadline looms:
It also seems true that on account of the incredible pressure that time can
put on a negotiation, 80 percent of the concessions . . . will occur in the
last 20 percent of the time available. If demands are presented early on,
neither side may be willing to yield, and the entire transaction can fall
apart. But if additional demands or problems surface in the final 20
percent of the time available for the negotiation, both sides will be
moreflexible.7
Impatient people don’t make good negotiators.
How to secure a pay raise
Orten Skinner gives an intriguing example of how to exploit the 80/20
Principle:
80 percent of concessions will be made in the last 20 percent of
negotiating time. If your appointment to ask for a long-overdue raise is
scheduled for 9:00 a.m. and you know your supervisor has another
appointment at 10:00, expect the critical moments to occur around 9:50.
Pace yourself accordingly. Don’t make your request too early to permit a
gracious compromise on your supervisor’s part.8
Beyond the Top 10
By now you will have realized that the 80/20 Principle cuts across whatever
boxes we create. The insights derive from the living reality behind people,
behind business and behind the world in which business operates. The
80/20 Principle is so pervasive because it is a reflection of deeper forces
ruling our existence. It is time to draw these strands together.
The Vital Few
Give Success
to You
The 80/20 Principle comprises radar and autopilot. The radar gives us
insight: it helps us spot opportunities and dangers. The autopilot allows us
to stroll around our business arena and talk to customers and anyone else
who might matter, knowing that we are still in control of our destiny. The
logic of the 80/20 Principle requires us to grasp and internalize a few simple
points; we can then easily ‘think 80/20’ and ‘act 80/20’ whatever we are
doing.
A few things are always much more important than
most things
This is invariably true, yet difficult at first to credit. Unless we have
numbers or 80/20 Thinking to guide us, most things always appear more
8
THE VITAL FEW GIVE SUCCESS TO YOU
137
important than the few things that are actually more important. Even if we
accept the point in our minds, it is difficult to make the next hop to focused
action. Keep the ‘vital few’ in the forefront of your brain. And keep
reviewing whether you are spending more time and effort on the vital few
rather than the trivial many.
Progress means moving resources from low-value to
high-value uses
Like individual entrepreneurs, the free markets shift resources out of areas
of lower productivity into areas of higher productivity and yield. But neither
markets nor entrepreneurs, let alone today’s overcomplex corporate or
government bureaucracies, do this well enough. There is always a tail of
waste, usually a very long tail, where 80 per cent of resources are producing
only 20 per cent of value. This always creates arbitrage opportunities for
genuine entrepreneurs. The scope for entrepreneurial arbitrage is always
underestimated.
A few people add most of the value
The best people—meaning the people best fitted to what they are doing and
doing the things that make the most money—generate enormous surpluses,
usually far beyond what they are allowed to take out. Normally there are
very few such people. The majority add little more than they take out. A
large minority (still often the majority) take out more than they contribute.
This misallocation of resources is greatest in larger and more diversified
corporations.
Any large, managed corporation is an organized conspiracy to misallocate
rewards. The larger and more complex the firm, the greater the extent and
success of the conspiracy. Those who work in corporations, or have
extensive dealings with them, know that a few employees are priceless.
They add value far beyond their cost. Many employees are passengers
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
138
adding much less value than they cost. Some, perhaps 10–20 per cent,
subtract value, even ignoring their compensation.
There are many reasons for this happening: the difficulty of measuring
true performance; the political skill or otherwise of executives; the difficulttoeradicate
tendency to favour those whom we like; the ridiculous but
prevalent idea that job role should count for as much or more than
individual performance; and the sheer human tendency towards
egalitarianism, often buttressed by the legitimate wish to foster team
working. Waste and idleness gravitate to where complexity and democracy
meet.
I recently advised the head of an investment bank on how to divide up his
extremely large annual bonus pool. My client is an extremely rich self-made
businessman whose delight and source of success lie in spotting and
exploiting market imperfections. He believes passionately in the market. He
also knows that two people out of the hundreds in the bonus pool made
more than 50 per cent of the money in his division last year; in his line of
business it is easy to measure. But when I suggested giving more than half
the total pool to these two, he was aghast. Later on, we came to the case of
one executive who we both knew was subtracting more value than he added
(but who was both likeable and an extremely astute politician within the
bank). Why not cut his bonus to zero, I suggested. Again, my friend hadn’t
thought of that: ‘Gee, Richard, I’ve already cut it to a quarter of what it was
last year and I daren’t go any further.’ Yet in this case, the executive should
have been paying the bank to work there. Happily, the nettle was grasped.
The bonus was set at zero. The executive has now moved to a job where
he’s adding some value.
Accounting systems are the enemy of fair rewards, because they are
absolutely brilliant at obscuring where the money is really being made. This
is why, human frailty apart, the imbalance between performance and reward
is greater in large and complex firms than in small businesses. The
entrepreneur with four employees knows who is making the organization
money, and how much, without needing a divisional P&L. The CEO of a
large corporation needs to rely on misleading accounting data and the filter
provided by the head of human resources (dread phrase!); it is
THE VITAL FEW GIVE SUCCESS TO YOU
139
not surprising that in large firms the top performers get less than they
should and the mass of mediocre managers end up with more than they
deserve.
Margins vary wildly
Margins—between value and cost, between effort and reward—are always
highly variable. High-margin activities constitute a small part of total
activities but a majority of total margins. If we didn’t interfere with the
natural allocation of resources, these imbalances would become even more
marked. But we bury our heads in the sand (accounting systems
conveniently provide endless beaches specifically for this purpose) and
refuse to acknowledge the reality that the majority of what we and our firms
do is worth much less than the minority of high-margin activities.
Resources are always misallocated
We give too many resources to low-margin activities and too few to highmargin
activities. Yet despite our best endeavours, the high-margin
activities continue to flourish and the subsidized activities fail to generate
their own momentum. If resources are available, because of the slack
created by the high-margin activities, the low-margin activities will
consume more and more resources while continuing to contribute little, zero
or negative surpluses for reinvestment.
We are continually surprised at how well the best activities are doing and
at how long it is taking for the problem areas to turn around. Usually, the
latter never do. We nearly always take too long to realize this and only the
intervention of a new boss, a crisis or a management consultant makes us do
what we should have done long ago.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
140
Success is underrated and underfêted
Success is undervalued, undercelebrated and underexploited. Often it is
dismissed as a lucky streak. But luck, like accidents, doesn’t happen as
often as we think. ‘Luck’ is our word for success which we cannot fathom.
Behind luck there is always a highly effective mechanism, generating
surpluses regardless of our failure to notice it. Because we cannot believe
our ‘luck’, we fail to multiply and benefit from value-creating virtuous
circles.
Equilibrium is illusory
Nothing lasts for ever and nothing is ever in equilibrium. Innovation is the
only constant. Innovation is always resisted and often retarded, but rarely
extinguished. Successful innovation is hugely more productive than the
status quo; it has to be, to overcome it. Beyond a certain point, the
momentum of effective innovation becomes irresistible. Personal, corporate
and national success resides not in invention, or even in creating the
marketable innovation, but in spotting the point at which the innovation is
about to become irresistible and then riding it for all it is worth.
Change is necessary for survival. Constructive change requires insight
into what is most effective and a focus on that winning way.
The biggest wins all start small
Finally, something big always comes from something which is small to start
with. Small causes, small products, small firms, small markets, small
systems: all of these are often the start of something big. Yet they are rarely
recognized as such. Our attention is usually on the mass of what already
exists, not on the trend evident in small phenomena. We usually only notice
something after it has already become big, when the growth is already
decelerating. Fortunes are made by the very few who latch on to
THE VITAL FEW GIVE SUCCESS TO YOU
141
growth when it is still small and accelerating. Even those who are
experiencing the growth rarely realize its significance or potential to make a
fortune.
Stop thinking 50/50
We need massive reeducation to stop thinking 50/50 and start thinking
80/20. Figure 35 contains some hints.
! Think skewness. Expect 20 per cent to equal 80 per cent. Expect
80 per cent to equal 20 per cent.
! Expect the unexpected. Expect 20 per cent to lead to 80 per cent
and 80 per cent to result in 20 per cent.
! Expect everything—your time, your organization, your market and
every person or business entity you come across—to have quality
20 per cent: its essence, its power, its value, a small part with
substantially all the goodness hidden away by the mass of
mediocrity. Look for the powerful 20 per cent.
! Look for the invisible 20 per cent and the subterranean 20 per cent.
It’s there—find it. Unexpected successes are one give-away. If a
business activity succeeds beyond expectations, that is a 20 per
cent activity—and it will have much further to run.
! Expect tomorrow’s 20 per cent to be different to today’s 20 per cent.
Where is the germ, the seed, of tomorrow’s 20 per cent? Where are
the 1 per cents that will grow to 20 per cents and be worth 80 per
cent? Where are the 3 per cents that last year were 1 per cents?
! Develop the facility for mentally blocking out the 80 per cents — the
easy answer, the obvious reality, the evident mass, the current
incumbent, the conventional wisdom, the prevailing consensus.
None of these is what it seems or worth its weight in the basest of
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
142
base metals. These 80 per cents are huge blots on the landscape,
stopping you seeing the 20 per cents beyond. Look round these
ugly blots, look over them, look beneath them, look through them.
However you do it, ignore them, pretend they don’t exist. Free up
your vision for the elusive 20 per cents.
Figure 35 How to think 80/20
Psychologists tell us, however, that thought and attitudes can be changed by
appropriate action, as well as the other way round. The best way to start
thinking 80/20 is to start acting 80/20, just as the best way to start acting
80/20 is to start thinking 80/20.You have to try them out in tandem. Figure
36 contains hints on how to act 80/20.
! Whenever you spot a 20 per cent activity, run to it, surround
yourself with it, immerse yourself in it, patent it, make yourself its
expert, worshipper, high priest, partner, creator, propagandist and
indispensable ally. Make the most of it. If the most appears to be
more than you can imagine, multiply your imagination.
! Use whatever resources you have at your disposal—talent, money,
friends, business allies, powers of persuasion, your credit, your
organization, whatever you have or can purloin—to seize, magnify
and exploit any 20 per cent you come across.
! Use alliances with other people extensively, but only ally yourself to
20 per cent people and to the 20 per cent of them that are powerful
allies. Then seek to ally your alliance to other 20 percenters and 20
percentages.
! Exploit 80/20 arbitrage. Whenever you can, move resources from 80
per cent activities to 20 per cent activities. The profit from this is
enormous because it is highly leveraged arbitrage. You use what is
not very valuable to make something that is enormously valuable,
winning at both ends of the exchange.
There are two principal media of 80/20 arbitrage: people and
money, or assets that are proxies for money or can be turned into
money. Move 20 per cent people (including yourself) away from 80 per
cent activities towards 20 per cent activities.
Move money from 80 per cent activities to 20 per cent activities. If
THE VITAL FEW GIVE SUCCESS TO YOU
143
possible and not too risky, use leverage (gearing) in the process. If you
really are moving 80 per cent to 20 per cent activities, the risk is much
lower than generally perceived. There are two forms of money
leverage. One is borrowing. The other is using other people’s money
(OPM) as equity rather than debt. OPM used for 80 per cent activities is
addictive, dangerous and risky. It ends in tears. OPM used for 20 per
cent activities creates winners all round and, quite fairly, allows you to
be the biggest winner.
! Innovate new 20 per cent activities. Steal 20 per cent ideas from
elsewhere: other people, other products, other industries, other
intellectual spheres, other countries. Apply them in your own 20 per
cent backyard.
! Ruthlessly prune 80 per cent activities. 80 per cent time drives out 20
per cent time. 80 per cent allies hog space that should go to 20 per
cent allies. 80 per cent assets deprive 20 per cent activities of funds.
80 per cent business relationships displace 20 per cent ones. Being
in 80 per cent organisations or places stops you spending time in 20
per cent ones. Living in an 80 per cent place prevents you moving to
a 20 per cent one. Mental energy expended on 80 per cent activities
takes away from 20 per cent projects.
Figure 36. How to act 80/20
So there we have it. Think 80/20 and act 80/20. Those who ignore the 80/20
Principle are doomed to average returns. Those who use it must bear the
burden of exceptional achievement.
On to Part Three
The 80/20 Principle has proved its worth in business and in helping
business to startling success in the West and in Asia. Even those who do not
love business, or know of the 80/20 Principle, have been touched by the
progress made by the minority who do.
CORPORATE SUCCESS NEEDN’T BE A MYSTERY
144
Yet the 80/20 Principle is a principle of life, not of business. It originated
in academic economics. It works in business because it reflects the way the
world works, not because there is something about business that particularly
fits the 80/20 Principle. In any situation, the 80/20 Principle is either true or
not true; whenever it has been tested, inside or outside the business arena, it
works equally well. It is just that the principle has been tested far more
often within the confines of business enterprise.
It is high time to liberate the power of the 80/20 Principle and use it
beyond business. Business and the capitalist system are exciting and
important parts of life, but they are basically procedures; the envelope of
life, but not its contents. The most precious part of life lies in the inner and
outer lives of individuals, in personal relationships and in the interactions
and values of society
Part Three attempts to relate the 80/20 Principle to our own lives, to
achievement and to happiness. Part Four explores how the 80/20 Principle
is intrinsic to the advance of civilization, to progress in society Parts Three
and Four are more speculative and less proven than what we have covered
thus far, but are potentially even more important. The reader is asked to
collaborate in the expedition to the unknown that we are about to begin.
Part Three
Work Less, Earn and
Enjoy More
Being Free
The 80/20 Principle, like the truth, can make you free. You can work less.
At the same time, you can earn and enjoy more. The only price is that you
need to do some serious 80/20 Thinking. This will yield a few key insights
that, if you act on them, could change your life.
And this can happen without the baggage of religion, ideology or any
other externally imposed view. The beauty of 80/20 Thinking is that it is
pragmatic and internally generated, centred around the individual.
There is a slight catch. You must do the thinking. You must ‘editionize’
and elaborate what is written here for your own purposes. But this shouldn’t
be too difficult.
The insights from 80/20 Thinking are few in number but very powerful.
Not all of them will apply to every reader, so if you find your experience
different, skip along until you meet the next insight that does resonate with
your own position.
9
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
148
Become an 80/20 thinker, starting with
your own life
My ambition is not just to serve up insights from 80/20 Thinking and have
you tailor them to your own life. I am actually much more ambitious than
that. I want you to lock on to the nature of 80/20 Thinking so that you can
develop your own insights, both particular and general, which have not
crossed my mind. I want to enlist you in the army of 80/20 thinkers,
multiplying the amount of 80/20 Thinking let loose in the world.
The common attributes of 80/20 Thinking are that it is reflective,
unconventional, hedonistic, strategic and non-linear; and that it combines
extreme ambition (in the sense of wanting to change things for the better)
with a relaxed and confident manner. It is also on the constant lookout for
80/20-type hypotheses and insights. Some explanation of these areas will
provide a pointer to how to conduct 80/20 Thinking so you will know when
you are on the right track.
80/20 Thinking is reflective
The objective of 80/20 Thinking is to generate action which will make
sharp improvements in your life and that of others. Action of the type
desired requires unusual insight. Insight requires reflection and
introspection. Insight sometimes requires data gathering and we will
indulge gently in a little of this as it relates to your own life. Often, insight
can be generated purely by reflection, without the explicit need for
information. The brain already has much more information than we can
imagine.
80/20 Thinking is different from the type of thinking which prevails
today. The latter is usually rushed, opportunistic, linear (for example, x is
good or bad, what caused it?) and incrementalist. The predominant type
BEING FREE
149
of thinking in today’s world is very closely allied to immediate action and
consequently is greatly impoverished. Action drives out thought. Our
objective, as 80/20 thinkers, is to leave action behind, do some quiet
thinking, mine a few small pieces of precious insight and then act:
selectively, on a few objectives and a narrow front, decisively and
impressively, to produce terrific results with as little energy and as few
resources as possible.
80/20 Thinking is unconventional
80/20 Thinking teases out where conventional wisdom is wrong, as it
generally is. Progress springs from identifying the waste and suboptimality
inherent in life, starting with our daily lives, and then doing something
about it. Conventional wisdom is no help here, except as a counter
indicator. It is conventional wisdom that leads to the waste and
suboptimality in the first place. The power of the 80/20 Principle lies in
doing things differently based on unconventional wisdom. This requires you
to work out why most other people are doing things wrongly or to a fraction
of their potential. If your insights are not unconventional, you are not
thinking 80/20.
80/20 Thinking is hedonistic
80/20 Thinking seeks pleasure. It believes that life is meant to be enjoyed. It
believes that most achievement is a byproduct of interest, joy and the desire
for future happiness. This may not seem controversial, but most people do
not do the simple things that would be conducive to their happiness, even
when they know what they are.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
150
Most people fall into one or more of the following traps. They spend a lot
of time with people they do not much like. They do jobs they are not
enthusiastic about. They use up most of their ‘free time’ (incidentally an
anti-hedonistic concept) on activities they do not greatly enjoy. The reverse
is also true. They do not spend most time with the people they like most;
they do not pursue the career they would most like; and they do not use
most of their free time on the activities they enjoy most. They are not
optimists, and even those who are optimists do not plan carefully to make
their future lives better.
All this is curious. One could say that it is the triumph of experience over
hope, except that ‘experience’ is a self-created construct that usually owes
more to our perception of external reality than to objective external reality
itself. It would be better to say that it is the triumph of guilt over joy, of
genetics over intelligence or predestination over choice and, in a very real
sense, of death over life.
‘Hedonism’ is often held to imply selfishness, a disregard for others and a
lack of ambition. All this is a smear. Hedonism is in fact a necessary
condition for helping others and for achievement. It is very difficult, and
always wasteful, to achieve something worthwhile without enjoying it. If
more people were hedonistic, the world would be a better and, in all senses,
a richer place.
80/20 Thinking believes in progress
There has been no consensus for the past 3000 years on whether progress
exists, whether the history of the universe and of mankind demonstrates
a jagged upward path or something less hopeful. Against the idea of
progress are Hesiod (around 800BC), Plato (428–348BC), Aristotle
(384–322BC), Seneca (4BCAD54), Horace (AD65–8), St Augustine
(AD354–430) and most living philosophers and scientists. In favour of the
idea of progress stand nearly all of the Enlightenment figures of the late
BEING FREE
151
seventeenth century and eighteenth century, such as Fontenelle and
Condorcet, and a majority of nineteenth-century thinkers and scientists,
including Darwin and Marx. Team captain for progress must be Edward
Gibbon (1737–94), the oddball historian, who wrote in The Decline and Fall
of the Roman Empire:
We cannot be certain to what height the human species may aspire in their
advance toward perfection . . . We may therefore safely acquiesce in the
pleasing conclusion that every age of the world has increased, and still
increases, the real wealth, the happiness, the knowledge, and perhaps the
virtue, of the human race.
Nowadays, of course, the evidence against progress is much stronger than in
Gibbon’s day. But so too is the evidence for progress. The debate can never
be resolved empirically. Belief in progress has to be an act of faith. Progress
is a duty’1 If we did not believe in the possibility of progress, we could never
change the world for the better. Business understands this. On the whole,
business, in alliance with science, has provided the greatest evidence for
progress. Just as we have discovered that natural resources are not
inexhaustible, business and science have come along and supplied new
dimensions of unnatural inexhaustibility: economic space, the microchip,
new enabling technologies.2 But to be of greatest benefit, progress should
not be confined to the worlds of science, technology and business. We need
to apply progress to the quality of our own lives, individually and
collectively.
80/20 Thinking is inherently optimistic because, paradoxically, it reveals
a state of affairs that is seriously below what it should be. Only 20 per cent
of resources really matter in terms of achievement. The rest, the large
majority, are marking time, making token contributions to the overall effort.
Therefore, give more power to the 20 per cent, get the 80 per cent up to a
reasonable level and you can multiply the output. Progress takes you to a
new and much higher level. But, even at this level, there will still typically
be an 80/20 distribution of outputs/inputs. So you can progress again to a
much higher level.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
152
The progress of business and science vindicates the 80/20 Principle.
Construct a huge computer that can make calculations several times faster
than any previous machine. Demand that the computer be made smaller,
faster and cheaper, several times smaller, faster and cheaper. Repeat the
process. Repeat it again. There is no end in sight to such progress. Now
apply the same principle to other provinces of life. If we believe in progress,
the 80/20 Principle can help us to realize it. We may even end up proving
Edward Gibbon right: real wealth, happiness, knowledge, and perhaps
virtue, can be constantly increased.
80/20 Thinking is strategic
To be strategic is to concentrate on what is important, on those few
objectives that can give us a comparative advantage, on what is important to
us rather than others; and to plan and execute the resulting plan with
determination and steadfastness.
80/20 Thinking is non-linear
Traditional thinking is encased within a powerful but sometimes inaccurate
and destructive mental model. It is linear. It believes that x leads to y, that y
causes z and that b is the inevitable consequence of a. You made me
unhappy because you were late. My poor schooling led to my dead-end job.
I have been successful because I am very clever. Hitler caused the Second
World War. My firm cannot grow because the industry is declining.
Unemployment is the price we pay for low inflation. High taxes are
necessary if we want to look after the poor, the sick and the old. And so on.
All of these are examples of linear thinking. Linear thinking is
BEING FREE
153
Attractive because it is simple, cut and dried. The trouble is that it is a poor
description of the world and an even worse preparation for changing it.
Scientists and historians have long ago abandoned linear thinking. Why
should you cling to it?
80/20 Thinking offers you a liferaft. Nothing flows from one simple
cause. Nothing is inevitable. Nothing is ever in equilibrium or
unchangeable. No undesired state of affairs need endure. Nothing desirable
need be unobtainable. Few people understand what is really causing
anything, good or bad. Causes may be very influential without being
particularly noticeable or even (yet) very extensive. The balance of
circumstances can be shifted in a major way by a minor action. Only a few
decisions really matter. Those that do, matter a great deal. Choice can
always be exercised.
80/20 Thinking escapes from the linear-logic trap by appealing to
experience, introspection and imagination. If you are unhappy, do not worry
about the proximate cause. Think about the times you have been happy and
manoeuvre yourself into similar situations. If your career is going nowhere,
do not tinker around at the edges seeking incremental improvements: a
bigger office, a more expensive car, a grander-sounding tide, fewer working
hours, a more understanding boss. Think about the few, most important
achievements that are yours in your whole life and seek more of the same, if
necessary switching jobs or even careers. Do not look for causes, especially
not for causes of failure. Imagine, and then create, the circumstances that
will make you both happy and productive.
80/20 Thinking combines extreme ambition
with a relaxed and confident manner
We have been conditioned to think that high ambition must go with
thrusting hyperactivity, long hours, ruthlessness, the sacrifice both of self
and others to the cause, and extreme busyness. In short, the rat race. We pay
dearly for this association of ideas. The combination is neither
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
154
desirable nor necessary.
A much more attractive, and at least equally attainable, combination is
that of extreme ambition with confidence, relaxation and a civilized manner.
This is the 80/20 ideal, but it rests on solid empirical foundations. Most
great achievements are made through a combination of steady application
and sudden insight. Think of Archimedes in his bath or Newton sitting
under a tree being struck by an apple. The immensely important insights
thus generated would not have happened if Archimedes had not been
thinking about displacement or Newton about gravity, but neither would
have occurred if Archimedes had been chained to his desk or Newton
frenetically directing teams of scientists.
Most of what any of us achieve in life, of any serious degree of value to
ourselves and others, occurs in a very small proportion of our working lives.
80/20 Thinking and observation make this perfectly clear. We have more
than enough time. We demean ourselves, both by lack of ambition and by
assuming that ambition is served by bustle and busyness. Achievement is
driven by insight and selective action. The still, small voice of calm has a
bigger place in our lives than we acknowledge. Insight comes when we are
feeling relaxed and good about ourselves. Insight requires time—and time,
despite conventional wisdom, is there in abundance.
80/20 insights for individuals
The rest of Part Three will explore 80/20 insights for your personal life,
some of which can be sampled here as a taster. It only takes action on a few
insights to improve greatly the quality of your life.
BEING FREE
155
! 80 per cent of achievement and happiness takes place in 20 per cent of
our time—and these peaks can be expanded greatly.
! Our lives are profoundly affected, for good and ill, by a few events and
a few decisions. The few decisions are often taken by default rather than
conscious choice: we let life happen to us rather than shaping our own lives.
We can improve our lives dramatically by recognizing the turning points
and making the decisions that will make us happy and productive. There are
always a few key inputs to what happens and they are often not the obvious
ones. If the key causes can be identified and isolated, we can very often
exert more influence on them than we think possible.
! Everyone can achieve something significant. The key is not effort, but
finding the right thing to achieve. You are hugely more productive at some
things than at others, but dilute the effectiveness of this by doing too many
things where your comparative skill is nowhere near as great.
! There are always winners and losers—and always more of the latter.
You can be a winner by choosing the right competition, the right team and
the right methods to win. You are more likely to win by rigging the odds in
your favour (legitimately and fairly) than by striving to improve your
performance. You are more likely to win again where you have won before.
You are more likely to win when you are selective about the races you
enter.
! Most of our failures are in races for which others enter us. Most of our
successes come from races we ourselves want to enter. We fail to win most
races because we enter too many of the wrong ones: their ones, not our
ones.
! Few people take objectives really seriously. They put average effort into
too many things, rather than superior thought and effort into a few
important things. People who achieve the most are selective as well as
determined.
! Most people spend most of their time on activities that are of low value
to themselves and others. The 80/20 thinker escapes this trap and can
achieve much more of the few higher-value objectives without noticeably
more effort.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
156
! One of the most important decisions someone can make in life is their
choice of allies. Almost nothing can be achieved without allies. Most people
do not choose their allies carefully or even at all. The allies somehow arrive.
This is a serious case of letting life happen to you. Most people have the
wrong allies. Most also have too many and do not use them properly. 80/20
thinkers choose a few allies carefully and build the alliances carefully to
achieve their specific objectives.
! An extreme case of carelessness with allies is picking the wrong
‘significant other’ or life partner. Most people have too many friends and do
not enjoy an appropriately selected and reinforced inner circle. Many people
have the wrong life partners—and even more do not nurture the right life
partner properly.
! Money used rightly can be a source of opportunity to shift to a better
lifestyle. Few people know how to multiply money, but 80/20 thinkers
should be able to do so. As long as money is subordinated to lifestyle and
happiness, there is no harm in this ability
! Few people spend enough time and thought cultivating their own
happiness. They seek indirect goals, like money and promotion, that may be
difficult to attain and will prove when they are attained to be extremely
inefficient sources of happiness. Not only is happiness not money, it is not
even Eke money. Money not spent can be saved and invested and, through
the magic of compound interest, multiplied. But happiness not spent today
does not lead to happiness tomorrow. Happiness, like the mind, will atrophy
if not exercised. 80/20 thinkers know what generates their happiness and
pursue it consciously, cheerfully and intelligently, using happiness today to
build and multiply happiness tomorrow.
BEING FREE
157
Time is waiting in the wings
The best place to start 80/20 Thinking about achievement and happiness is
the subject of time. Our society’s appreciation of the quality and role of
time is very poor. Many people intuitively understand this and several
hundred thousand busy executives have sought redemption in the form of
time management. But these executives are just tinkering around the edges.
Our whole attitude towards time needs to be transformed. We don’t need
time management—we need a time revolution.
Time
Revolution
But at my back I always hear
Time’s wingèd chariot hurrying near;
And yonder all before us lie
Deserts of vast eternity.
Andrew Marvell1
Almost everyone, whether ultra busy or ultra idle, needs a time revolution.
It is not that we are short of time or even that we have too much of it. It is
the way we treat time, even the way we think about it, that is the problem—
and the opportunity. For those who have not experienced a time revolution,
it is the fastest way to make a giant leap in both happiness and
effectiveness.
10
TIME REVOLUTION
159
The 80/20 Principle and time revolution
The 80/20 Principle, when applied to our use of time, advances the
following hypotheses:
! Most of any individual’s significant achievements—most of the value
someone adds in personal, professional, intellectual, artistic, cultural or
athletic terms—is achieved in a minority of their time. There is a profound
imbalance between what is created and the time taken to create it, whether
the time is measured in days, weeks, months, years or a lifetime.
! Similarly, most of an individual’s happiness occurs during quite
bounded periods of time. If happiness could be accurately measured, a large
majority of it would register in a fairly small proportion of the total time
and this would apply during most periods, whether the period measured was
a day, a week, a month, a year or a lifetime.
We could rephrase these two ideas with spurious precision, but greater
snappiness, using 80/20 shorthand:
! 80 per cent of achievement is attained in 20 per cent of the time taken;
conversely, 80 per cent of time spent leads to only 20 per cent of output
value.
! 80 per cent of happiness is experienced in 20 per cent of life; and 80 per
cent of time contributes only 20 per cent of happiness.
Remember that these are hypotheses to be tested against your experience,
not self-evident truths or the results of exhaustive research.
Where the hypotheses are true (as they are in a majority of cases I have
tested), they have four rather startling implications:
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
160
! Most of what we do is of low value.
! Some small fragments of our time are much more valuable than all the
rest.
! If we can do anything about this, we should do something radical: there
is no point tinkering around the edges or making our use of time a little
more efficient.
! If we make good use of only 20 per cent of our time, there is no
shortage of it!
Spend a few minutes or hours reflecting on whether the 80/20 Principle
operates for you in each of these spheres. It doesn’t matter what the exact
percentages are and in any case it is almost impossible to measure them
precisely. The key question is whether there is a major imbalance between
the time spent on the one hand and achievement or happiness on the other.
Does the most productive fifth of your time lead to four-fifths of valuable
results? Are four-fifths of your happiest times concentrated into one-fifth of
your life?
These are important questions and should not be answered glibly. It might
be an idea to set this book aside and go for a walk. Don’t come back until
you have decided whether your use of time is unbalanced.
The point is not to manage your time
better!
If your use of time is unbalanced, a time revolution is required. You don’t
need to organize yourself better or alter your time allocation at the margins;
you need to transform how you spend your time. You probably also need to
change the way you think about time itself.
What you need should not, however, be confused with time
TIME REVOLUTION
161
management. Time management originated in Denmark as a training device
to help busy executives organize their time more effectively. It has now
become a $1 billion industry operating throughout the world.
The key characteristic of the time management industry now is not so
much the training, but more the sale of ‘time managers’, executive personal
organizers, both of the traditional paper-based type and now increasingly
electronic. Time management also often, comes with a strong evangelical
pitch: the fastest growing corporation in the industry, Franklin, has deep
Mormon roots.2
Time management is not a fad, since its users are usually highly
appreciative of the systems used and they generally say that their
productivity has risen by 15–25 per cent as a result. But time management
aims to fit a litre into a pint pot. It is about speeding up. It is specifically
aimed at business people pressured by too many demands on their time. The
idea is that better planning of each tiny segment of the day win help
executives act more efficiently. Time management also advocates the
establishment of clear priorities, to escape the tyranny of daily events that,
although very urgent, may not be all that important.
Time management implicitly assumes that we know what is and is not a
good use of our time. If the 80/20 Principle holds, this is not a safe
assumption. In any case, if we knew what was important, we’d be doing it
already.
Time management often advises people to categorize their list of ‘to do’
activities into A, B, C or D priorities. In practice, most people end up
classifying 60–70 per cent of their activities as A or B priorities. They
conclude that what they are really short of is time. This is why they were
interested in time management to start with. So they end up with better
planning, longer working hours, greater earnestness and usually greater
frustration too. They become addicted to time management, but it doesn’t
fundamentally change what they do, or significantly lower their level of
guilt that they are not doing enough.
The name time management gives the game away. It implies that time can
be managed more efficiently, that it is a valuable and scarce resource and
that we must dance to its tune. We must be parsimonious with time.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
162
Given half a chance, it will escape from us. Time lost, the time management
evangelists say, can never be regained.
We now live in an age of busyness. The long-predicted age of leisure is
taking an age to arrive, except for the unemployed. We now have the absurd
situation noted by Charles Handy3 that working hours for executives are
growing—60 hours a week are not unusual—at the same time as there is a
worsening shortage of work to go round.
Society is divided into those who have money but no time to enjoy it and
those who have time but no money. The popularity of time management
coexists with unprecedented anxiety about using time properly and having
enough time to do one’s job satisfactorily.
80/20 time heresy
The 80/20 Principle overturns conventional wisdom about time. The
implications of 80/20 time analysis are quite different and, to those
suffering from the conventional view of time, startlingly liberating. The
80/20 Principle asserts the following:
! Our current use of time is not rational. There is therefore no point in
seeking marginal improvements in how we spend our time. We need to
go back to the drawing board and overturn all our assumptions about time.
! There is no shortage of time. In fact, we are positively awash with it.
We only make good use of 20 per cent of our time. And for the most
talented individuals, it is often tiny amounts of time that make all the
difference. The 80/20 Principle says that if we doubled our time on the top
20 per cent of activities, we could work a two-day week and achieve 60 per
cent more than now. This is light years away from the frenetic world of time
management.
TIME REVOLUTION
163
! The 80/20 Principle treats time as a friend, not an enemy. Time gone is
not time lost. Time will always come round again. This is why there are
seven days in a week, twelve months in a year, why the seasons come round
again. Insight and value are likely to come from placing ourselves in a
comfortable, relaxed and collaborative position towards time. It is our use
of time, and not time itself, that is the enemy.
! The 80/20 Principle says that we should act less. Action drives out
thought. It is because we have so much time that we squander it. The most
productive time on a project is usually the last 20 per cent, simply because
the work has to be completed before a deadline. Productivity on most
projects could be doubled simply by halving the amount of time for their
completion. This is not evidence that time is in short supply.
Time is the benign link between the past,
present and future
It is not shortage of time that should worry us, but the tendency for the
majority of time to be spent in low-quality ways. Speeding up or being
more ‘efficient’ with our use of time will not help us; indeed, such ways of
thinking are more the problem than the solution.
80/20 Thinking directs us to a more ‘eastern’ view of time. Time
should not be seen as a sequence, running from left to right as in nearly
all graphical representations that the culture of business has imposed on
us. It is better to view time as a synchronizing and cyclical device, just as
the inventors of the clock intended. Time keeps coming round, bringing
with it the opportunity to learn, to deepen a few valued relationships, to
produce a better product or outcome and to add more value to life. We
do not exist just in the present; we spring from the past and have a treasure
trove of past associations; and our future, like our past, is already
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
164
immanent in the present. A far better graphical representation of time in our
lives than the left-to-right graph is a series of interlocked and ever larger
and higher triangles, as shown in Figure 37.
Figure 37. The time triad
The effect of thinking about time in this way is that it highlights the
need to carry with us, through our lives, the most precious and valued 20
per cent of what we have—our personality, abilities, friendships and even
our physical assets—and ensure that they are nurtured, developed,
extended and deepened, to increase our effectiveness, value and happiness.
This can only be done by having consistent and continuous relationships,
founded on optimism that the future will be better than the present,
because we can take and extend the best 20 per cent from the past
and the present to create that better future. Viewed in this way, the
future is not a random movie which we are half way through, aware of
(and terrified by) time whizzing past. Rather, the future is a dimension
of the present and the past, giving us the opportunity to create something
TIME REVOLUTION
165
better. 80/20 Thinking insists that this is always possible. All we have to do
is to give freer rein and better direction to our most positive 20 per cent.
A primer for time revolutionaries
Here are seven steps to detonating a time revolution.
Make the difficult mental leap of dissociating effort and
reward
The Protestant work ethic is so deeply engrained in everyone, of all
religions and none, that we need to make a conscious effort to extirpate it.
The trouble is that we do enjoy hard work, or at least the feeling of virtue
that comes from having done it. What we must do is to plant firmly in our
minds that hard work, especially for somebody else, is not an efficient way
to achieve what we want. Hard work leads to low returns. Insight and doing
what we ourselves want lead to high returns.
Decide on your own patron saints of productive laziness. Mine are
Ronald Reagan and Warren Buffett. Reagan made an effortless progression
from B-film actor to darling of the Republican Right, Governor of
California and extremely successful President.
What did Reagan have going for him? Good looks, a wonderfully
mellifluous voice which he deployed instinctively on all the right occasions
(the high point of which undoubtedly consisted in his words to Nancy when
shot, ‘Honey, I forgot to duck’), some very astute campaign managers, oldfashioned
grace and a Disneyesque view of America and the world.
Reagan’s ability to apply himself was limited at best, his grasp of
conventional reality ever more tenuous, his ability to inspire the US and
destroy communism ever more awesome. To maul Churchill’s dictum,
never was so much achieved by so few with so little effort.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
166
Warren Buffett became (for a time) the richest man in the US, not by
working but by investing. Starting with very little capital, he has
compounded it over many years at rates far above stock market average
appreciation. He has done this with a limited degree of analysis (he started
before sliderules were invented) but basically with a few insights which he
has applied consistently.
Buffett started his riches rollercoaster with one Big Idea: that US local
newspapers had a local monopoly that constituted the most perfect business
franchise. This simple idea made him his first fortune and much of his
subsequent money has been made in shares in the media: an industry he
understands.
If not lazy, Buffett is very economical with his energy. Whereas most
fund managers buy lots of stocks and churn them frequently, Buffett buys
few and holds them for ages. This means that there is very little work to do.
He pours scorn on the conventional view of investment portfolio
diversification, which he has dubbed the Noah’s Ark method: ‘one buys two
of everything and ends up with a zoo’. His own investment philosophy
‘borders on lethargy’.
Whenever I am tempted to do too much, I remember Ronald Reagan and
Warren Buffett. You should think of your own examples, of people you
know personally or those in the public eye, who exemplify productive
inertia. Think about them often.
Give up guilt
Giving up guilt is clearly related to the dangers of excessively hard work.
But it is also related to doing the things you enjoy. There is nothing wrong
with that. There is no value in doing things you don’t enjoy.
Do the things that you like doing. Make them your job. Make your job
them. Nearly everyone who has become rich has had the added bonus of
becoming rich doing things they enjoy. This might be taken as yet another
example of the universe’s 80/20 perversity
20 per cent of people not only enjoy 80 per cent of wealth but also
TIME REVOLUTION
167
monopolize 80 per cent of the enjoyment to be had from work: and they are
the same 20 per cent!
That curmudgeonly old Puritan, John Kenneth Galbraith, has drawn
attention to a fundamental unfairness in the world of work. The middle
classes not only get paid more for their work, but they have more interesting
work and enjoy it more. They have secretaries, assistants, first-class travel,
luxurious hotels and more interesting working lives too. In fact, you would
need to have a large private fortune to afford all the perquisites that senior
industrialists now routinely award themselves.
Galbraith has advanced the revolutionary view that those who have less
interesting jobs should be paid more than those with jobs that are more fun.
What a spoilsport! Such views are thought provoking, but no good will
come of them. As with so many 80/20 phenomena, if you look beneath the
surface you can detect a deeper logic behind the apparent inequity.
In this case the logic is very simple. Those who achieve the most have to
enjoy what they do. It is only by fulfilling oneself that anything of
extraordinary value can be created. Think, for example, of any great artist in
any sphere. The quality and quantity of the output are stunning. Van Gogh
never stopped. Picasso ran an art factory long before Andy Warhol, because
he loved what he did.
Revel in Michelangelo’s prodigious, sexually driven, sublime output.
Even the fragments that I can remember—his David, The Dying Slave, the
Laurentian Library, the New Sacristy, the Sistine chapel ceiling, the Pietà in
Saint Peter’s— are miraculous for one individual. Michelangelo did it all,
not because it was his job, or because he feared the irascible Pope Julius II
or even to make money, but because he loved his creations and young men.
You may not have quite the same drives, but you will not create anything
of enduring value unless you love creating it. This applies as much to purely
personal as to business matters.
I am not advocating perpetual laziness. Work is a natural activity that
satisfies an intrinsic need, as the unemployed, retired and those who make
overnight fortunes rapidly discover. Everyone has their own natural
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
168
balance, rhythm and optimal work/play mix and most people can sense
innately when they are being too lazy or industrious. 80/20 Thinking is most
valuable in encouraging people to pursue high-value/satisfaction activities
in both work and play periods, rather than in stimulating an exchange of
work for play. But I suspect that most people try too hard at the wrong
things. The modern world would greatly benefit if a lower quantity of work
led to a greater profusion of creativity and intelligence. If much greater
work would benefit the most idle 20 per cent of our people, much less work
would benefit the hardest-working 20 per cent; and such arbitrage would
benefit society both ways. The quantity of work is much less important than
its quality; and its quality depends on self-direction.
Free yourself from obligations imposed by others
It is a fair bet that when 80 per cent of time yields 20 per cent of results, that
80 per cent is undertaken at the behest of others.
It is increasingly apparent that the whole idea of working directly for
someone else, of having a job with security but limited discretion, has just
been a transient phase (albeit one lasting two centuries) in the history of
work.4 Even if you work for a large corporation, you should think of
yourself as an independent business, working for yourself, despite being on
Monolith Inc’s payroll.
The 80/20 Principle shows time and time again that the 20 per cent who
achieve the most either work for themselves or behave as if they do.
The same idea applies outside work. It is very difficult to make good use
of your time if you don’t control it. (It is actually quite difficult even if you
do, since your mind is prisoner to guilt, convention and other externally
imposed views of what you should do—but at least you stand a chance of
cutting these down to size.)
It is impossible, and even undesirable, to take my advice too far. You will
always have some obligations to others and these can be extremely useful
from your perspective. Even the entrepreneur is not really a lone
TIME REVOLUTION
169
wolf, answerable to no one. He or she has partners, employees, alliances
and a network of contacts, from whom nothing can be expected if nothing is
given. The point is to choose your partners and obligations extremely
selectively and with great care.
Be unconventional and eccentric in your use of time
You are unlikely to spend the most valuable 20 per cent of your time in
being a good soldier, in doing what is expected of you, in attending the
meetings that everyone assumes you will, in doing what most of your peers
do or in otherwise observing the social conventions of your role. In fact,
you should question whether any of these things is necessary.
You will not escape from the tyranny of 80/20—the likelihood that 80 per
cent of your time is spent on low-priority activities—by adopting
conventional behaviour or solutions.
A good exercise is to work out the most unconventional or eccentric ways
in which you could spend your time: how far you could deviate from the
norm without being thrown out of your world. Not all eccentric ways of
spending time will multiply your effectiveness, but some or at least one of
them could. Draw up several scenarios and adopt the one that allows you
the most time on high-value activities that you enjoy.
Who among your acquaintances is both effective and eccentric? Find out
how they spend their time and how it deviates from the norm. You may
want to copy some of the things they do and don’t do.
Identify the 20 per cent that gives you 80 per cent
About a fifth of your time is likely to give you four-fifths of your
achievement or results and four-fifths of your happiness. Since this may not
be the same fifth (although there is usually considerable overlap), the first
thing to do is to be clear about whether your objective, for the purposes of
each run through, is achievement or happiness. I recommend
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
170
that you look at them both separately.
For happiness, identify your happiness islands: the small amounts of
time, or the few years, that have contributed a quite disproportionate
amount of your happiness. Take a clean sheet of paper, write ‘Happiness
Islands’ at the top and list as many of them as you can remember. Then try
to deduce what is common between all or some of the happiness islands.
Repeat the procedures for your unhappiness islands. These will not
generally comprise the other 80 per cent of your time, since (for most
people) there is a large no-man’s-land of moderate happiness between the
happiness and unhappiness islands. Yet it is important to identify the most
significant causes of unhappiness and any common denominators between
them.
Repeat this whole procedure for achievement. Identify your achievement
islands: the short periods when you have achieved a much higher ratio of
value to time than during the rest of your week, month, year or life. Head a
clean sheet of paper with ‘Achievement Islands’ and list as many as you
can, if possible taken over the whole of your life.
Try to identify the achievement islands’ common characteristics. Before
leaving your analysis, you might want to glance at the list of the Top 10
highest-value uses of time on page 176. This is a general list compiled from
many people’s experience and may nudge your memory.
List separately your achievement desert islands. These are the periods of
greatest sterility and lowest productivity. The list of the Top 10 low-value
uses of time on page 176 may help you. Again, what do they tend to have in
common?
Now act accordingly.
Multiply the 20 per cent of your time that gives you
80 per cent
When you have identified your happiness and achievement islands, you are
likely to want to spend more time on these and similar activities.
TIME REVOLUTION
171
When I explain this idea some people say there is a flaw in my logic,
because spending more time on the top 20 per cent may lead to diminishing
returns setting in. Twice as much time on the top 20 per cent may not lead
to another 80 per cent of output, perhaps only to another 40, 50, 60 or 70
per cent.
I have two replies to this point. First, since it is impossible (at the
moment) to measure happiness or effectiveness with anything approaching
precision, the critics may well be right in some cases. But who cares? There
will still be a marked increase in the supply of what is best.
But my second answer is that I don’t think the critics are generally right.
My recommendation is not that you duplicate exactly what it is that you are
doing today that is in the 20 per cent yielding 80 per cent. The point of
examining the common characteristics of your happiness and achievement
islands is to isolate something far more basic than what has happened: to
isolate what you are uniquely programmed to do best.
It may well be that there are things you should be doing (to realize your
full potential achievement or happiness) that you have only started doing
imperfectly, to some degree, or even that you have not started to do at all.
For example, Dick Francis was a superb National Hunt jockey, but did not
publish his first racing mystery until he was nearly 40. Now his success,
money earned and possibly personal satisfaction from the latter activity far
exceed those from the former. Richard Adams was an unfulfilled, middleaged,
middle-level civil servant before he wrote the bestseller Watership
Down.
It is not at all uncommon for analysis of happiness or achievement islands
to yield insight into what individuals are best at, and what is best for them,
which then enables them to spend time on totally new activities that have a
higher ratio of reward to time than anything they were doing before. There
can, therefore, be increasing returns as well as the possibility of diminishing
returns. In fact, one thing you should specifically consider is a change of
career and/or lifestyle.
Your basic objective, when you have identified both the specific activities
and the general type of activity that take 20 per cent of your time but yield
80 per cent of happiness or achievement, should be to increase
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
172
the 20 per cent of time spent on those and similar activities by as much as
possible.
A short-term objective, usually feasible, is to decide to take the 20 per
cent of time spent on the high-value activities up to 40 per cent within a
year. This one act will tend to raise your ‘productivity’ by between 60 and
80 per cent. (You will now have two lots of 80 per cent of output, from two
lots of 20 per cent of time, so your total output would go from 100 to 160
even if you forfeited all the previous 20 from low-value activities in
reallocating some of the time to the high-value activities!)
The ideal position is to move the time spent on high-value activities up
from 20 to 100 per cent. This may only be possible by changing career and
lifestyle. If so, make a plan, with deadlines, for how you are going to make
these changes.
Eliminate or reduce the low-value activities
For the 80 per cent of activities that give you only 20 per cent of results, the
ideal is to eliminate them. You may need to do this before allocating more
time to the high-value activities (although people often find that firing
themselves up to spend more time on the high-value activities is a more
efficient way of forcing them to set aside the low-value time sinks).
First reactions are often that there is little scope for escaping from lowvalue
activities. They are said to be inevitable parts of family, social or
work obligations. If you find yourself thinking this, think again.
There is normally great scope to do things differently within your existing
circumstances. Remember the advice above: be unconventional and
eccentric in how you use your time. Do not follow the herd.
Try your new policy and see what happens. Since there is little value in
the activities you want to displace, people may not actually notice if you
stop doing them. Even if they do notice, they may not care enough to force
you to do them if they can see that this would take major effort on their part.
But even if dropping the low-value activities does require a radical
TIME REVOLUTION
173
change in circumstances—a new job, a new career, new friends, even a new
lifestyle or partner—form a plan to make the desired changes. The
alternative is that your potential for achievement and happiness will never
be attained.
Four illustrations of eccentric and effective
time use
My first illustration is William Ewart Gladstone, the dominant Liberal
statesman of Victorian Britain who was elected Prime Minister four times.
Gladstone was eccentric in many ways, not least his spectacularly
unsuccessful attempts to rescue ‘fallen women’ from prostitution and his
not totally unrelated bouts of self-flagellation; but his use of time is the
eccentricity on which we shall focus here.5
Gladstone was not constrained by his political duties, or, rather, was
effective at them because he spent his time pretty much as he pleased in an
amazing variety of ways. He was an inveterate tourist, both in the British
Isles and overseas, often slipping over to France, Italy or Germany on
private business while Prime Minister.
He loved the theatre, pursued several (almost certainly non-physical)
affairs with women, read avidly (20, 000 books in his lifetime), made
incredibly long speeches in the House of Commons (which despite their
length were apparently compulsive listening) and virtually invented the
sport of modern electioneering, which he pursued with enormous gusto and
enjoyment. Whenever he felt even slightly ill, he would go to bed for at
least a whole day, where he would read and think. His enormous political
energy and effectiveness derived from his eccentric use of time.
Of subsequent British Prime Ministers, only Lloyd George, Churchill and
Thatcher came anywhere near to rivalling Gladstone’s eccentric use of time;
and all three were unusually effective.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
174
Three highly eccentric management consultants
The other examples of unconventional time management come from the
staid world of management consulting. Consultants are notorious for long
hours and frenetic activity. My three characters, all of whom I knew quite
well, broke all the conventions. They were also all spectacularly successful.
The first, whom I will call Fred, made tens of millions of dollars from
being a consultant. He never bothered to go to business school, but
managed to set up a very large and successful firm of consultants where
almost everyone else worked 70 or more hours a week. Fred visited the
office occasionally and chaired partners’ meetings once a month, which
partners from all over the globe were compelled to attend, but preferred to
spend his time playing tennis and thinking. He ruled the firm with an iron
fist but never raised his voice. Fred controlled everything through an
alliance with his five main subordinates.
The second, alias Randy, was one of these lieutenants. Apart from its
founder, he was virtually the only exception to the workaholic culture of the
firm. He had himself posted to a far-distant country, where he ran a thriving
and rapidly growing office, also staffed by people working unbelievably
hard, largely from his home. Nobody knew how Randy spent his time or
how few hours he worked, but he was incredibly laid back. Randy would
only attend the most important client meetings, delegating everything else
to junior partners and if necessary inventing the most bizarre reasons why
he could not be there.
Although head of the office, Randy paid zero attention to any
administrative matters. His whole energy was spent working out how to
increase revenues with the most important clients and then putting
mechanisms in place to do this with the least personal effort. Randy never
had more than three priorities and often only one; everything else went by
the board. Randy was impossibly frustrating to work for, but wonderfully
effective.
My third and final eccentric time user was a friend and partner: let’s call
him Jim. My abiding memory of Jim is of when we shared a small office,
together with a handful of other colleagues. It was cramped and
TIME REVOLUTION
175
full of wild activity: people talking on the phone, rushing round to get
presentations done, shouting from one end of the office to the other.
But there was Jim, an oasis of calm inactivity, staring thoughtfully at his
calendar, working out what to do. Occasionally, he would take a few
colleagues aside to the one quiet room and explain what he wanted
everyone to do: not once, not twice, but three times, in life-threateningly
tedious detail. Jim would then make everyone repeat back to him what they
were going to do. Jim was slow, languid and half-deaf. But he was a terrific
leader. He spent all his time working out which tasks were high value and
who should do them; and then ensuring that they got done.
The Top 10 low-value uses of time
You can only spend time on high-value activities (whether for achievement
or enjoyment) if you have abandoned low-value activities. I invited you
above to identify your low-value time sinks. To check that you have not
missed some out, Figure 38 lists the 10 which are most common.
Be ruthless in cutting out these activities. Under no circumstances give
everyone a fair share of your time. Above all, don’t do something just
because people ask, or because you receive a phone call or a fax. Follow
Nancy Reagan’s advice (in another context) and just Say No!—or treat the
matter with what Lord George Brown called ‘a complete ignore’.
The Top 10 highest-value uses of time
Figure 39 gives the other side of the coin.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
176
1 Things other people want you to do
2 Things that have always been done this way
3 Things you’re not unusually good at doing
4 Things you don’t enjoy doing
5 Things that are always interrupted
6 Things few other people are interested in
7 Things that have already taken twice as long
as you originally expected
8 Things where your collaborators are
unreliable or low quality
9 Things that have a predictable cycle
10 Answering the telephone
Figure 38. The Top 10 low-value uses of time
1 Things that advance your overall purpose in life
2 Things you have always wanted to do
3 Things already in the 20/80 relationship of
time to results
4
Innovative ways of doing things that promise
to slash the time required and/or multiply
the quality of results
5 Things other people tell you can’t be done
6 Things other people have done successfully
in a different arena
7 Things that use your own creativity
8 Things that you can get other people to do
for you with relatively little effort on your part
9
Anything with high-quality collaborators who
have already transcended the 80/20 rule of
time,
who use time eccentrically and effectively
10 Things for which it is now or never
Figure 39. The Top 10 highest-value uses of time
TIME REVOLUTION
177
When thinking about any potential use of time, ask two questions:
! Is it unconventional?
! Does it promise to multiply effectiveness?
It is unlikely to be a good use of time unless the answer to both questions is
yes.
Is a time revolution feasible?
Many of you may feel that much of my advice is rather revolutionary and
pie in the sky for your circumstances. Comments and criticisms that have
been made to me include the following:
! I can’t choose how to spend my time. My bosses won’t allow it.
! I would need to change job to follow your advice and I can’t afford the
risk.
! This advice is all very well for the rich, but I just don’t have that degree
of freedom.
! I’d have to divorce my spouse!
! My ambition is to improve my effectiveness 25 per cent, not 250
percent. I just don’t believe the latter can be done.
! If it were as easy as you say, everyone would do it.
If you find yourself saying any of these things, time revolution may not be
for you.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
178
Don’t start a time revolution unless you are willing to be
a revolutionary
I could encapsulate (or at least caricature) these responses as follows: ‘I’m
not a radical, let alone a revolutionary, so, leave me alone. I’m basically
happy with my existing horizons.’ Fair enough. Revolution is revolution. It
is uncomfortable, wrenching and dangerous. Before you start a revolution,
realize that it will involve major risks and will lead you into uncharted
territory.
Those who want a time revolution need to link together their past, present
and future, as suggested above by Figure 37. Behind the issue of how we
allocate time lurks the even more fundamental issue of what we want to get
out of our lives.
You Can
Always Get
What You Want
Things that matter most
Must never be at the mercy of things that matter least.
Johann Wolfgang von Goethe
Work out what you want from life. In the 1980s phrase, aim to ‘have it all’.
Everything you want should be yours: the type of work you want; the
relationships you need; the social, mental and aesthetic stimulation that will
make you happy and fulfilled; the money you require for the lifestyle that is
appropriate to you; and any requirement that you may (or may not) have for
achievement or service to others. If you don’t aim for it all, you’ll never get
it all. To aim for it requires that you know what you want.
Most of us don’t work out what we want. And most of us end up with
lopsided lives as a result. We may get work right and relationships wrong
11
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
180
or the other way round. We may strive after money or achievement, but find
after we achieve our goal that the victory is hollow.
The 80/20 Principle records this sorry state. 20 per cent of what we do
leads to 80 per cent of the results; but 80 per cent of what we do leads to
only 20 per cent. We are wasting 80 per cent of our effort on low-value
outcomes. 20 per cent of our time leads to 80 per cent of what we value; 80
per cent of our time disappears on things that have little value to us. 20 per
cent of our time leads to 80 per cent of happiness; but 80 per cent of our
time yields very little happiness.
But the 80/20 Principle does not always apply and need not apply. It is
there as a diagnostic, to point out an unsatisfactory and wasteful state of
affairs. We should aim to frustrate the 80/20 Principle, or at least translate it
to a higher plane where we can be much happier and more effective.
Remember the promise of the 80/20 Principle: if we take note of what it
tells us, we can work less, earn more, enjoy more and achieve more.
To do this, we must start with a rounded view of everything we want.
That is what this chapter deals with. Chapters 12, 13 and 14 then deal in
more detail with some of the components—with relationships, careers and
money respectively—before we revert in Chapter 15 to the ultimate goal:
happiness.
Start with lifestyle
Do you enjoy your life? Not part of it, but most of it: at least 80 per cent of
it? And whether you do or not, is there a lifestyle that could suit you better?
Ask yourself.
! Am I living with the right person or people?
! Am I living in the right place?
! Am I working the right hours and do they match my ideal work/play
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
181
rhythm, and suit my family and social needs?
! Do I feel in control?
! Can I exercise or meditate when I want?
! Am I nearly always relaxed and comfortable with my surroundings?
! Does my lifestyle make it easy for me to be creative and fulfil my
potential?
! Do I have enough money and are my affairs organized so that I don’t
have to worry about them?
! Does the lifestyle facilitate whatever contribution I want to make to
enriching the lives of people I want to help?
! Do I see my close friends enough?
! Is the extent of travel in my life just right, not too much or too little?
! Is the lifestyle right for my partner and family too?
! Do I have everything that I need right here: do I have it all?
What about work?
Work is a key part of life, one which should be neither overdone nor
underdone. Almost everyone needs to work, whether it is paid or not.
Almost no one should allow work to take over their lives, however much
they claim to enjoy it. Hours of work should not be dictated by social
convention. The 80/20 Principle can provide a good measure here and a
good way to say whether you should work more or less. It is the idea of
arbitrage: if on average you are happier outside work than at work, you
should work less and/or change your job. If you are on average happier at
work than outside work, you should work more and/or change your nonwork
life. You haven’t got it right until you are equally happy at work and
outside work; and until you are happy at least 80 per cent of the time at
work and 80 per cent of the time outside work.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
182
Career alienation
Many people don’t like their work much. They don’t feel it’s them. But they
feel that they ‘must’ do it because it provides their livelihood. You may also
know people who, while it would be wrong to say that they dislike their
jobs, still have an ambivalent view of them: sometimes, or some parts, they
enjoy; on other occasions, or other parts, they definitely do not. Many,
perhaps most, of the people you know would rather be doing something
else, if they could be paid the same for doing that as for their current job.
Career is not a separate box
The career that you and/or your partner pursue should be viewed in terms of
the total quality of the life implied by that career: where you live, the time
you spend together and with friends and the satisfaction that you get from
actually working, as well as whether your after-tax incomes can support that
lifestyle.
You probably have more choices than you think. Your present career may
be the right one and you can use it as a benchmark. But think creatively
about whether you might not prefer a different career and lifestyle.
Construct various different options for your current and future lifestyle.
Start from the premise that there does not have to be any conflict between
your work life and the things you enjoy outside work. ‘Work’ can be many
things, especially as leisure industries now comprise a large slice of the
economy. You may be able to work in an area that is your hobby or even
turn your hobby into a business. Remember that enthusiasm can lead to
success. It is often easier to make an enthusiasm into a career than to
become enthusiastic about a career dictated by others.
Whatever you do, be clear about the optimum point you are trying to
reach and view it within your life’s total context. This is easier said than
done: old habits die hard and the importance of lifestyle is easily relegated
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
183
to the demands of conventional career thinking.
For instance, when two colleagues and I set up our own management
consulting business in 1983, we were aware of the negative effects on our
lives of the long hours and extensive travelling previously required by our
bosses. So we decided that we would institute a ‘total lifestyle approach’ in
our new business and stress the quality of life as much as the earnings. But
when work started flooding in, we ended up working the usual 80 hour
week and, what was worse, we required our professional staff to do the
same (I couldn’t understand, at first, what he meant when an anguished
‘consultant accused me and my partners of ‘ruining people’s lives’). In the
pursuit of money, the total lifestyle approach had quickly gone out of the
window.
Which type of career will make you happiest?
Am I advocating here that you ‘drop out’ of the rat race? Not necessarily. It
may be that you will be happiest in the rat race; perhaps, like me, you are
basically a rat.
You should certainly be clear about what you enjoy doing, and try to
include this in your career. But ‘what’ you do is only one element in the
equation. You also need to consider the work context within which you
should operate and the importance to you of professional achievement.
These may be at least as important in determining your professional
happiness.
You should be clear where you stand on two dimensions:
! Do you have a high drive for achievement and career success?
! Would you be happiest working for an organization, as a self-employed
and self-contained individual (a ‘sole trader’) or employing other people?
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
184
Figure 40 shows this choice. Which box describes you best?
Figure 40. Desired career and lifestyle
Box 1 people are highly ambitious but prefer to work in a context
organized and provided by others. The archetypal ‘organization man’ (and
woman) of the twentieth century falls in this box. The number of these roles
is falling, as large organizations employ fewer people and also as large
organizations lose market share to smaller ones (the former trend will
continue, the latter may not). But if the supply of these posts is falling, so
too is the demand for them. If you want this type of role, you should
recognize the fact and pursue your ambition, however unfashionable it may
become. Large organizations still provide structure and status even if they
can no longer provide security.
Box 2 people are typically professionals who have a drive for recognition
by their peers or who want to be the best in their field. They want to be
independent and do not fit well into organizations, unless the latter (like
most universities) are extremely permissive. These people should ensure
that they become selfemployed as quickly as possible. Once they are, they
should resist the temptation to employ other people, even if this offers high
financial rewards. Box 2 people are sole traders, who want to
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
185
avoid professional dependence on others as far as possible.
Box 3 people have high drive and ambition, hate being employed but do
not want the lonely life of the sole trader. They may be unconventional, but
they are builders: they want to build a web or a structure around themselves.
They are tomorrow’s entrepreneurs.
Bill Gates, one of the two richest men in America, was a college dropout
who was obsessed with personal computer software. But Bill Gates is not a
sole trader. He needs to have other people, large numbers of them, working
for him. Many people are like this. The ideology of empowerment has
obscured this need and made the desire to build businesses slightly
unfashionable. If you want to work with other people, but not for them, you
are a Box 3 person. You had better recognize this fact and do something
about it. Many frustrated professionals are Box 3 people who like what they
do but are operating in Box 1 or 2. They do not recognize that the source of
their frustration is not professional but organizational.
Box 4 people do not have a high drive for career achievement but do
enjoy working with others. They should ensure that they spend many hours
a week doing so, either in a conventional job or in a voluntary role.
Box 5 people are not ambitious but do have a strong desire for autonomy
in their work. Rather than set up their own firm, the best role for Box 5
people is as freelances, working on particular projects for other firms to suit
their own convenience.
Box 6 people are individuals whose need for career achievement is low
but who enjoy the process of organizing and developing others. Many
teachers, social workers and charity workers are Box 6 people and are well
suited to their roles. For Box 6 people the journey is everything; there is no
need to arrive.
Many people gravitate towards their ‘right’ box, but where alienation at
work exists it is often because the person is in the wrong box.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
186
What about money?
What indeed! Most people have got peculiar views about money. They
think it’s more important than it is. But they also think it’s more difficult to
get than it is. Since most people want to have more money than they
currently have, let’s deal with the second point first.
My view is that money is not difficult to obtain and, once you have even
a little of it to spare, it is not difficult to multiply.
How do you obtain money in the first place? The best answer, one that
works surprisingly often, is to do something that you enjoy.
The logic runs as follows. If you enjoy something, you are likely to be
good at it. You are likely to be better at that than at things you don’t enjoy
(this is not always true, but the exceptions are rare). If you are good at
something, you can create something that will satisfy others. If you satisfy
others, they will generally pay you well for it. And since most people do not
do things they enjoy, and will not be as productive as you are, you will be
able to earn above the going rate in your vocation.
But the logic is not foolproof There are some professions, such as acting,
where supply vastly exceeds demand. What do you do in these
circumstances?
What you shouldn’t do is to give up. Instead, find a profession where
supply and demand are more equally matched, but which is close in its
requirements to your preferred vocation. Such adjacent professions usually
exist, although they may not be immediately apparent. Think creatively. For
example, the requirements of politicians are very close to those of actors.
The most effective politicians, like Ronald Reagan, John F Kennedy,
Winston Churchill, Harold Macmillan or Margaret Thatcher, either were or
could have been successful actors. Charlie Chaplin was a dead ringer for
Adolf Hitler and this was not accidental; sadly, Hitler was one of the
century’s best and most charismatic actors. This may all seem pretty
obvious. But few would-be actors seriously contemplate a career in politics,
despite the weaker competition and superior rewards.
What if what you enjoy most has a poor employment market and you
can’t find an adjacent profession that has good prospects? Then go to your
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
187
next most preferred vocation and repeat the process until you find one that
you like and that pays well.
Once in your profession, if making money is really important to you and
if you are any good at what you do, you should aim to become selfemployed
as soon as possible and, after that, to start to employ others.
I arrive at this conclusion from the 80/20 Principle’s argument about
arbitrage. 80 per cent of the value in any organization or profession comes
from 20 per cent of the professionals. The workers who are above average
will tend to be paid more than those who are below average, but nowhere
near enough to reflect the differential in performance. It follows that the
best people are always underpaid and the worst people always overpaid. As
an above-average employee, you cannot escape from this trap. Your boss
may think you are good, but will never credit your true value relative to
others. The only way out is to set up in business yourself and, if you are so
inclined, to employ other above-average workers. Don’t take either of these
steps, however, if you aren’t comfortable with being self-employed or a
boss (see Figure 40).
Money is easy to multiply
The other thing to remember is that once you have a little spare cash, it can
easily be multiplied. Save and invest. This is what capitalism is all about.
To multiply money, you don’t need to be in business. You can simply invest
in the stock market, using the 80/20 Principle as your guide. Chapter 14 will
elaborate.
Money is overrated
I would Eke you to have a lot more money, but don’t go overboard on this.
Money can help you gain the lifestyle you want, but beware: all those nasty
fables about Midas and the like are rooted in truth. Money can buy you
happiness, but only to the extent that you use money to do what is
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
188
really right for you in the first place. Also, money can bite back.
Remember that the more money you have, the less value an extra dollop
of wealth creates. In economist speak, the marginal utility of money
declines sharply. Once you have adjusted to a higher standard of living, it
may give you little or no extra happiness. It can even turn negative, if the
extra cost of maintaining the new lifestyle causes anxiety or piles on extra
pressure to earn money in non-satisfying ways.
More wealth also requires more management. Looking after my money
irritates me. (Don’t offer to relieve me of it; it irritates me less than giving it
away would!)
The tax authorities also make money inefficient. Earn more, pay
disproportionately more tax. Earn more, work more. Work more and you
have to spend more: on living close to work in an expensive metropolitan
area or alternatively on commuting; on labour-saving devices; on
contracting out housework; and on ever-more expensive leisure
compensations. Spend more and you have to work more. You can end up
with an expensive lifestyle that controls you rather than vice versa. You
might get much better value and happiness out of a simpler and cheaper
lifestyle.
What about achievement?
There are people who want to achieve—and then there are sane people. All
motivational writers fall into the trap of telling you that you need direction
and purpose in life. Then they tell you that you don’t have it. Then they put
you through the agony of deciding what it should be. Finally, they tell you
what they think you ought to do.
So if you don’t want to achieve anything specific and are happy enough
going through life having it all (minus achievement), count yourself lucky
(and skip to the end of this chapter).
But if, like me, you feel guilty and insecure without achievement and
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
189
want to increase it, the 80/20 Principle can help with your affliction.
Achievement should be easy. It shouldn’t be ‘99 per cent perspiration and
1 per cent inspiration’. Instead, see if it’s true that 80 per cent of your
achievement to date—measured by what you yourself value—has come
from 20 per cent of your inputs. If true or nearly true, then think carefully
about this top 20 per cent. Could you simply repeat the achievements?
Upgrade them? Reproduce similar ones on a grander scale? Combine two
previous achievements to compound the satisfaction?
! Think about your past achievements that have had the most positive 4
market’ response from others, those that have led to the greatest critical
acclaim: the 20 per cent of your work and play that has led to 80 per cent of
the praise others have given you. How much real satisfaction did this give
you?
! What methods worked best for you in the past? Which collaborators?
Which audiences? Again, think 80/20. Anything that just yielded an average
degree of satisfaction for the time or effort should be discarded. Think of
the exceptional highs achieved exceptionally easily. Do not constrain
yourself to your work history. Think of your time as a student, a tourist or
with friends.
! Looking forward, what could you achieve that would make you proud,
that no one else could do with the same ease? If there were 100 people
around you trying to do something, what could you do in 20 per cent of the
time that it would take 80 of them to finish? ) Where would you be in the
top 20? Even more stringently, what could you do better than 80 per cent
but in only 20 per cent of the time? These questions may initially seem like
riddles but, believe me, there are answers! People’s abilities in different
spheres are incredibly diverse.
! If you could measure the enjoyment derived from anything, what would
you enjoy more than 95 per cent of your peers? What would you do better
than 95 out of 100? Which achievements would fulfil both conditions?
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
190
It is important to focus on what you find easy. This is where most
motivational writers go wrong. They assume you should try things that are
difficult for you; on the same grounds, one suspects, that grandparents used
to urge the consumption of cod liver oil before capsules were invented. The
inspirationalists quote such worthies as T J Watson, who said that ‘success
lies on the far side of failure’. My view is that normally failure lies on the
far side of failure. Also, success lies on the near side of failure. You are
already very successful at some things and it matters not a whit if those
things are very few in number.
The 80/20 Principle is clear. Pursue those few things where you are
amazingly better than others and that you enjoy most.
What else do you need to have it all?
We’ve dealt with work, with lifestyle, with money and with achievement.
To have it all, you also need a few satisfying relationships. This requires a
separate chapter.
With a Little
Help From
Our Friends
Relationships help us to define who we are and what we canbecome. Most
of us can trace our successes to pivotal relationships.
Donald O Clifton and Paula Nelson1
Without relationships we are either dead to the world—or dead. Although
banal, this is true: our friendships are at the heart of our lives. It is also true
that our professional relationships are at the heart of our success. This is a
chapter about both personal and professional relationships. We start with
personal relationships, with friends, lovers and loved ones. Then we
consider professional relationships in their own right.
What on earth has this got to do with the 80/20 Principle? The answer is
quite a lot. There is a trade-off between quality and quantity and we
consistently undercultivate what is most important.
12
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
192
The 80/20 Principle provides three provocative hypotheses:
! 80 per cent of the value of our relationships comes from 20 per cent of
the relationships.
! 80 per cent of the value of our relationships comes from the 20 per cent
of close relationships that we form first in our lives.
! We devote much less than 80 per cent of our attention to the 20 per cent
of relationships that create 80 per cent of the value.
Compile your Top 20 personal
relationships chart
At this stage, write down the names of your Top 20 friends and loved ones,
those with whom you have the most important relationships, ranked from
most important to least important to you. ‘Important’ means the depth and
closeness of the personal relationship, the extent to which the relationship
helps you in life and the extent to which the relationship enhances your
sense of who you are and what you can become. Do this now, before
reading on.
As a matter of interest, where did your lover/partner come on the list?
Above or below your parents or children? Be honest (but you should
probably destroy the list when you are through with this chapter!).
Next, allocate a total of 100 points between the relationships in terms of
their importance to you. For example, if the first person on the list is exactly
as important as the next 19 down the list combined, allocate 50 points to
him or her. You may need to have more than one run at the numbers to
make them add up to 100 by the time you’re finished.
I don’t know what your list looks like, but a typical pattern in line
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
193
with the 80/20 Principle would have two characteristics: the top four
relationships (20 per cent of the total) would score most of the points
(maybe 80 per cent); and there would tend to be a constant relationship
between each number and the next one down. For example, number two
may be two-thirds or half as important as number one; number three may
similarly be two-thirds or half as important as number two; and so on. It is
interesting to note that if the number one relationship is twice as important
as number two and so on, relationship number six is only about 3 per cent
as important as number one!
Complete this exercise by noting against each name the proportion of
time that you actively spend with the person, talking or doing something
together (exclude time spent with someone where they are not the main
focus of attention, for example when watching television or a movie). Take
the total amount of time spent with the 20 people as 100 units and then
allocate these. Typically, you will find that you spend much less than 80 per
cent of the time with the few people who comprise 80 per cent of
‘relationship value’ to you.
The action implications should be plain. Go for quality rather than
quantity. Spend your time and emotional energy reinforcing and deepening
the relationships that are most important.
But there is another wrinkle, to do with the chronology of the
relationships in our life. It turns out that our capacity for close relationships
is far from infinite. There is another trade-off between quality and quantity
of which we should be aware.
The village theory
Anthropologists stress that the number of exhilarating and important
personal relationships that people can establish is limited.2 Apparently, the
common pattern of people in any society is to have two important childhood
friends, two significant adult friends and two doctors. Typically,
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
194
there are two powerful sexual partners who eclipse the others. Most
commonly, you fall in love only once and there is one member of your
family whom you love above all others. The number of significant personal
relationships is remarkably similar for everyone, regardless of their
location, sophistication or culture.
This has led to the anthropologists’ ‘village theory’. In an African village,
all these relationships happen within a few hundred metres and are often
formed within a short period of time. For us, these relationships may be
spread all over the planet and over a whole lifetime. They nonetheless,
constitute a village which we each have in our heads. And once these slots
are filled, they’re filled for ever.
The anthropologists say that if you have too much experience, too early,
you exhaust your capacity for further deep relationships. This may explain
the superficiality often observed in those whose profession or circumstances
force them to have a great number of relationships, such as salespeople,
prostitutes or those who move house very frequently.
J G Ballard quotes a case example of a rehabilitation project in California
for young women who mixed with criminals. The women were young, 20
or 21, and the programme aimed to introduce them to new social
backgrounds, basically to middle-class volunteers, who befriended them
and invited them to their homes.
Many of these girls had been married at an incredibly early age. Many
had had their first children at 13 or 14. Some had been married three times
by the time they were 20. They had often had hundreds of lovers and
sometimes had close relationships or children by men who were then shot
or jailed. They’d been through everything—relationships, motherhood,
break-ups, bereavements—and experienced the whole gamut of human
experience while still in their teens.
The project was a total failure. The explanation was that the women were
incapable of forming any deep new relationships. They were all used up.
Their relationship slots had been filled, for ever.
This sad story is salutory. It also fits in with the 80/20 Principle: a small
number of relationships will account for a large proportion of emotional
value. Fill your relationship slots with extreme care and not too early!
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
195
Professional relationships and alliances
We now turn to your relationships and alliances related to your work. Here
the importance of a few close allies can hardly be overstated.
Individuals may appear to do amazing things—and they do. But
exceptional individual performance requires allies.
You alone cannot make yourself successful. Only others can do that for
you. What you can do is to select the best relationships and alliances for
your purposes.
You badly need allies. You must treat them well, as an extension of
yourself, as you treat yourself (or should). Do not assume your friends and
allies are all of roughly equal importance. Focus your attention on nurturing
the key alliances of your life. If this seems obvious or banal, ask yourself
how many of your friends follow these lines. Then ask yourself whether you
do.
All spiritual leaders had many allies. If they needed them, so do you. To
take one example: Jesus Christ depended on John the Baptist to draw him to
public attention; then on the 12 disciples; then on other apostles, notably St
Paul, arguably the greatest marketing genius in history.3
Nothing is more important than your choice of alliances and how you
build them. Without them you are nothing. With them, you can transform
your life, often the lives of those around you and occasionally, in small or
large ways, the course of history.
We can best appreciate the importance of alliances by a brief historical
excursion.
History is driven by individuals who form effective
alliances
Vilfredo Pareto, the ‘bourgeois Karl Marx’, claimed that history was
essentially a history of the succession of élites.4 The objective of energetic
individuals or families was therefore devoted to rise into the élites or to be
part of one élites that displaced another (or, if already in the élites, to
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
196
stay there and keep the élite in place).
If you turn a Paretian or Marxian, class-based view of history on its head,
you can conclude that alliances within élites or would-be élites are the
driving forces of progress. The individual is nothing except as part of a
class, certainly; but equally, the individual allied with other individuals of
the same class (or possibly, with individuals from another class) is
everything.
The importance of individuals, allied to others, is apparent from some of
history’s turning points. Would there have been a Russian Revolution in
1917 without the pivotal role of Lenin? Probably not at all; and certainly not
one that diverted the course of world history for the next 72 years. Would
the Russian Revolution of 1989 that reversed the one of 1917 have
succeeded and been maintained without the presence of mind and bravery
of Boris Yeltsin? If he had not climbed on a tank outside the Russian White
House, the Communist gerontocrats would probably have cemented their
shaky coup.
We can play the game of historical what-ifs repeatedly to demonstrate the
importance of individuals. There would have been no Holocaust and no
Second World War without Hitler. Without Roosevelt and Churchill, Hitler
would probably have united Europe rather earlier and more thoroughly and
in a considerably more vexatious way than his successors have done. And
so on. But the key point often overlooked is that none of these individuals
could have turned the course of history without relationships and alliances.
In almost any sphere of achievement,5 you can identify a small number of
key collaborators, without whom individuals could not have succeeded but
with whom individuals have had massive impact. In government, in mass
ideological movements, in business, in medicine, in the sciences, in
philanthropy or in sport, the pattern is the same. History is not composed of
blind, non-human forces. History is not run by classes or élites operating
according to some preprogrammed economic or sociological formula.
History is determined and changed by dedicated individuals who form
effective alliances with a small number of close collaborators.
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
197
You need a few key allies
If you have had any success in life, you will (unless you are a blind egotist
headed for a fall) recognize the crucial important of allies in your
achievements. But you will also detect the hand of the 80/20 Principle here.
The key allies are few in number.
It is generally a safe assertion that at least 80 per cent of the value of your
allies comes from fewer than 20 per cent of their number. For anyone who
has done anything, the list of allies, when you come to think of it, is
incredibly long. But of the hundreds or more involved, the value is highly
skewed. Usually half a dozen key allies are far more important than all the
rest.
You don’t need many allies but you need the right ones, with the right
relationships between you and each of them and between themselves. You
need them at the right time, in the right place and with a common interest in
advancing your interests. Above all, the allies must trust you and you must
be able to trust them.
Make a list of your Top 20 business relationships, of people that you
consider to be important allies, and compare it with an estimation of the
total number of contacts with whom you would be on first-name terms—if
you have a Rolodex, a Filofax or a telephone list, this is the total number of
active contacts on that list. 80 per cent of the value to you of alliances is
likely to be comprised in 20 per cent of the relationships. If this is not the
case, the alliances (or some of them) are likely to be of poor quality.
Achievement alliances
If you are well into your career, make a list of the people who have helped
you the most to date. Rank them from top to bottom and then assign 100
points between the top 10.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
198
In general, the people who have helped you the most in the past will also
be the people who can do so in the future. Sometimes, however, a good
friend who is some way down the list becomes a much more important
potential ally: perhaps because he or she has gained a new and highly
influential post, has made a killing through an investment or secured
valuable recognition. Go through the exercise again, ranking your allies
from one to ten and allocating another 100 points to them, this time on the
basis of their future ability to help you.
People help you because there is a strong relationship between you. The
best relationships are built on five attributes: mutual enjoyment of each
other’s company, respect, shared experience, reciprocity and trust. In
successful business relationships these attributes become entwined and are
impossible to untangle, but we can think of them separately.
Mutual enjoyment
The first of our five attributes is the most obvious. If you do not enjoy
talking to someone, in their office, a restaurant, at a social occasion or on
the phone, you will not build a strong relationship. They have to enjoy your
company too.
If this seems terribly obvious, reflect for a moment on the people with
whom you will socially, but basically for professional purposes. How many
of them do you really like? A surprising number of people spend a lot of
time with people they don’t like. This is a complete and utter waste of time.
It’s not enjoyable, it’s tiring, it’s often expensive, it prevents you doing
better things and it will get you absolutely nowhere. Stop doing it! Spend
more time with the contacts you enjoy, particularly if they can also be
useful to you.
Respect
There are people whose company I enjoy immensely, but whom I do not
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
199
greatly respect professionally; and vice versa. I would never advance
someone’s career if I didn’t respect their professional abilities.
If someone is to help you professionally, they must be impressed by you!
Yet very often we hide our light under a bushel. A good friend, Paul, who
was in a position to advance my career considerably, once remarked in a
board meeting where we were both outside directors that he was prepared to
believe that I was competent professionally, although he had never seen the
slightest evidence of it! I resolved to find a context where I could show
some evidence. I did—and Paul moved sharply up my list of business allies.
Shared experience
Just as in the primitive village, we have a limited number of slots for
important professional experiences. Shared experience, especially if it
involves struggle or suffering, is very bonding. One of my greatest
relationships, both as business ally and friend, came from being a new
recruit in my first job alongside another recruit in the same situation. I am
sure we would not have developed such rapport if we had not both hated
our jobs in the oil refinery so much.
The implication is that if you are in a difficult job, develop one ally whom
you like and respect. Make it a deep and fruitful alliance. If you don’t, you
are missing a big opportunity!
Even if you are not suffering, find one person who has a great deal of
shared experience and make him or her a key ally.
Reciprocity
For alliances to work, each ally must do a great deal for the other party
repeatedly, consistently, over a long period of time.
Reciprocity requires that the relationship is not one sided. Equally,
reciprocity should come naturally and not be too finely calculated. The
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
200
important thing is that you do whatever you possibly can, consistent with
high ethical standards, to help the other person. This requires time and
thought! You should not wait until they ask a favour.
What surprises me in reviewing business relationships is how
infrequently true reciprocity is built up. Even if all the other ingredients—
friendship, respect, shared experience and trust—are present, people very
often neglect to be proactive in helping their allies. This, again, is a massive
wasted opportunity to deepen the relationship and store up future help.
The Beatles told us that ‘in the end, the love you take is equal to the love
you make’. Similarly, in the end, the professional help you receive is equal
to that you provide.
Trust
Trust cements relationships. Lack of trust can unwind them very quickly.
Trust requires total honesty at all times. If there is even a suspicion that you
are not saying what you think, even for the most high-minded reasons or to
remain diplomatic, trust can be undermined.
If you do not trust someone totally, don’t try to build up an alliance. It
shouldn’t work and it won’t.
But if you do have total trust, it makes business relationships so much
faster and more efficient. A lot of time and cost can be eliminated. Never
forfeit trust by being capricious, cowardly or cunning.
If you are in the early stages of your career,
fill your ally slots carefully
A good rule of thumb is that you should develop up to six or seven
absolutely gilt-edged business alliances, composed as follows:
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
201
! one or two relationships with mentors, people more senior than you
! two or three relationships with peers
! one or two relationships where you are the mentor.
Relationships with mentors
Choose your one or two mentors carefully. Do not let them choose you:
they might deprive a much better mentor of the slot. The mentors you
choose should have the following two characteristics:
! You must be able to build up the ‘five ingredient’ relationship
comprising mutual enjoyment, respect, shared experience, reciprocity and
trust.
! The mentor should be as senior as possible or, even better, relatively
junior but clearly destined for the top. The best mentors are extremely able
and ambitious.
It may seem strange to say that relationships with mentors should be
reciprocal, since inevitably the mentor will have more to offer than the
mentee. But mentors must be rewarded or else they will lose interest. The
mentee must provide fresh ideas, mental stimulation, enthusiasm, hard
work, knowledge of new technologies or some other attribute of value to the
mentor. Wise mentors very often use younger allies to keep them up to date
with emerging trends and potential opportunities or threats that may not be
apparent from the top.
Relationships with peers
With peers, you are very often spoilt for choice. There are many potential
allies. But remember that you have only two or three slots to fill. Be
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
202
very selective. Make a list of all potential allies who have the ‘five
ingredients’ or potential for them. Pick the two or three from the list who
you believe will be the most successful. Then work hard at making them
allies.
Relationships where you are the mentor
Do not neglect these. You are likely to get the most out of your one or two
mentees if they work for you, preferably for quite a long period of time.
Multiple alliances
Alliances very often build up into webs or networks, where many of the
same people have relationships with each other. These networks can
become very powerful, or at least seem so from the outside. They are often
great fun.
But do not get carried away, smug in the knowledge that you are ‘in with
the in crowd’. You may just be a fringe player. Don’t forget that all true and
valuable relationships are bilateral. If you have a strong alliance with both
X and Y and they have one between each other, that is excellent. Lenin said
that a chain is as strong as its weakest link. However strong the
relationships between X and Y, the ones that really matter for you are yours
with X and yours with Y.
WITH A LITTLE HELP FROM OUR FRIENDS
203
Conclusion
For both personal and professional relationships, fewer and deeper is better
than more and less deep. One relationship is not as good as another.
Seriously flawed relationships, when you spend a lot of time together but
the result is unsatisfying, should be terminated as soon as possible. Bad
relationships drive out good. There is a limited number of slots for
relationships; don’t use up the slots too early or on low-quality
relationships. Choose with care. Then build with commitment.
A fork in the book
We have now reached an optional fork in this book’s progress. The next
two chapters (13 and 14) are, respectively, for those who want to know how
to advance their careers or multiply their money. Readers for whom these
are not important concerns should advance to Chapter 15, where the seven
habits of happiness await.
Intelligent
and Lazy
There are only four types of officer First, there are the lazy, stupid ones.
Leave them alone, they do no harm. . . Second, there are the hard-working
intelligent ones. They make excellent staff officers, ensuring that every
detail is properly considered. Third, there are the hard-working, stupid
ones. These people are a menace and must be fired at once. They create
irrelevant work for everybody. Finally, there are the intelligent lazy ones.
They are suited for the highest office.
General Von Manstein on the German Officer Corps
This is a chapter for the truly ambitious. If you do not suffer from the
insecurity that fuels the desire to be rich or famous, move on to Chapter 15.
But if you want to win the rat race, here is some advice that may surprise
you.
General Von Manstein captures the essence of this chapter, which is the
80/20 Principle’s guidance on how to have a successful career. If the
general had been a management consultant, he would have made a fortune
out of the matrix shown in Figure 41.
13
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
205
Figure 41. The Von Manstein matrix
This advice is what to do about other people. But what about yourself? It
might be thought that intelligence and propensity to work are fixed
properties, in which case the Von Manstein matrix, although interesting, is
useless. But the position advanced in this chapter is slightly different. Even
if you are hard working, you can learn to become lazy. And even if you or
other people think you are stupid, you are intelligent at something. The key
to becoming a star is to simulate, manufacture and deploy lazy intelligence.
As we will see, lazy intelligence can be worked at. The key to earning more
and working less is to pick the right thing to do and to do only those things
that add the highest value.
First, however, it is instructive to see how the 80/20 Principle distributes
rewards to those who work. Rewards are both unbalanced and unfair. We
can either complain about this or align ourselves to take advantage of the
Von Manstein matrix.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
206
Imbalance is rampant in professional
success and returns
The 80/20 Principle is nowhere more evident today than in the very high
and increasing returns enjoyed by very small numbers of élite professionals.
We live in a world where the returns for top talent, in all spheres of life,
have never been higher. A small percentage of professionals obtain a
disproportionate amount of recognition and fame and usually also a high
percentage of the spoils available.
Take any sphere of contemporary human endeavour, in any country or
globally. Whether the sphere be athletics, baseball, basketball, football,
golf, rugby, tennis or any other popular sport; or architecture, sculpture,
painting or any other visual art; or music of any category; the movies or the
theatre; novels, cookery books or autobiography; or even hosting TV chat
shows, reading the news, politics or any other well-defined area, there will
be a small number of pre-eminent professionals whose names spring to
mind.
Considering how many people there are in each country, it is a
remarkably small number of names, and usually a small percentage—
typically well under 5 per cent—of the professionals active in the relevant
sphere. The fraction of any profession who are recognized ‘names’ is very
small, but they hog the limelight. They are always in demand and always in
the news. They are the human equivalent of consumer goods brands,
obtaining instant recognition as known quantities.
The same concentration operates with regard to popularity and financial
rewards. More than 80 per cent of novels sold are from fewer than 20 per
cent of novel titles in print. The same is true of any other category of
publishing: of pop CDs and concerts, of movies, even of books about
business. The same applies to actors, TV celebrities or any branch of sports.
80 per cent of prize money in golf goes to fewer than 20 per cent of
professional golfers; the equivalent is true in tennis; and in horseracing,
more than 80 per cent of winnings go to fewer than 20 per cent of owners,
jockeys and trainers.
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
207
Name
Profession
Earnings
$m, 1994
Steven Spielberg Film director 165
Joseph Jamail Trial lawyer 90
Oprah Winfrey Television presenter 72
Michael Jordan Baseball/basketball 30
David Copperfield Magician 29
Sylvester Stallone Film actor/director 24
Andrew Lloyd Webber Composer 24
Michael Jackson Singer 22
Stephen King Writer 21
Shaquille O’Neal Basketball player 17
Jack Nicklaus Golfer 15
Gerhard Berger Racing driver 14
Andre Agassi Tennis player 22
Roberto Baggio Soccer player 5
Alien Grubman Corporate lawyer 5
Source: Forbes
Figure 42. Superstar earnings for top professionals
There is a big gap between the top and the rest
We live in an increasingly marketized world. The top names can command
enormous fees—but those who are not quite as good or well known make
relatively little.
As an illustration, Lady Thatcher’s memoirs have to date sold over 2
million copies and a huge number of cassettes and videos: she personally
received $5.4 million. A typical memoir from one of the most interesting of
her senior ministers, Nicholas Ridley, has sold some 5000 copies, a quarter
of 1 per cent of Lady Thatcher’s total. Many other Thatcher Cabinet
members have written their memoirs and some have attained minor success,
but the best estimate is that, although Lady Thatcher comprised less than 2
per cent of the people serving in her Cabinets and only
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
208
5 per cent of those who have published memoirs, her sales account for more
than 95 per cent of the total.
There is a big difference between being at the top, and well known to all;
and being almost at the top, and well known only to a few enthusiasts. The
bestknown baseball, basketball or football stars can make millions; those
just below the top rank, only a comfortable living.
Why do the winners take all?
The distribution of incomes for superstars is even more unbalanced than for
the population as a whole and provides excellent illustrations of the 80/20
Principle (or in most cases, 90/10 or 95/5).Various writers1 have sought
economic or sociological explanations of the superreturns to superstars.
The most persuasive explanation is that two conditions facilitate superstar
returns. One is that it is possible for the superstar to be accessible to many
people at once. Modern communications enable this to happen. The
incremental cost of ‘distributing’ Michael Jackson, Steven Spielberg,
Stephen King, Luciano Pavarotti or Andre Agassi to additional consumers
can be almost nothing, since the additional cost of broadcasting, making a
CD or printing a book is a very small part of the total cost structure.
The additional cost of making these superstars available is certainly no
more than for a second-rate substitute, except in so far as the superstars
themselves take a higher fee. Although the fee may be many millions or
tens of millions, the incremental cost per consumer is very low indeed,
often a matter of cents or fractions of a cent.
The second condition for superstar returns is that mediocrity must not be
a substitute for talent. It must be important to obtain the best. If one house
cleaner is half as quick as another, the market will clear by paying her half
as much. But who wants someone who is half as good as Michael Jackson
or Pavarotti? In this case, the non-superstar, even working for nothing,
would have vastly inferior economics to the superstar.
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
209
The non-superstar would attract a smaller audience and, for a tiny decrease
in the total cost, bring in very much lower revenues.
Winner takes all is a modern phenomenon
What is intriguing is that this disparity between top returns and the rest has
not always existed. The best basketball or football champions of the 1940s
and 1950s, for example, did not make much money. It used to be possible to
find a prominent politician who died fairly poor. And the further back we
go, the less true it was that the winner took all.
For instance, William Shakespeare was absolutely pre-eminent in terms
of talent among his contemporaries. So was Leonardo da Vinci. By rights
or, rather, by today’s standards, they should have been able to exploit their
brilliance, creativity and fame to become the richest men of their times.
Instead, they made do with the sort of income that is enjoyed today by
millions of moderately talented professionals.
The imbalance of financial rewards for talent is becoming more and more
pronounced over time. Today, income is more closely linked to merit and
marketability, so that the 80/20 connection, because it can be clearly
demonstrated in money terms, becomes easily apparent. Our society is
clearly more meritocratic than that of a century, or even a generation, ago.
This is particularly so in Europe generally and the UK in particular.
If top footballers like Bobby Moore had made fortunes in the 1940s or
1950s, it would have provoked fury among the British Establishment; it
would have been unseemly. When the leader writers of the 1960s
discovered that the Beatles were millionaires, it caused astonishment. Today
the fact that George Michael or Michael Jackson are among the world’s
richest people causes no surprise. Nowadays we have less respect for rank
and more for markets.
The other new element is, as mentioned above, the technological
revolution in broadcasting, telecommunications and consumer products like
the CD and CD-Rom. The key consideration now is to maximize
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
210
revenue, which superstars can do. The extra cost of hiring them may be a
huge amount of money for an individual, but the cost per consumer is
trivial.
Achievement has always obeyed the
80/20 Principle
Yet if we set money aside and deal in the more enduring and important
matters (at least for everyone except the superstars themselves), we can see
that the concentration of achievement and fame in very few people,
whatever the profession, has always been true. Constraints that seem odd to
our eyes—such as class or the absence of telecommunications—stopped
Shakespeare and Leonardo da Vinci becoming millionaires. But lack of
wealth did not diminish their achievements or the fact that a huge
proportion of impact came from a tiny proportion of creators.
80/20 returns also apply to non-media
professionals
Although it is most noticeable and exaggerated with respect to media
superstars, it is significant that 80/20 returns are not confined to the world
of entertainment. Increasingly, the top professionals in any recognized
profession take the lion’s share of the loot. Note that in Figure 42 the
second highest-paid professional listed is Joseph Jamail, hardly a household
name to rank alongside Andre Agassi. Jamail is a trial lawyer and, as yet,
does not feature on TV talk shows or make blockbuster movies. Yet he
made $90 million in 1994, over four times what Agassi earned.
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
211
Further down the table of top earners come corporate lawyers, top
surgeons, sought-after corporate executives, investment bankers, tax experts
and a host of other professionals. Increasingly, in each of these fields, the
winner-takes-all philosophy is spreading. The top individuals, and the top
specialist firms, in each of these areas can command fees that are many
times that of slightly less eminent practitioners. If there is a corporate
takeover fight, for example, two or more protagonists may compete for the
services of the top one or two firms or individuals, bidding a price far above
the normal rate. Wherever large amounts of money are at stake and top
individuals can influence the odds, or are perceived to, the returns to
individual professionals can reach astronomic levels.
Talent has probably always followed an 80/20 pattern. The effect of
technology may be, roughly, to move talent to a curve approximating 90/10
or 95/5. Rewards used to follow, perhaps, a 70/30 curve, but for the most
famous they must surely now be close to 95/5 or an even more unbalanced
curve.
What does all this mean for the ambitious?
What are the rules for success in this 80/20 world? You may want to give
up and refuse to compete in a world where the odds against megasuccess
are so long. But I believe this is the wrong conclusion. Even if you do not
aim to become a world-beating millionaire (but especially if you do), there
are 10 golden rules for successful careers in an increasingly 80/20 world
(see Figure 43).
Although these principles are more valuable the more ambitious you are,
they apply to any level of career and ambition. As we elaborate, put on your
80/20 thinker cap to editionize the text to your own career. Recall the Von
Manstein matrix: find the place where your name is already inscribed,
where you can be intelligent, lazy and highly rewarded.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
212
1 Specialize in a very small niche; develop a
core skill
2 Choose a niche that you enjoy, where you can
excel and stand a chance of becoming an
acknowledged leader
3 Realize that knowledge is power
4 Identify your market and your core customers
and serve them best
5 Identify where 20 per cent of effort gives
80 per cent of returns
6 Learn from the best
7 Become self-employed early in your career
8 Employ as many net value creators as
possible
9 Use outside contractors for everything but
your core skill
10 Exploit capital leverage
Figure 43. 10 golden rules for career success
Specialize in a very small niche
Specialization is one of the great, universal laws of life. This is how life
itself evolved, with each species seeking out new ecological niches and
developing unique characteristics. A small business that does not specialize
will die. An individual who does not specialize will be doomed to life as a
wage slave.
In the natural world the number of species is unknown, but it is almost
certainly an astonishingly large number. The number of niches in the
business world is very much larger than generally appreciated; hence many
small businesses, apparently in competition in a broad market, can actually
all be leaders in their own niches and avoid head-to-head competition.2
For the individual, too, it is better to know a few things well, or
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
213
preferably one thing exceptionally well, than it is to know many things
superficially.
Specialization is intrinsic to the 80/20 Principle. The reason that it
operates— that 20 per cent of inputs can result in 80 per cent of outputs—is
that the productive fifth is much more specialized and suited to the task at
hand than are the unproductive four-fifths.
Whenever we observe the 80/20 Principle working, this is evidence both
of a waste of resources (on the part of the unproductive four-fifths) and of
the need for further specialization. If the unproductive 80 per cent
specialized in what they are good at, they could become the productive 20
per cent in another sphere. This is turn would produce another 80/20
relationship, but at a higher level. What used to be the unproductive 80 per
cent, or some of it, will now be the productive 20 per cent in another
distribution.
This process, what the German nineteenth-century philosopher G W F
Hegel called a ‘dialectic’,3 can go on and on, constituting the engine of
progress. Indeed, there is evidence that this is precisely what has happened
over time, both in the natural world and in society. Higher living standards
have been driven by greater and greater specialization.
The computer evolved from a new specialization within electronics; the
personal computer from a further specialization; modern user-friendly
software from further specializations; the CD-Rom from yet another stage
of the same process. Biotechnology, which will revolutionize food
production, has evolved in a similar way, with each new advance requiring
and feeding on ever more progressive specialization.
Your career ought to evolve in a similar way. Knowledge is the key. One
of the most marked tendencies in the world of work over the past generation
has been the increasing power and status of technicians, formerly often
blue-collar workers but now empowered by specialist knowledge in league
with ever more specialized information technology.4 These experts are now
often more powerful and well paid than the technologically more primitive
managers who purported to add value by organizing the technicians.5
At the most basic level, specialization requires qualifications. More than
80 per cent of qualifications in most societies are held by 20 per cent
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
214
of the workforce. Increasingly, the most important class distinction in
advanced societies is not ownership of land or even of wealth, but
ownership of information. 80 per cent of information is the property of 20
per cent of people.
The American economist and statesman Robert Reich has divided the US
workforce into four groups. The top group he calls ‘symbolic analysts’,
people who deal with numbers, ideas, problems and words. They include
financial analysts, consultants, architects, lawyers, doctors and journalists,
indeed all workers whose intelligence and knowledge are the source of
power and influence. Interestingly, he calls this group the ‘fortunate fifth’—
in our terms the top 20 per cent—whom he says hold 80 per cent of
information and 80 per cent of wealth.
Anyone who has any recent experience of intellectual disciplines knows
that knowledge is undergoing a profound and progressive fragmentation. In
some ways this is worrying, since there is almost nobody in the
intelligentzia or society as a whole who can integrate different advances in
knowledge and tell us what it all means. But in other ways, the
fragmentation is further evidence of the need for and value of specialization.
And for the individual, observing the increasing trend of rewards going to
the top dogs, this is an extremely hopeful process. You may have no hope
of becoming Albert Einstein or even Bill Gates, but there are literally
hundreds of thousands, if not millions, of niches where you can choose to
specialize. You could even, like Gates, invent your own niche.
Find your niche. It may take you a long time, but it is the only way you
will gain access to exceptional returns.
Choose a niche that you enjoy and in which you can excel
Specialization requires very careful thought. The narrower an area, the more
important it is to choose it with extreme care.
Specialize in an area in which you are already interested and which you
enjoy. You will not become an acknowledged leader in anything that
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
215
cannot command your enthusiasm and passion.
This is not as demanding a requirement as you may think. Everyone is
excited by something; if not, they are dead or dying. And almost every
hobby, every enthusiasm, every vocation can these days be turned into a
business activity.
You can also look at it from the other end. Almost anyone who has made
it to the top has done so with great enthusiasm for what they are doing.
Enthusiasm drives personal achievement and also infects others with
enthusiasm, creating a multiplier effect. You cannot feign or manufacture
enthusiasm.
If you are not enthusiastic about your current career, and are ambitious,
you should stop doing it. But before you take this step, work out a better
career. Write down all the things about which you are enthusiastic. Then
work out which of these could be made into a career niche. Then choose the
one about which you are most enthusiastic.
Realize that knowledge is power
The key to making a career out of an enthusiasm is knowledge. Know more
about an area than anybody else does. Then work out a way to marketize it,
to create a market and a set of loyal customers.
It is not enough to know a lot about a little. You have to know more than
anybody else, at least about something. Do not stop improving your
expertise until you are sure you know more, and are better in your niche,
than anybody else. Then reinforce your lead by constant practice and
inveterate curiosity. Do not expect to become a leader unless you really are
more knowledgeable than anyone else.
Marketization is a creative process: you will need to work out for yourself
how to do this. Perhaps you can follow the example of others who have
marketized their knowledge in an adjacent area. But if this option is not
available, follow the guidelines below.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
216
Identify your, market and your core customers and
serve them best
Your market is those people who might pay for your knowledge. The core
customers are those who would value your services most.
The market is the arena within which you will operate. This requires you
to define how the knowledge you have can be sold. Are you going to work
for an established firm or an individual as an employee, to work for a
number of corporations or individuals as a freelance, or to set up a business
marketing services (derived from the labour of yourself and others) to
individuals or to firms?
Are you going to supply raw knowledge, to process it for specific
situations or to use the knowledge to create a product? Are you going to
invent the product, to add value to someone else’s semi-finished product or
to be a retailer of finished products?
Your core customer or customers are the specific individuals or
corporations that may place the highest value on your activity and that may
provide a stream of well-paid work.
Whether you are employed, self-employed, a small or large employer or
even the head of state, you have core customers on whom your continued
success depends. This is true whatever the level of your past achievement.
It is surprising, incidentally, how often leaders forfeit their position by
neglecting or even abusing their core customer group. Tennis star John
McEnroe forgot that his customers were the spectators and even the
professional tennis organizers. Mrs Thatcher (as she then was) forgot that
her most important customers were her own Conservative Members of
Parliament. Richard Nixon forgot that his core customer group was Middle
America, with its requirement for integrity.
Serving customers is key, but they must be the right customers for you,
those whom with relatively little effort you can make extremely happy.
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
217
Identify where 20 per cent of effort gives
80 per cent of returns
There is no fun in work unless you can achieve a lot with a little. If you
have to work 60 or 70 hours a week in order to cope, if you feel that you are
always behind, if you are struggling to keep up with work’s requirements:
then you are in the wrong job, or doing it completely the wrong way! You
are certainly not benefiting from the 80/20 Principle, or from the Von
Manstein matrix.
Keep reminding yourself of some of the golden 80/20 insights. In any
sphere of activity, 80 per cent of people are only achieving 20 per cent of
results; and 20 per cent of people are achieving 80 per cent of results. What
are the majority doing wrong and the minority doing right? Come to that,
who are the minority? Could you do what they do? Could you take what
they do and do it in an even more extreme form? Could you invent an even
more clever and efficient way to do it?
Is there a good fit between yourself and your ‘customers’? Are you in the
right corporation? The right department? The right job? Where could you
impress your ‘customers’ with relatively little effort? Do you enjoy what
you do and are you enthusiastic about it? If not, begin planning today to
switch to a job where you can be.
If you like your job and your ‘customers’ but are not coasting to glory,
you are probably spending your time in the wrong way. What is the 20 per
cent of your time when you achieve 80 per cent of your results? Do more of
it! What is the 80 per cent of your time when you achieve little? Do less of
it! The answer can be as simple as that, although implementing the change
will require you to break all your normal habits and conventions.
In every market, for every customer, in every firm, in all professions,
there is a way to things more efficiently and effectively: not just a bit better,
but a step-function better. Look beneath the surface for 80/20 truths in your
profession or industry
In my own profession, that of management consulting, the answers are
clear. Big clients, good. Big assignments, good. Large case teams with
many
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
218
cheap junior members, good. Close client relationships—between
individuals— good. Relationships with the top person, the CEO, very good.
Long client relationships, very good. Long and close client relationships
with the top people in large corporations, with large budgets and the use of
many junior consultants—laughing all the way to the bank!
What are the 80/20 truths in your line of business? Where do corporations
make supranormal, even obscene, profits? Which of your colleagues is
riding high while always seeming relaxed, with time to indulge themselves
in their favourite hobbies? What are they doing that’s so cute? Think, think,
think. The answer is there somewhere. All you have to do is find it. But
don’t ask the industry Establishment what the answer is, don’t do a survey
of your colleagues and don’t try to find the answer in print. AH you will
find is the conventional wisdom, repeated a zillion ways. The answer will
he with the industry heretics, the professional mavericks and the eccentric
individuals.
Learn from the best
The winners in any field have, almost by definition, found ways to make 20
per cent of effort yield 80 per cent of results. This does not mean that the
leaders are lazy or lacking in dedication. Leaders usually work very hard.
But their output, for no more time than is put in by the merely competent in
their field, is several times more valuable than the output of the merely
competent. The leaders produce results which, in both quality and quantity,
knock spots off the competition.
Put another way, leaders do things differently. Leaders are usually
outsiders; they think and feel differently. Those who are best in any sphere
do not think and act in similar ways to the average performers. The leaders
may not be conscious of what they do differently. Very rarely do they think
about it and articulate it. But, if leaders do not generally explain the secrets
of their success, these can often be deduced by observation.
Previous generations understood this well. The disciple sitting at the feet
of the master, the apprentice learning a trade from a craftsman, the
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
219
student learning by assisting a professor with research, the artist serving
time with an accomplished artist: all learnt by observing the best in their
field at work, by assisting and by imitating.
Be willing to pay a high price to work for the best. Find any excuse to
spend time with them. Work out what their characteristic ways of operating
are. You will find that they see things differently, spend time differently and
interact with other people differently. Unless you can do what they do, or
something even more different from the average modus vivendi in the
profession, you will never rise to the top.
Sometimes, it is not just a matter of working for the best individuals. Key
knowhow can be located within the collective culture of the best firms. The
key is in the differences. Arguably, you should work for one of the average
firms, then for one of the very best, and observe the differences. For
instance, I worked for Shell and wrote lots of memos. I then went to work
for one of the Mars companies and learnt to talk to people face to face until
I got the desired answers. The latter was a 20/80 practice: 20 per cent of
effort leading to 80 per cent of results. Leaders have many such 20/80
practices.
Observe, learn and practise.
Become self-employed early in your career
Leverage your own time so that you focus on the things where you add five
times more value than elsewhere. The second step is to ensure that you
capture as much of this value for yourself. The ideal position, one that you
should aim to reach early in your career, is to capture all of the value of
your work for yourself.
Karl Marx’s theory of surplus value states that the workers produce all
value and excess value is appropriated by the capitalists who employ the
workers. Put crudely, profits are the excess value stolen from the workers.
The theory is nonsense, but can usefully be stood on its head. The
ordinary employee who produces average results may actually be exploiting
the corporation more than he or she is exploited: corporations
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
220
typically have far too many managers and the net value added by a majority
of them is actually negative. Yet the employee who uses the 80/20 Principle
properly will probably be many times more effective than the average. The
80/20 employee is most unlikely to be paid several times what his or her
peers are. The 80/20 employee will therefore probably obtain a better deal
by becoming self-employed.
When you are self-employed, you get paid by results. For those who use
the 80/20 Principle, this is good news.
The one circumstance in which it may not be appropriate to become selfemployed
yet is when you are still in the rapid learning stage. If a
corporation or professional firm is teaching you a great deal, the value of
this learning may exceed the differential between the value you add and
what you are paid. This is typically the case during the first two or three
years of a professional career. It can also be the case when more
experienced professionals join a new firm that has higher standards than the
ones in which they have previously worked. In this case, the period of
super-learning usually lasts for a few months only, or a year at the most.
When these periods are over, become self-employed. Do not worry
overmuch about security Your professional expertise and use of 80/20
precepts constitute your security. In any case, firms can no longer deliver
security
Employ as many net value creators as possible
If the first stage of leverage is the best use of your time and the second stage
is to ensure that you capture for yourself the value you create, the third
stage is to leverage the power of other people.
There is only one you, but there are a very large number of people whom
you could potentially employ. A minority of these people—but the minority
from which the 80/20 practitioner will choose to hire—add a great deal
more value than they cost.
It follows that the greatest source of leverage is other people. To some
extent, you can and should leverage off other people whom you do not
employ: your allies. But you can obtain the most direct and complete
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
221
leverage from the people you employ.
A simple numerical illustration may help to focus the mind on the
enormous value of employment leverage. Let us assume that by using the
80/20 Principle you become five times more effective than the average
professional in your line of business. Let us also assume that you are selfemployed
and so capture all of this value. The best that you will do,
therefore, is to get results 500 per cent of the average. Your ‘surplus’ over
the average is therefore 400 units.
But let us now assume that you can identify 10 other professionals, each
of whom is, or can be trained to become, three times better than the average.
They are not as good as you are, but they still add much more value than
they cost. Let us also assume that in order to attract and retain these people,
you pay them 50 per cent more than the going rate. Each one of them will
produce 300 units of value and cost 150 units. You therefore make a
‘profit’, or capitalistic surplus, of 150 units for each employee. By hiring
the 10, you therefore have another 1500 surplus units to add to the 400 extra
units that you yourself are creating. Your total surplus is now 1900 units,
nearly five times as much as before you started hiring.
Naturally, you do not have to stop at 10 employees. The only constraints
are your ability to find employees who add surplus value and your ability
(and theirs) to find customers. The latter constraint should not normally
operate in the absence of the former, since professionals who add excess
value should normally find a ready market for their services.
Clearly, it is crucial to hire only net value creators: those whose value
comfortably exceeds their cost. But it would be wrong to say you should
only hire the best. The most excess value is created by employing as many
excess value creators as possible, even if some of them are only twice as
good as the average whereas others may be five times (or even more) as
effective. Within your own workforce, there is still likely to be an 80/20 or
70/30 distribution of effectiveness. The greatest absolute surplus value may
co-exist with a fairly skewed distribution of talent. The only requirement is
that your least supereffective employee still adds more value than he or she
costs.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
222
Use outside contractors for everything but your core skill
The 80/20 Principle is a principle of selectivity. You achieve maximum
effectiveness by concentrating on the fifth of activities at which you are the
best. This principle applies not just to individuals but to firms as well.
The most successful professional firms and corporations are those that
outsource everything but what they are best at. If their skill is marketing,
they do not manufacture. If their real advantage is in research and
development, they use third parties not just for making the goods, but for
marketing and selling them. If they are best at volume manufacture of
standardized products, they do not make ‘specials’ or up-market varieties. If
they are best at high-margin specials, they do not try their hand in the mass
market. And so on.
The fourth stage of leverage is to use outside contractors as much as
possible. Keep your own firm as simple as possible and purely focused on
those areas where it is several times better than the competition.
Exploit capital leverage
So far we have advocated labour leverage, but you can also benefit from
capital leverage.
Capital leverage is using money to capture additional surplus value. At its
most basic, it means buying machines to replace labour whenever the
machines are more cost effective. Today the most interesting examples of
capital leverage involve the use of money to ‘roll out’ good ideas that have
already proven themselves in particular local circumstances. In effect, the
capital is used to multiply frozen knowhow captured in a particular formula.
Examples include all forms of software distribution, the rollout of fast-food
(and increasingly not-sofast- food) restaurant formulae such as McDonald’s
and the globalization of soft drinks supply.
INTELLIGENT AND LAZY
223
Summary
Rewards increasingly demonstrate the 80/20 Principle: the winners take all.
Those who are truly ambitious must aim for the top in their field.
Choose your field narrowly. Specialize. Choose the niche that is made for
you. You will not excel unless you also enjoy what you are doing.
Success requires knowledge. But success also requires insight into what
delivers the greatest customer satisfaction with the least use of resources.
Identify where 20 per cent of resources can be made to deliver 80 per cent
of returns.
Early in your career, learn all there is to be learnt. You can only do this
by working for the best firms and the best individuals within them, ‘best’
being defined with reference to your own narrow niche.
Obtain the four forms of labour leverage. First, leverage your own time.
Second, capture 100 per cent of its value by becoming self-employed.
Third, employ as many net value creators as possible. Fourth, contract out
everything that you and your colleagues are not several times better at
doing.
If you do all this, you will have built your career into a firm, your own
firm. At this stage, use capital leverage to multiply its wealth.
Multiplying money
If you are interested in a successful career, you are probably also interested
in multiplying your money. As we shall see in Chapters 14 and 15
respectively, this is both easier, and less worthwhile, than is commonly
thought.
Money,
Money, Money
To every one who has will more be given, and he will have abundance; but
from him who has not, even what he has will be taken away.
Matthew 25:29
This is another optional chapter, designed for those who have some money
and wish to know how to multiply it.
If the future is at all like the past, it is quite easy to multiply money. All
you need to do is put it in the right place and then leave it there.
Money obeys the 80/20 Principle
It is no accident that Vilfredo Pareto discovered what we now know as the
80/20 Principle when he was researching the distribution of incomes and
wealth. He found that there was a predictable and highly unbalanced
14
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
225
distribution of money. Money, it seems, dislikes being equally distributed:
! Unless redistributed by progressive taxation, incomes tend to be
unequally distributed, with a minority gaining most of aggregate income.
! Even with progressive taxation, wealth follows an even more unequal
pattern than incomes; it is even harder to make wealth equal than to make
incomes equal.
! This is because the majority of wealth is created from investment rather
than from income; and because investment returns tend to be even more
unbalanced than income returns.
! Investment creates high amounts of wealth because of the phenomenon
of compounding. For example, the value of shares may increase by 12.5 per
cent per annum, on average. This means that £100 invested in 1950 would
be worth around £22,740 today. In general, real investment returns (after
taking out the effects of inflation) are highly positive, except when inflation
is rampant.
! The compounding returns of investment are highly differential: some
investments are much better than others. This helps to explain why wealth
becomes so unequally distributed. It makes a huge amount of difference
whether you compound wealth at annual rates of, say, 5, 10, 20 or 40 per
cent. £1000 compounded over 10 years at these rates would produce,
respectively, £1629, £2593, £6191 or £28,925! For eight times the annual
return, compounding at 40 per cent produces a return nearly 18 times higher
than compounding at 5 per cent; and the results become even more skewed
the longer we go on.
Oddly enough, certain categories of investment, and certain investment
strategies, are predictably much better than others at creating wealth.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
226
80/20 insights into making money
! You are more likely to become wealthy, or to obtain the greatest
increase in wealth, from investment income rather than from employment
income. This means that there is a premium on accumulating enough money
early on to fund investment. Accumulating your stake for entry to the
investment world usually requires hard work and low spending: for a
period, net income must be higher than spending.
The only exceptions to this rule are acquisition of money from legacies or
other gifts, marrying into a wealthy family, windfalls from lotteries or other
forms of gambling, and crime. The first cannot easily be predicted, the third
is so unlikely that it should be totally discounted, the fourth is not
recommended, so only the second can be consciously planned and even
then the outcome is uncertain.
! Because of the compounding effects of investment, you can become rich
either by starting to invest early in life, or by living a long time, or both.
Starting early is the most controllable strategy.
! As early as possible, develop a consistent, long-term investment
strategy, based on principles that have worked well in the past.
How, then, do we obtain 80 per cent of investment returns with 20 per cent
of the money? The answer1 is to follow Koch’s 10 commandments of
investment, as recorded in Figure 44.
Make your investment philosophy reflect your personality
A key to successful personal investing is to match your personality and
skills to one of a number of proven techniques. Most private investors fail
because they use techniques that, while perfectly valid, are not suited to
them as individuals. The investor should choose from a menu of perhaps 10
successful strategies, to suit his or her own temperament and knowledge.
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
227
1 Make your investment philosophy reflect your
personality
2 Be proactive and unbalanced
3 Invest mainly in the stock market
4 Invest for the long term
5 Invest most when the market is low
6 If you can’t beat the market, track it
7 Build your investments on your expertise
8 Consider the merits of emerging markets
9 Cull your loss makers
10 Run your gains
Figure 44. Koch’s 10 commandments of investment
For example:
! If you like playing with numbers and are analytical, you should become
a devotee of one of the analytical methods of investment. Of these, the ones
that I like best are value investing (but see the next point), detecting
earnings acceleration and specialist investments such as warrants.
! If you veer more towards optimism than pessimism, avoid an
excessively analytical approach such as those above. The optimist often
makes a poor investor, so be sure that your investments really are beating
the index; if not, sell them and hand the money over to an index-tracking
fund.
Sometimes optimists, who in this case deserve the epithet ‘visionaries’,
make great investors, because they select two or three shares that they know
have enormous potential. But if you are an optimist, try to restrain your
enthusiasm and write down as carefully as possible why the shares you like
are so attractive. Try to be rational before you buy. And be sure to sell any
loss-making shares even if you are emotionally committed to them.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
228
! If you are neither analytical nor ‘visionary’ but a practical sort of
person, you should either specialize in an area about which you know a
great deal or follow successful investors who have a clear track record of
beating the index.
Be proactive and unbalanced
Being proactive means that you take charge of your investment decisions
yourself. The danger of advisers and money managers is not so much that
they cream off a lot of the profit, but even more that they are unlikely to
recommend or implement the sort of unbalanced portfolio that is the route
to superior returns. Risk, it is said, is minimized by having a broad spread of
investments in a wide range of different media, such as bonds, stocks, cash,
real estate, gold and collectibles. But risk minimization is overrated. If you
want to become rich enough to change your future lifestyle, you need to
attain above-average returns. The chances of doing this are much higher if
you adopt an unbalanced portfolio. This means that you should have few
investments: those that you are convinced will give high returns. And it also
means that you should invest in one medium. . .
Invest mainly in the stock market
Unless you happen to be an expert in a very esoteric investment medium,
such as nineteenth-century Chinese silk screens or toy soldiers, the best
investment medium is the stock market.
Over the long haul, investing in stocks (also called shares or equities) has
produced returns stunningly higher than putting the money in a bank or
investing in interest-bearing instruments like government or corporate
bonds. For example, I calculated in the UK that if you had invested £100
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
229
in a building society in 1950, you could have taken out £813 by 1992; but
the same £100 invested in the stock market would have returned £14,198,
more than 17 times as much.2 Similar calculations can be made for the US
and nearly every other major stock market.
Anne Scheiber, a private American investor with no particular expertise
in the stock market, put $5000 into blue-chip stocks just after the Second
World War. She then sat on them. By 1995 the $5000 had turned into $22
million: 440,000 per cent of the original!
The stock market, happily, is a relatively easy investment medium for the
non-expert.
Invest for the long term
Do not move in and out of individual stocks, or your share portfolio as a
whole, very often. Unless they are clear losers, keep your stocks for many
years. Buying and selling stocks is expensive as well as time consuming. If
you possibly can, take a 10-year view or, even better, a 20-, 30- or 50-year
view. If you put money into stocks for the short term, you are really
gambling rather than investing. If you are tempted to take the money out
and spend it, you are deferring expenditure rather than investing.
At some stage, of course, you may want to enjoy your wealth rather than
wait for your heirs to do so. The best use of wealth is usually to create a
new lifestyle where you can choose how to spend your time, to pursue a
career or work activity that you would most enjoy. Then the investment
period is over. But until you have enough money to make this shift,
continue to accumulate.
Invest most when the stock market is low
Although its value goes up over time, the stock market is cyclical, partly as
a function of the economic cycle but mainly because moods fluctuate. It is
amazing, but irrational concerns driven by fashion, animal spirits,
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
230
hope and fear can drive prices up or down. Pareto himself observed this
phenomenon:
There is a rhythm of sentiment which we can observe in ethics, in religion,
and in politics as waves resembling the business cycle. . .
Whereas during the upward trend every argument produced in order to
demonstrate that an enterprise will produce money is received with
favour; whereas such an argument will be absolutely rejected during the
downward trend . . . A man who during the downward trend refuses to
underwrite certain stocks believes himself to be guided exclusively by
reason and does ‘not know that, unconsciously, he yields to the thousand
small impressions which he receives from the daily economic news. When,
later, during the upward trend, he will underwrite those same stocks, or
similar shares offering no better chance Of success, he will again think
that he is following only the dictates of reason and will remain unaware of
the fact that his transition from distrust to trust depends on sentiments
generated by the atmosphere around him. . .
It is well known at the Stock Exchange that the public at large buys only
in a rising market and sells in a declining market. The financiers who,
because of their greater practice in this business, use their reason to a
greater extent, although they sometimes allow themselves to be swayed by
sentiment, do the opposite, and this is the main source of their gains.
During a boom period any mediocre argument to the effect that this boom
must continue has great persuasive power; and if you tried to tell man
that, after all, prices cannot continue to go up indefinitely, be sure he
would not listen to you.3
A whole school, that of value investing, has grown up around this
philosophy: buy when the stock market as a whole, or an individual share, is
low and sell when it is high. One of the most successful investors of all
time, Benjamin Graham, wrote the rule book for value investing, and his
rules have been vindicated time and time again.4
There are many rules to guide you in value investing. Simplifying greatly,
but capturing perhaps 80 per cent of their value in well under 20
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
231
per cent of the space, here are three rules to help you:
! Do not buy when everyone else is and when everyone is convinced that
the stock market can only go up. Instead, buy when everyone else is
pessimistic.
! Use the price/earnings ratio (P/E) as the best single benchmark for
deciding whether shares are expensive or cheap. The P/E of a share is its
price divided by its after-tax earnings. For example, if a share is 250 cents
and its earnings per share are 25 cents, the share is on a P/E of 10. If the
share price goes up, in a period of optimism, to 500 cents, but the earnings
per share are still 25 cents, the P/E is now 20.
! In general, a P/E of over 17 for the stock market as a whole is a danger
signal. Do not invest heavily when the market is this high. A P/E of under
12 is a buy signal; one of under 10 a definite buy signal. Your stockbroker
or a good financial newspaper should tell you what the current market
average P/E is. If asked which P/E you mean, say learnedly ‘the historic
P/E, bozo’.5
If you can’t beat the market, track it
It is quite possible to develop an investment approach that is superior to the
stock market average by following certain precepts and developing an
approach tailored to your own personality and skills. These possibilities are
explored below. But it is more likely that selecting your own investments
will lead you to performance inferior to that of the stock market indices.
In the latter case, or if you don’t even wish to experiment with your own
approach in the hope of beating the market, you should ‘track the index’.
Index tracking, also called market tracking, means buying the shares
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
232
that are in the stock market index. You then only sell shares when they drop
out of the index (this happens to underperforming shares) and you only buy
new shares when they are first included in the index.
You can track the index yourself, at the cost of some effort in following
the financial press. Alternatively, you, can put your money into a ‘tracker
fund’ run by fund managers who, for a small annual fee, will do it for you.
You can choose different funds depending on which market you choose
to track. Generally, it is safest to choose your home market and to go for a
fund tracking the index comprised of the largest and best-quality shares
(called ‘blue chips’).
Index tracking is fairly low risk and yet, over the long term, should
deliver high returns. If you decide to follow this approach, you need read no
further than these first six commandments. It can be more fun and more
rewarding, although at higher risk, to make your own selections. The next
four commandments apply in that case. Remember, however, that this
commandment requires you to go back to index tracking unless your own
investment strategy generally beats the index. If it doesn’t, cut your losses
and track the index.
Build your investments on your expertise
The whole essence of the 80/20 philosophy is to know a few things well: to
specialize.
This law applies particularly to investment. If you are deciding yourself
which shares to buy, specialize in an area in which you are a relative expert.
The great thing about specialization is that the possibilities are almost
endless. You could, for example, specialize in shares of the industry in
which you work, or of your hobby, your local area or anything else in which
you are interested. If you like shopping, for example, you might
decide to specialize in the shares of retailers. Then if you notice a new
chain springing up, where each new store seems to be full of keen
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
233
shoppers, you might want to invest in those shares.
Even if you do not start out as an expert, it may pay to specialize in a few
shares, for example those in a particular industry, so that you can learn as
much as possible about that area.
Consider the merits of emerging markets
Emerging markets are stock markets outside the developed countries: in
countries where the economy is growing fast and where the stock market is
still developing. Emerging markets include most of Asia (but not Japan),
Africa, the Indian subcontinent, South America, the ex-communist countries
of Central and Eastern Europe, and the fringes of Europe such as Portugal,
Greece and Turkey.
The basic theory is very simple. Stock market performance is highly
correlated with the growth of an economy as a whole. Therefore, invest in
countries that have the fastest current and expected GNP growth—the
emerging markets.
There are other reasons emerging markets can be very good investments.
They have the lion’s share of future privatizations and these are generally
good homes for money. The strange and sudden death of Communism
around 1990 forced many emerging countries to adopt more free-market
economic policies, which are likely to work their way through, after the
inevitable initial social disruption, into higher returns for investors. And
emerging-country shares are often very good value, because they tend to
have quite low P/E ratios. As the market develops and matures, and
individual companies become larger, the P/Es are likely to go up, boosting
the share prices considerably.
But investing in emerging markets is definitely riskier than investing at
home. The companies are younger and less stable, the whole country’s
stock market could fall as a result of political changes or reductions in
commodity prices, the currency could depreciate (and with it the value of
your shares) and you may find it much more difficult to take your money
out than you did to put it in. Also, the cost of investing in terms
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
234
of spreads and commissions is much higher than in developed markets. The
chances of getting ripped off by a market maker are much higher.
Three policies must be followed by an investor in emerging markets. One
is to invest only a small part of your total portfolio, up to 20 per cent, in
emerging markets. The second is to invest most of your emerging market
funds only when the market is relatively low and the average P/E for the
countries you are investing in is under 12. The third is to invest for the long
term and only pull money out when the P/Es are relatively high.
But, with these caveats, emerging markets are, over the long haul, likely
to outperform and it can be wise as well as fun to have some investment in
them.
Cull your loss makers
If any share falls by 15 per cent (of the price you paid), sell it. Follow this
rule rigorously and consistently.
If you want to buy it back later at a lower price, wait until the price has
stopped falling, for at least a number of days (and preferably weeks), before
you reinvest.
Apply the same 15 per cent rule to the new investment: stop the loss after
15 per cent.
The only acceptable exception to this commandment is if you are a very
long-term investor who does not want to be bothered with the swings in
markets and does not have the time to monitor investments. Those who
stayed in stocks during and after the 1929–32, 1974–5 and 1987 crashes
will have done well over the long term. Those who sold after the first 15 per
cent declines (where this was possible) and returned after the market had
risen 15 per cent from its lows would have done even better.
The key point about the 15 per cent rule is to do with individual
stocks, not with the market. If an individual stock falls by 15 per cent,
which is much more common than the market falling by the same
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
235
amount, it should be sold. Whereas few, if any, fortunes have been lost by
sticking to the stock market (or a broad portfolio of stocks) over the long
term, a large number of fortunes have been lost by mistaken loyalty to one
or a few declining stocks. For individual stocks, the best indication of the
future trend is the current one.
Run your gains
Cut your losses, but do not cut your gains. The best long-term indicator of a
great investment is a short-term gain, repeated over and over again! Resist
the temptation to take profits too early. This is where many private investors
make their worst mistakes: they take nice profits, but forfeit much fatter
ones. Nobody ever went broke by taking a profit, but many people never got
rich by following the same procedure!
There are two further 80/20 rules of investment that we have not yet
explored:
! Comparing a large number of investment portfolios held over a long
period of time, it is usually true that 20 per cent of the portfolios contain 80
per cent of the gains.
! For an individual holding a portfolio over a long period of time, 80 per
cent of the gains will usually come from 20 per cent of the investments. In a
portfolio composed exclusively of equities, 80 per cent of the gains will
come from 20 per cent of the shares held.
The reason these rules hold true is that a few investments are usually
stunningly good performers, while the majority are not. These few superstar
shares can give phenomenal returns. It is absolutely crucial, therefore, to let
the superstars stay within the portfolio throughout the process: to let the
profits ride. In the dying words of a character from one of Anita Brookner’s
novels: ‘never sell Glaxo’.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
236
It would have been easy to lock in a 100 per cent gain on IBM,
McDonald’s, Xerox or Marks & Spencer in the 1950s or 1960s, on Shell,
GE, Lonrho, BTR or the Swedish pharmaceuticals firm Astra in the 1970s,
on American Express, Body Shop or Cadbury Schweppes early in the
1980s, or on Microsoft later that decade. Investors who took these gains
would have missed out on several times that appreciation later.
Good businesses tend to produce a virtuous cycle of consistent
outperformance. Only when this momentum is reversed, which may take
several decades, should you consider selling. Again, one good rule of thumb
is not to sell unless the price falls by 15 per cent from its recent high price.
To do this, set a ‘lock-gain’ price at which you will sell, 15 per cent
below the high. A 15 per cent reduction may indicate a change in the trend.
Otherwise, continue to hold until circumstances force you to sell.
Conclusion
Money begats money. But some methods of breeding have much more
prolific results. Samuel Johnson said that a man was never so innocently
employed as when making money. His observation pitches the
accumulation of wealth, whether through investment or a successful
professional career or both, at the right moral level. Neither pursuit is to be
denigrated but, equally, neither is a guaranteed passport to serving society
or personal happiness. And both money making and professional success
carry the dangers that they become ends in themselves.
A success hangover is quite possible. Wealth creates the need to
administer it, to deal with lawyers, tax advisers, bankers and other
profoundly stimulating contacts. The logic of professional success outlined
in the preceding chapter leads almost inexorably to ever-greater
professional demands. To succeed, you must aim for the top. To get there,
you must turn yourself into a business. To obtain maximum leverage, you
must
MONEY, MONEY, MONEY
237
employ a large number of people. To maximize the value of your business,
you must use other people’s money and exploit capital leverage—to
become even larger and more profitable. Your circle of contacts expands
and the time for friends and relationships contracts. On the giddy
roundabout of success, it is easy to lose focus, perspective and personal
values. It is a perfectly rational response to say, at any stage, stop success: I
want to get off!
This is why it is sensible to stand back from careers and money making
and consider the most important subject of an: happiness.
The Seven
Habits of
Happiness
Temperament is not destiny.
Daniel Goleman1
Aristotle said that the goal of all human activity should be happiness. Down
the ages, we haven’t listened much to Aristotle. Perhaps he should have told
us how to be happier. He could usefully have started by analysing the
causes of happiness and unhappiness.
Can the 80/20 Principle really apply to happiness? I believe it can. It
appears to be true for most people that the majority of perceived happiness
occurs in a minority of the time. One 80/20 hypothesis would be that
80 per cent of happiness occurs in 20 per cent of our time. When I
have tried this hypothesis on friends and asked them to divide their weeks
into days and parts of days, or their months into weeks, or their years into
months, or their lives into years, about two-thirds of the respondents show
15
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
239
a marked pattern of imbalance, approximating to the 80/20 pattern.
The hypothesis does not work for everyone. About a third of my friends
don’t exhibit the 80/20 pattern. Their happiness is much more equally
distributed over time. What is fascinating is that this latter group seem to be
markedly happier overall that the larger group whose happiness peaks in
small amounts of their lives.
This fits in with common sense. Those who are happy with most of their
lives are more likely to be happier overall. Those whose happiness is highly
concentrated in short bursts are likely to be less happy with life overall.
It also fits in with the idea advanced throughout this book that 80/20
relationships imply waste and great scope for improvement. But, more
significantly, it suggests that the 80/20 Principle might help us to be
happier.
Two ways to be happier
! Identify the times when you are happiest and expand them as much as
possible.
! Identify the times when you are least happy, and reduce them as much
as possible.
Spend more time on the type of activities that are very effective at making
you happy and less time on other activities. Start by cutting off the ‘valleys
of unhappiness’, the things that tend to make you actively unhappy. The
best way to start being more happy is to stop being unhappy. You have
more control over this than you imagine, simply by avoiding situations
where experience suggests you are likely to become unhappy.
For activities that are very ineffective at making you happy (or effective
at making you unhappy), think systematically of ways that you could enjoy
them more. If this works, fine. If it doesn’t, think how to avoid these
situations.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
240
But aren’t people powerless to deal with
unhappiness?
You might object, particularly if you have some experience of people who
are chronically unhappy (and are often consigned to the seemingly
objective, but terribly slippery and unhelpful, category of the ‘mentally ill’,
which has perhaps brought the world more misery than most
categorizations), that this analysis is far too simplistic and assumes a degree
of control over our own happiness that, for deep-rooted psychological
reasons, many or most or all people do not have. Isn’t our capacity to be
happy largely predestined, by heredity and childhood experience? Do we
really have any control over our happiness?
There is no doubt that there are people who are temperamentally more
inclined to happiness than others. For some the glass is always half full, for
others half empty. Psychologists and psychiatrists believe that capacity for
happiness is determined by the interaction between genetics, childhood
experiences, brain chemistry and important life events. Clearly, adults can
do nothing about their genes, childhood experiences or past misfortunes in
life. It is all too easy for those inclined to evade responsibility to blame their
defeatism on forces outside their control, particularly if they are easily
overawed by medical Jeremiahs.
Happily, common sense, observation and the latest scientific evidence
all indicate that, while everyone is dealt a different hand of cards in
respect of happiness just as for every other blessing, there is a great deal
that can be done to play our hand better and to improve it during the
game of life. Adults are differently endowed with athletic ability, as a result
of genetics and the extent of training and exercise during childhood, youth
and subsequently. Yet everyone can markedly improve their fitness by
sensible, regular exercise. Similarly, we may through hereditary influences
and background be thought more or less intelligent, but everyone can train
their mind and develop it. We may be more or less inclined, through our
genes and environment, to become overweight, but healthy eating and
exercise can make most fat people considerably thinner. Why,
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
241
in principle, should our ability to become happier be any different, whatever
our starting point in terms of temperament?
Most of us have seen examples where the lives of acquaintances or
friends have been materially changed, and happiness permanently enhanced
or reduced, as a result of actions freely taken by those individuals. A new
partner, a new career, a new place to live, a new lifestyle or even a
conscious decision to adopt a different attitude to life: any of these can
make all the difference to an individual’s happiness and all of them are
under the individual’s control. Predestination is an unconvincing hypothesis
if it can be shown that only those who believe in predestination are subject
to its sway. Evidence that some people can freely change their destiny ought
to be persuasive and encourage us to emulate those exercising free will.
The freedom to be happy is at last supported by science
At last, the field of psychology and psychiatry (which, more than
economics, has deserved the epithet of the dismal science), prodded by the
findings of other scientific disciplines, is producing a more cheerful picture
consistent with our common sense and observations of life. Geneticists used
to be excessively deterministic, reducing complex human behaviour to the
whim of inherited genes. As a more enlightened geneticist, Professor Steve
Jones of University College, London, points out: ‘There have been
announcements of the discovery of single genes for manic depression,
schizophrenia and alcoholism. All have been withdrawn.’2 Now, we are told
by an eminent neuropsychiatrist, ‘the new field of psychoneuroimmunology
is telling us . . . that a human being acts as an integrated whole
. . . The evidence suggests that there is a delicate balance between what we
think and feel on a daily basis and our physical and mental health.3 In other
words, within limits, you can choose to make yourself happy or unhappy
and even to make yourself healthy or unhealthy.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
242
Sensitive dependence on initial conditions
This does not mean that we should discard earlier research about the
importance of childhood experiences (or later misfortunes). We saw in Part
One that chaos theory highlights ‘sensitive dependence on initial
conditions’. This means that early in the life of any phenomenon, chance
events and apparently small causes can cause a large deviation in the
eventual outcome.
Something analogous appears to happen in childhood, producing beliefs
about ourselves—that we are loved or unloved, intelligent or unintelligent,
highly valued or of low worth, able to take risks or constrained to obey
authority—that are then often played out through life. The initial belief,
which may be arrived at with no objective foundation whatever, acquires a
life of its own and becomes self-fulfilling. Later events—poor examination
results, a lover who leaves, failure to get the job we want, a career that
moves sideways, being fired, a setback in health—may blow us off course
and reinforce negative views about ourselves.
Putting the clock back to find happiness
So, is this a chilling world where unhappiness is the path laid out for us? I
do not think so.
The humanist Pico of Mirandola (1463–93) pointed out that human
beings are not entirely like other animals.4 All other creatures have a definite
nature that they cannot change. Humans have been given an indefinite
nature and thus the ability to mould themselves. The rest of creation is
passive; humans alone have an active nature. They were created; we could
create.
When unhappiness strikes, we can recognize what is happening to us and
refuse to accept it. We are free to change the way in which we think and act.
To invert Jean-Jacques Rousseau, man is everywhere in chains yet
everywhere can be free. We can change the way that we think about
external events, even where we cannot change them. And we can do
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
243
something more. We can intelligently change our exposure to events that
make us either happy or unhappy.
Making ourselves happy by strengthening
emotional intelligence
Daniel Goleman and other writers have contrasted academic intelligence or
IQ with emotional intelligence: ‘abilities such as being able to motivate
oneself and delay gratification; to regulate one’s moods and to keep distress
from swamping the ability to think; to empathize and to hope’.5 Emotional
intelligence is more crucial for happiness than intellectual intelligence, yet
our society places little emphasis on the development of emotional
intelligence. As Goleman aptly remarks:
Even though a high IQ is no guarantee of prosperity, prestige, or
happiness in life, our schools and our culture fixate on academic abilities,
ignoring emotional intelligence, a set of traits—some might call it
character—that also matters immensely for our personal destiny.6
The good news is that emotional intelligence can be cultivated and learnt:
certainly as a child, but also at any stage in life. In Goleman’s wonderful
phrase, ‘temperament is not destiny’: we can change our destiny by
changing our temperament. Psychologist Martin Seligman points out that
‘moods like anxiety, sadness and anger don’t just descend on you without
your having any control over them . . . you can change the way you feel by
what you think’.7 There are proven techniques for exiting feelings of
incipient sadness and depression before they become damaging to your
health and happiness. Moreover, by cultivating habits of optimism you can
help to prevent disease as well as have a happier life. Again, Goleman
shows that happiness is related to neurological processes in the brain:
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
244
Among the main biological changes in happiness is an increased activity
in a brain center that inhibits negative feelings and fosters an increase in
available energy, and a quieting of those that generate worrisome thought
. . . there is . . . a quiescence, which makes the body recover more quickly
from the biological arousal of upsetting emotions.8
Identify personal levers that can magnify positive thoughts and cut off
negative ones. In what circumstances are you at your most positive and
most negative? Where are you? Who are you with? What are you doing?
What is the weather like? Everyone has a wide range of emotional
intelligence, depending on the circumstances. You can start to build up your
emotional intelligence by giving yourself a break, by skewing the odds in
your favour, by doing the things where you feel most in control and most
benevolent. You can also avoid or minimize the circumstances where you
are at your most emotionally stupid!
Making ourselves happier by changing the
way we think about events
We have all experienced the trap of self-reinforced depression, when we
think in a gloomy and negative way and simply make things worse, so that
we can imagine no way out of the box. When we come out of the
depression, we see that the way out was always there. We can train
ourselves to break the selfreinforcing pattern of depression by simple steps,
such as seeking out company, changing our physical setting or forcing
ourselves to exercise.
There are many examples of people exposed to the worst misfortunes,
like those in concentration camps or with fatal diseases, who react in a
positive way that changes their perspective and strengthens their ability to
survive.
According to Dr Peter Fenwick, a consultant neuropsychiatrist, ‘the
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
245
ability to see silver linings in clouds is not simply Pollyannaism; it is a
healthy self-protective mechanism with a good biological basis’.9 Optimism,
it seems, is a medically approved ingredient for both success and happiness;
and the greatest motivator on earth. Hope has been defined specifically by C
P, Snyder, a psychologist at the University of Kansas, as ‘believing you
have both the will and the way to accomplish your goals, whatever they
may be’.10
Making ourselves happier by changing the
way we think about ourselves
Do you think of yourself as successful or unsuccessful? If you opt for
unsuccessful, you may be sure that there are many people who have
achieved less than you have and would be described by most people as less
successful than you are. Their perception of self-success contributes both to
their success and their happiness. Your feeling of being unsuccessful limits
your success and your happiness.
The same applies to whether you think you are happy or unhappy.
Richard Nixon ended the Vietnam War by declaring that America’s
objectives had been achieved. He was economical with the truth, but who
cared? The rebuilding of America’s self-esteem could begin. Similarly, you
can make yourself happy or unhappy just by the way that you decide to feel.
Make the choice that you want to be happy. You owe it to yourself and
you owe it to other people too. Unless you are happy, you will make your
partner and anyone else with prolonged exposure to you less happy.
Therefore you have a positive duty to be happy.
Psychologists tell us that all perceptions about happiness relate to our
sense of self-worth. A positive self-image is essential to happiness. A sense
of selfworth can and should be cultivated. You know you can do it: give up
guilt, forget about your weaknesses, focus and build on your strengths.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
246
Remember all the good things you have done, all the small and big
achievements to your credit, all the positive feedback you have ever
received. There is a lot to be said for yourself. Say it—or at least think it.
You will be amazed at the difference it makes to your relationships, your
achievements and your happiness.
You may feel that you are deceiving yourself. But in fact, by having a
negative perception of yourself you are at least as guilty of self-deception.
All the time we tell ourselves stories about ourselves. We have to: there is
no objective truth. You might as well choose positive rather than negative
stories. By doing so you will increase the sum of human happiness, starting
with yourself and radiating out to others.
Use all the willpower at your disposal to make yourself happy. Construct
the right stories about yourself—and believe them!
Making ourselves happier by
changing events
A further route to superior happiness is to change the events you encounter
in order to increase your happiness. None of us can ever have complete
control over events but we can have much more control than we think.
If the best way to start being happy is to stop being unhappy, the first
thing we should do is to avoid situations and people that tend to make us
depressed or miserable.
Making ourselves happier by changing the people we see
most
There is medical evidence that high levels of stress can be coped with
provided that we have a few excellent personal relationships. But
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
247
relationships of any kind that take up a large part of our time and are part of
the daily fabric of our lives, whether at home, at work or in our social lives,
will powerfully influence both our happiness and our health. To quote John
Cacioppo, an Ohio State University psychologist:
It’s the most important relationships in your life, the people you see day in
and day out, that seem to be crucial for your health. And the more
significant the relationship is in your life, the more it matters for your
health.11
Think about the people you see every day. Do they make you happier or
less happy? Could you change the amount of time you spend with them
accordingly?
Avoid the snake-pits
There are many situations with which each of us typically copes badly. I
have never seen the point in training people not to be scared of snakes. The
more sensible action is to avoid the jungle (or the pet shop).
What upsets us, of course, varies from person to person. I cannot stop
myself getting angry when confronted with pointless bureaucracy. I can
feel stress building up when exposed to lawyers for more than a few
minutes. I am anxious in traffic jams. I often become mildly depressed
when days go by without seeing the sun. I hate being jammed into the
same space with too many of my fellow humans. I cannot abide listening to
people making excuses and detailing problems beyond their control. If I
were to become a rush-hour commuter, working with lawyers and living
in Sweden, I am sure I would become depressed and quite possibly
top myself But I have learned to avoid, as far as practicable, such situations.
I do not commute, avoid mass transit systems in the rush hour, spend
at least a week a month in the sun, pay someone else to deal with
bureaucracy, drive around jams even if it takes longer, avoid having
anyone of a negative disposition report to me and find that my telephones
mysteriously disconnect five minutes after I am called by lawyers. As a
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
248
result of all these actions, I am significantly happier.
No doubt you have your own pressure points. Write them down: now!
Consciously engineer your life to avoid them: write down how: now! Check
each month how far you are succeeding. Congratulate yourself on each
small avoidance victory.
In Chapter 10 you identified your unhappiness islands. Analysis or
reflection on when you have been least happy very often leads to obvious
conclusions. You hate your job! You get depressed by your spouse! Or
perhaps more precisely, you hate one-third of your job, you cannot abide
being with your spouse’s friends or in-laws, you suffer mental torture from
your boss, you detest housework. Great! You’ve finally had a blinding
glimpse of the obvious. Now do something about it. . .
Daily happiness habits
After you have removed—or at least, set in motion plans to remove—the
causes of unhappiness, concentrate most energy on the positive seeking of
happiness. For this, there is no time like the present. Happiness is
profoundly existential. Happiness only exists now. Past happiness may be
remembered or future happiness planned, but the pleasure this gives can
only be experienced in the ‘now’.
What we all need is a set of daily happiness habits, similar to (and in fact
partially related to) our daily fitness or healthy eating regime. My seven
daily happiness habits are summarized in Figure 45.
One essential ingredient of a happy day is physical exercise. I always feel
good after (even if not during) exercise. Apparently this is because exertion
releases endorphins, natural anti-depressants that are similar to certain
exhilarating drugs (but with none of the dangers or expense!). Daily
exercise is an essential habit: if you don’t make it a habit, you win do it far
less often than you should. If it is a workday, I always exercise before going
to work, to ensure that my exercise time is not blown away by
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
249
1 Exercise
2 Mental stimulation
3 Spiritual/artistic stimulation/meditation
4 Doing a good turn
5 Taking a pleasure break with a friend
6 Giving yourself a treat
7 Congratulating yourself
Figure 45. Seven daily happiness habits
unexpected work pressures. If you travel a lot, ensure that you plan when
you will exercise at the same time that you order the tickets, if necessary
changing the schedule to accommodate the exercise. If you are a highpowered
executive, do not let your secretary put any meetings in the
calendar before 10 am, so that you will have plenty of time to exercise and
prepare yourself for the day ahead.
Another key component of a happy day is mental stimulation. You may
obtain this at work but, if not, ensure that there is some intellectual or
mental exercise each day. There are a huge number of ways to obtain this,
depending on your interests: crossword puzzles, certain newspapers and
magazines, reading part of a book, talking for at least 20 minutes to an
intelligent friend about an abstract topic, writing a short article or journal
entry, in fact, doing anything that requires active thought on your part
(watching television, even of the high-brow kind, does not qualify).
A third essential daily regime is spiritual or artistic stimulation. This
need not be as forbidding as it sounds: all that is required is at least half an
hour’s food for the imagination or spirit. Going to a concert, art gallery,
theatre or movie all qualify, as do reading a poem, watching the sun rise or
set, looking at the stars or attendance at any event where you are stimulated
and excited (this
can even include a ball game, race meeting, political rally, church or
park). Meditation also works well.
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
250
Daily happiness habit number four is doing something for another person
or people. This does not have to be a major work of benevolence; it can be a
random act of kindness such as paying for someone else’s parking meter or
going out of your way to direct someone. Even a brief altruistic act can have
a great effect on your spirits.
The fifth habit is to share a pleasurable break with a friend. This must be
an uninterrupted tête-à-tête lasting at least half an hour, but the form of the
occasion is up to you (a cup of coffee, a drink, a meal or a leisurely walk are
all appropriate).
Habit number six is to give yourself a treat. To prompt you each day,
write down now a list of all the pleasures in which you could indulge
yourself (don’t worry, you don’t have to show the list to anyone!). Ensure
that you chalk up at least one of these each day.
The final habit, at the end of each day, is to congratulate yourself on
having followed your daily happiness habits. Since the point is to make
yourself happy rather than unhappy, you can count a score of five or more
(including this number seven) as a success. If you haven’t notched up five
habits, but have still achieved something significant or enjoyed yourself,
congratulate yourself anyway on a day’s worthwhile living.
Medium-term stratagems for happiness
In addition to your seven happiness habits, Figure 46 distils seven short cuts
to a happy life.
Short cut number one is to maximize control over your life. Lack of
control is the root cause of much unease and uncertainty. I would rather
drive a long way round a complex city route, with which I am familiar,
than try to navigate a potentially shorter course that I do not know. Bus
drivers are more frustrated than bus conductors, and more liable to heart
attacks, not just because of the lack of exercise on the job but because
they have much more limited control over when the bus moves. Working
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
251
1 Maximize your control
2 Set attainable goals
3 Be flexible
4 Have a close relationship with your partner
5 Have a few happy friends
6 Have a few close professional alliances
7 Evolve your ideal lifestyle
Figure 46. Seven short cuts to a happy life
in the classic large bureaucracy leads to alienation because one’s working
life cannot be controlled. Self-employed people who can determine their
working hours and work scheduling are happier than employed people who
cannot.
Maximizing the proportion of your life under your own control requires
planning and often risk taking. The happiness dividends, however, should
not be underestimated.
Setting reasonable and attainable goals is the second short cut to
happiness. Psychological research has shown that we are likely to achieve
most when we have reasonably challenging but not too difficult goals.
Objectives that are too easy will leads us to be complacent, accepting
mediocre performance. But objectives that are too tough—the sort of
objectives set by those of us laden with guilt or burdened with high and
punitive expectations—are demoralizing and lead us to self-fulfilling selfperceptions
of failure. Remember that you are trying to become happier. If
in doubt, when setting yourself goals, err on the soft side. It is better for
your happiness to set soft goals and succeed than it is to set tough goals and
fail, even if the latter would have led you to objectively superior
performance. If there is a trade-off between achievement and happiness,
choose happiness.
The third short-cut is to be flexible when chance events interfere with
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
252
plans and expectations. John Lennon once remarked that life is what
happens while we’re making other plans. Our objective must be to make our
plans stick so that we happen to life rather than the other way round, but we
must be prepared for life to insert its quota of objections and diversions.
Life’s interjections should be cheerfully and playfully accepted as a
counterpoint to our plans. If possible, life’s unplanned contribution should
be incorporated into our own plan, so that it can proceed to an even higher
level. If imagination fails us here, life’s objection should be worked around
or quashed. If neither of these tactics works, we should accept what we
cannot control with grace and maturity and get on with moulding what we
can control. On no account should we let life’s objections ruffle us, or make
us angry, self-doubting or bitter.
Fourthly, develop a close relationship with a happy partner. We are
programmed to develop a close living relationship with one person. This
selection of the partner is one of the few decisions in life (one of the 20 per
cent) that will help determine whether we are happy or not. Sexual
attraction is one of the universe’s great mysteries and demonstrates an
extreme form of the 80/20 Principle: the real chemistry can occur in fleeting
seconds, so that you feel 99 per cent of the attraction in 1 per cent of the
time and you know at once that this is the person for you!12 But the 80/20
Principle should put you on your guard: danger and wasted happiness could
lie ahead. Bear in mind that there are many people with whom you could, in
theory, bond; this rush of blood to the head (or the heart) will happen again.
If you have not yet selected a partner, remember that your happiness
will be greatly influenced by the happiness of your partner. For the sake
of your happiness, as well as for love, you will want to make your partner
happy. But this is a great deal easier if your partner has, to start with, a
happy temperament and/or if he or she consciously adopts a prohappiness
daily regime (such as my happiness habits). Team up with an
unhappy partner and the odds are that you yourself will end up unhappy.
People with low self-esteem and self-confidence are a nightmare to live
with, however much mutual love abounds. If you are a very happy
person, you might just make an unhappy person happy, but it is a hell of a
THE SEVEN HABITS OF HAPPINESS
253
trick to pull. Two mildly unhappy people who are deeply in love might just,
with strong determination to be happy and a good happiness regimen,
manage to attain mutual happiness; but I would not bet on it. Two unhappy
people, even in love, will drive each other nuts. If you want to be happy,
choose to love a happy partner.
You may, of course, already have a partner who is not happy and, if so,
you will probably be seriously subtracting from your own happiness. If so,
it should be a major project for both of you to make your partner happy.
The fifth short cut is to cultivate close friendships with a few happy
friends. The 80/26 Principle predicts that most of the satisfaction you draw
from all of your friends will be concentrated in your relationship with a
small number of close friends. The principle also indicates that you are
likely to misallocate your time, spending too much with the not-so-good
friends and too little with the very good friends (although you may allocate
more time per friend to the good friends, there are more of the not-so-good
variety in most people’s friendship portfolio, so that in aggregate the not-sogood
friends take more time than the good ones). The answer is to decide
who the good friends are and give them 80 per cent of the time allocated to
friends (you should probably increase this absolute amount of time as
well).You should try to build these good friendships as much as possible,
because they will be a great source of mutual happiness. Short cut six is
similar to five: develop strong professional alliances with a small number of
people whose company you enjoy. Not all your work or professional
colleagues should become your friends; if so, you would spread your
friendship too thinly. But a few should become close friends and allies;
people whom you will go out of your way to support and who win do the
same for you. This will not only enhance your career. It will also
immeasurably enrich the pleasure you take at work; it will help to prevent
you feeling alienated at work; and it will provide a unifying link between
your work and play. This unity, too, is essential for fun happiness. The final
short cut to lasting happiness is to evolve the ltfestyle you and your
partner want. This requires a harmonious balance between your work
life, home life and social life. It means that you live where you want to
WORK LESS, EARN AND ENJOY MORE
254
work, have the quality of life that you want, have time to attend to family
and social affairs and are equally happy at work and outside it.
Conclusion
Happiness is a duty. We should choose to be happy. We should work at
happiness. And in doing so, we should help those closest to us, and even
those who just stumble across us, to share our happiness.
Part Four
Crescendo
Progress
Regained
If the misery of the poor be caused not by the laws of nature, but by our
institutions, great is our sin.
Charles Darwin1
Is the 80/20 Principle just a useful piece of knowledge, a cheap and
effective diagnostic kit to be kept handy in the home, the office and the lab?
Is it just a piece of mental software, useful but devoid of ethical content,
like a computer program? Or is there more to it than that? Can we invest the
80/20 Principle with a purpose and moral force that go beyond the
technocratic and make it an important force for good?
That the 80/20 Principle can help make corporations more profitable is
incontrovertible. This book has argued, I hope persuasively, that people can
use the 80/20 Principle to get a great deal more out of their lives, to raise
their effectiveness and happiness. Once we stake a claim to enhance
happiness, we begin also to lay a claim to moral force, since it is reasonable
that something that can enhance happiness is a force for good. But one
individual’s happiness can sometimes be bought at the expense of
16
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
258
that of another person or people. We could only claim ethical value for the
80/20 Principle if we could demonstrate that it could be used for the good of
most or all in society. The acid test, therefore, is whether we can use the
80/20 Principle to help create a better society.
I think we can, provided that we take the 80/20 Principle beyond the
merely descriptive and extend it to include action steps that are in tune with
it. My confidence that this can be done rests largely on the successful and
benign use of the 80/20 Principle in business and the belief that this type of
use can and should be extended to issues that are more important for society
than the success of any individual business enterprise.
Why society should adopt the
80/20 Principle
The 80/20 Principle has been used in business to raise effectiveness, to
boost profits and what leads to profits, in quite major ways. But what I want
us to concentrate on here is not this fact itself, but rather how such
improvements have been generated. Effectiveness has been multiplied by
giving further strength and resources to benign forces (the 20 per cent that
produce 80 per cent of profits), by identifying and stopping negative forces
(the 20 per cent of quality problems that cause 80 per cent of the defects)
and by raising the effectiveness or changing the role of the majority of weak
forces (the 80 per cent that are meant to do good things but only end up
contributing 20 per cent of the value). All of these uses have multiplied
wealth for corporations. For individuals, I have suggested using the 80/20
Principle in similar ways, to magnify happiness and effectiveness.
With imagination and practice, there is no earthly reason why we could
not do the same for the good of society as a whole, using exactly the same
methods. We will examine these possibilities shortly, after
NOTES AND REFERENCES
259
clearing away some ideological clutter. For we need to beware. It would not
advance the debate about the public good one iota, if the 80/20 Principle
were to be hijacked to bolster existing ideologies.
Is the 80/20 Principle inherently right wing?
The 80/20 Principle may appear to resonate with the arguments of the
radical right. If the universe naturally divides into a minority of powerful
forces and a majority of weak ones, and if human lives, society, business
and nature all reflect this phenomenon (as I have argued), it is but a short
hop to the crazy world of the extreme right—inequality is natural and the
engine of progress; markets are the economic analogue of evolution and
must be left untrammelled to find their own way; rule by élites is inevitable
and natural; might is right; and social engineering will always come
unstuck, because it attempts to frustrate the way the world works.
A short hop indeed; but one that involves a profound misreading of the
80/20 Principle. Let us concede what is right about the right-wing
interpretation. It is certainly good to observe what works in nature, in
business, in our own lives and in society: to see the powerful forces that
take small elements of energy and produce great returns; to multiply,
reproduce and mimic the 20 per cent that yield 80 per cent, provided that
these 20 per cent are forces for good. But the 20 per cent may equally well
be forces for bad; and the fact that they are productive forces does not
excuse or mitigate the badness.
The 80/20 Principle asserts that imbalance is natural, but not that
what is natural is right, still less that it should be left alone. The principle
draws attention to imbalance; but it does not state that the universe, or
nature, or business, or society or the way we lead our lives, is unbalanced
in any rational or functional way. Nor does it imply that the imbalance is
in any way ethical or justified. The 80/20 Principle observes that these
processes work and produce powerful results and so should be respected,
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
260
just as any powerful force, benign or malevolent, should be respected. The
whole value and force of the 80/20 Principle, and all of its practical uses in
the past 50 years, are that it highlights a state of affairs that is surprising and
suboptimal. Once the surprise is appreciated, the principle can guide us to
make major improvements on the status quo.
The 80/20 Principle wants to improve on what it
observes
At its heart, therefore, the 80/20 Principle is not just descriptive; and it does
not glorify what it describes. It is prescriptive; it observes a failure to reach
anything like an optimal state of affairs; and it points the way to great
improvements in the status quo. It is impressive that the powerful minority
of resources are so effective—but what about the majority of weak
resources? Is nature really so clever, if the majority of natural forces are so
ineffective, or when ever larger parts of the universe are put under the
domain of humans? Is business so efficient, if 80 per cent of business
activity (as measured by revenues or assets) produces only 20 per cent of
profits and cash? Are we making good use of our time, if 80 per cent of it
leads to 20 per cent of our output and happiness? And is society making the
best use of its talent when 80 per cent of its citizens produce only 20 per
cent of its valued output (measured by money or gross earnings)?
Plainly, no! And equally plainly, this is not just my interpretation of the
80/20 Principle, but precisely the way in which it has been used by practical
business people, quality engineers and strategy consultants and all other
users. The essence of the 80/20 Principle is that it wants to improve on what
it observes and is a powerful tool for so doing.
Imbalance is not efficient. Although prevalent, imbalance is neither
inevitable nor desirable. The 80/20 Principle is not a conservative,
Hegelian abstraction; it is a practical tool for making a more sensible
world. If you doubt this, look at the practical uses to which business has
put the 80/20 Principle. Business leaders who observe the principle at
work—and see that 20 per cent of products or revenues are producing
NOTES AND REFERENCES
261
80 per cent of profits and that 80 per cent are contributing only 20 per cent
of profits—do not shrug their shoulders, mutter something about Pareto, F
A Hayek, Milton Friedman and the perfection of capitalism, and pass
swiftly on to the next agenda item. No. Sensible and profit-maximizing
entrepreneurs do something to correct the imbalance. They make the really
productive 20 per cent of activities a larger proportion of the total. They
either make the unproductive activity more productive or else reduce the
call that they make on their enterprise’s resources. They use the 80/20
Principle in the pursuit of progress, to improve on reality.
Confronting 80/20 social pessimism
We need to stress the positive and life-enhancing way in which the 80/20
Principle is used in practice, because there has been a sudden upsurge of
interest in the social inequality implied in ‘the 80/20 society’, ‘the winnertake-
all society’ and related themes. An apocalyptic school of thought has
emerged which takes account of some of the characteristics of the 80/20
Principle but which implies that there is little that can be done to retard
growing social inequality It is worth evaluating these pessimistic, often
fatalistic arguments that appear to make use of the 80/20 Principle.
In the Overture (pages 9–10) and Chapter 13 (pages 206–11) we referred
to the ‘winner-take-all’ phenomenon—rewards for the top people in sport,
entertainment and the professions are becoming higher and higher, so that
the gap between the top earners and the rest is widening. This has been
documented most persuasively and fully in the US, but seems to be
happening everywhere.
There is mounting evidence that the incomes of the top 10 per cent of the
working population are rising fast, while those of the bottom 10 per cent are
rising much more slowly, or are flat. The World Economic Forum in early
1997 at Davos is said to have spent much of its time considering the
implications of this trend. One report stated:
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
262
Some US economists see the America of the future as having 20 per cent of
well educated professionals earning $75,000 to $500,000 a year to carry
out orders from the super-rich, while the remaining 80 per cent that now
have a median income of $30,000 a year will do all their dirty work and
see their living standards eroded year by year.2
A new German bestseller called The Global Trap3 also plays on the idea that
rampant inequality will bring about ‘the 20:80 society’, with only the
fortunate 20 per cent working. The book considers the assessment of a
conference of 500 leading politicians, CEOs and academics in San
Francisco in 1995 and claims that, in a global market economy, there will
be massive unemployment:
Twenty per cent of the working age population will be enough to keep the
world economy pumping in the next century. ‘More manpower just isn’t
needed,’ contends magnate Washington SyCip. One fifth of all workseekers
will be enough to produce all the goods and perform all the highvalue
services that the world economy can use. This 20 per cent will be
able to actively participate in life, work, and recreation. . .
But the rest? Eighty per cent of those willing to work without a job? A
new social order will come into being, [the experts] say: rich countries
without any middle class to speak of. No one disagrees.
I have some empathy with these seemingly bizarre predictions. In our recent
book Managing Without Management,4 Ian Godden and I devoted a chapter
to the challenge of mass managerial unemployment, in which we
commented:
The post-management corporation will need far fewer people, as a result
of a 50 per cent reduction in the number of managerial, clerical and other
overhead functions over 10 years. . . If all the eligible private sector firms
in any country become postmanagement corporations, in the absence of
countervailing effects this could result in a reduction of total employment
of around 15–20 percent. Unemployment would rise from its current US
NOTES AND REFERENCES
263
level of just under 6 percent to around 25 percent, and be heavily
concentrated within managerial ranks.
Let us summarize the ‘doom and gloom’ case associated with the 80/20
Principle or the 20:80 society. Social inequality, as observed by Vilfredo
Pareto, has always been a marked feature of society everywhere. The
twentieth century attempted to break the pattern by progressive
redistribution of income through taxation and welfare. But, as global
markets begin to recover the power that they had in the previous century,
the prevalent pattern of social inequality is back. The more power that
global markets acquire, the greater the inequality. The greater the
productive power of business, the fewer employees are needed. Free global
markets will therefore give us two great and related social problems: mass
unemployment, including the middle classes which have historically been
protected; and greater social inequality, separating the top 20 per cent from
the bottom 80 per cent.
The doomsters divide into two camps: the pessimists and the
revolutionaries. The pessimists or fatalists argue that the trends are
inevitable and that nothing much can be done about them. But the majority
of those calling attention to growing social inequality are revolutionaries.
Something, they assert, must be done to break the 80/20 pattern. The most
coherent view comes from the German authors of The Global Trap. They
argue that globalization does more harm than good, and that it can and
should be arrested: ‘Globalization is not a law of nature. The time of
universal aimlessness has to end.’
The doomsters are wrong
What are we to make of this? I believe that both pessimists and
revolutionaries are wrong in their conclusions. Much of their analysis is
correct and enlightening. But, although they allude (more or less directly) to
the 80/20 Principle, they have at best a superficial understanding of it. If
they understood the principle properly, they would see how it is possible to
have progress without revolution.
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
264
Let us deal first with the specific problems of unemployment and
inequality, and their relationship to increasingly free and global markets.
Yes, there is a danger of mass managerial unemployment, as companies
learn how to dispense with unnecessary management, and as international
competition then forces companies to lower their costs towards the best
demonstrated practice; the alternative, in the face of free markets, is to go
bust. That much is right.
But all the evidence of history is that prosperity is not a problem. Every
new technology, every new invention, every manpower-saving device,
every refinement of productive technique, every lower-cost method of
delivering goods and services—in short, every manifestation of industrial
progress—has led not just to a remorseless and cumulatively staggering
improvement in living standards for all groups in market-based societies,
but also to higher total levels of employment. In every generation since the
start of the Industrial Revolution, there have been those—the Luddites, the
population-explosion prophets of doom, the romantic neofeudalists, the
Marxists, the socialists, the fascists, the anti-capitalist greens—who have
proclaimed the limits to growth and the inability of the market system to
deliver required levels of employment. The growth of the population, the
entry (or reentry) of women into the working population, the abolition of
the peasantry and agriculture as a significant source of employment, and the
virtual disappearance of domestic servants—all these apparent harbingers of
unemployment have been absorbed into the market system. The history of
capitalism is the history of higher living standards and higher levels of
employment.
For 250 years the doomsters have consistently been proved wrong. Their
argument is that this time it really will be different, and it could be said that
they have a case. Global markets are becoming freer at an accelerating
pace. We are now learning that the way we have organized management in
the large multibusiness corporation was a mistake. We can do without huge
numbers of those employed by large companies. There will be an upsurge,
over the next 10– 20 years, in managerial unemployment.
And yet, we can and will adjust. We can retain the global market
system— and the increased prosperity that, on the whole, it brings—without
NOTES AND REFERENCES
265
having an intractable unemployment problem. Progress, in the form of
lower prices for goods already consumed, will release purchasing power for
other goods and services. Purchasing power, unless it suddenly collapses
because of a slump, will call forth its own new supply of jobs. These will
not, in the main, be in large companies. They will be in smaller companies,
in personal businesses (the single-person business or the small partnership)
and in providing services to individuals that cannot easily (or yet) be
‘marketized’ by large corporations. The progress of the global market will
enlarge existing non-global markets or create new ones.
To the extent that the private sector does not produce all the jobs needed
in the short term—and it may well not do so—we should be capable of
shifting people to do useful things in the social sector. There is no shortage
of highly and less highly skilled tasks—from education to the enhancement
of knowledge in all spheres to improvement of our cities, towns and
villages—that would enrich society. If commercial markets will not pay or
pay fully for these tasks to be performed, there is no reason why society
should not encourage them to be fulfilled in order to provide both
employment and services.
For it is not unemployment per se that is a problem in a wealthy society.
If society is rich enough—and freer markets will make it richer and richer—
unemployment, in the sense of people who want to work having nothing to
do, should never be a problem. People can be employed outside the market
economy; they will just not be paid market rates. But, unless we believe that
the wealth of society as a whole is going to dip, the failure to pay market
rates for non-commercial employment does not in itself create a problem.
The problem only arises if the distribution of wealth within society is felt to
be unfair.
The really serious issue is not unemployment or poverty,
but inequality
Growing social inequality, in societies where the overall level of wealth is
rising, is the real issue we should all be debating. It is clear that, in the
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
266
absence of redistribution of wealth, free markets imply unequal wealth; and
that increasingly free markets create increasing inequality This is happening
fastest in those countries, such as the US, the UK and parts of Asia, that
have made their markets the freest and that have increased this freedom
over time. The 80/20 Principle explains why it is happening: 80 per cent of
what is useful and valued (measured democratically by consumers free
purchases) is created by 20 per cent of the workforce. If markets are
unobstructed, rewards will be unequally distributed because value is
unequally created.
This implies that there is a trade-off between greater wealth and equality.
If we opt for the greatest wealth, there will be greater inequality. The
absolute living standards of all can still increase, but the cream will go to
the fat cats.
Markets reflect value better than any other mechanism. The right answer
to inequality is not to suppress markets and value creation, but rather to
ensure that there is more equal and universal participation in markets by all
elements in society.
We have not really explored this avenue properly. There are two obvious
places to start. One is to bring all elements of society into the market
economy: to make everyone a capitalist and an entrepreneur (someone who
uses resources in their most productive way). The other is to ensure that
everyone in society, but particularly those towards the bottom, know how
and want to make the best use of their talents.
Social entrepreneurship
Social inequality occurs in a market economy not so much because the
market produces winners and losers, but because not everyone is inside the
market economy. Those who are excluded from the market, or who only
participate in it to a limited degree, naturally fall behind.
For everyone to be inside the capitalist economy everyone must have
some assets to start with, and a reasonable prospect of acquiring more. This
is not the place to detail how this can be done, but it is eminently
NOTES AND REFERENCES
267
possible and much more cost effective than welfare payments. One way to
kickstart capitalism for everyone would be to sell government land and
buildings—every government has far more property than it needs—and
privatize other state businesses. The proceeds would then be given to all
citizens in the form of rollup funds that would be owned by the citizens but
could only be used for certain purposes (such as education, purchase of
insurance or pensions annuities, or to start a business) after certain periods
of time.
Even more important is that education should provide each new citizen
with marketable skills in an area of the individual’s choice. If necessary, the
state should fund this. The 80/20 Principle perhaps has no more important
application than in education. Since 20 per cent of expenditure or resources
produces 80 per cent of results, we need to focus on the 20 per cent of
highly effective educational methods which ensure that all young people are
able to work effectively within some part of a market economy. There is no
other way of ensuring social cohesion and continued economic progress.
The 80/20 Principle can and must be applied to
education
If we want to improve society, the best place to start is by applying the
80/20 Principle to education. There are three key elements to this:
identifying the vital few levers that lead to exceptional results;
decentralization; and competition.
The 80/20 Principle supplies the hypothesis that there are a few really
important reasons that explain superior educational performance, and that a
few approaches or methods will prove to have exceptional results. If we can
isolate the reasons and approaches, and then multiply their incidence, we
will be able to make terrific progress.
And we can do this. It is not that the research has not been done. Let’s
look at the insight that can be derived from just two studies.
One Brookings Institute study5 of 500 US high schools examined the
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
268
factors influencing student performance. There was perhaps no surprise that
the most important influence lay in the aptitude and attitude brought to the
school by the student, largely determined by family background. In the
medium term, there is a compelling need to ensure that all students come to
school with positive attitudes to learning: that they really want to learn. We
can only do this by ensuring that all families are included in the wealthgenerating,
property-owning process. In the short run, however, this is not
going to happen, and schools must work with the material they now have.
The study of 500 high schools found that, besides student aptitude and
attitude, the next most important influence was the school itself. Some
schools were dramatically better than others. And, peeling the onion further,
the study sought to explain what was different about the really good
schools. The usual explanations were examined: the money spent on the
school, teacher salaries, spend per student, class size, graduation
requirements. But these usual suspects made no difference. The really
important factors were parental control, the clarity of the school’s mission,
leadership, the school’s autonomy, and the freedom and respect enjoyed and
earned by the teachers.
Very few school systems are organized to maximize, or even encourage,
these desiderata. We could spend less public money on education, and
obtain greatly improved results, if we gave teachers and parents control of
each school. Then there is the whole question of educational methods
within the school.
And here I will mention the second study, really a series of studies,
contained in a wonderful book by Gordon Dryden and Dr Jeannette Vos,
The Learning Revolution.6 Here are some of the proven methods explained
in the book:
! In Flaxmere, New Zealand, backward 11-year-olds, who are up to five
years behind their peers, are catching up in under ten weeks, using a tape
assisted reading programme.
! In a US army trial, soldiers using techniques explained in the book to
NOTES AND REFERENCES
269
learn German achieved 661 per cent better results—more than twice the
results in one-third of the time.
! Bridley Moor High School in Redditch, UK, used accelerated learning
techniques to learn a foreign language. Under normal methods, only 11 per
cent of students scored at least 80 out of 100; under the new methods, 65
per cent did. Under normal methods, only 3 per cent got 90 out of 100 or
better; under the new methods, 38 per cent scored 90+. Thus ten times as
many scored 90+ under the new methods.
Although the Dryden and Vos book does not refer to the 80/20 Principle, it
is a glorious celebration of it. The point about the 80/20 Principle is this: do
what works best especially in those parts of life that are themselves
supremely important. There will always be a minority of methods, a
minority of practitioners, a minority of reasons and approaches that produce
overwhelmingly superior results. Identify these. Then multiply them.
Automatically, performance will not just be improved; it will be multiplied.
We can solve our educational problems, but we have to be radical. We
have to adopt what works best. And this means not only the best proven
methods, which engage the phenomenal power of students’ brains when
switched on, but also the right structures for education. There is
overwhelming evidence that this means schools must be in charge of their
own destiny. Parents and teachers in each school must be able to experiment
and must be in charge, subject only to objective performance audit. There is
one other key to improving our educational systems hugely, and that is
competition. Good schools must be able to get larger. They should also be
able to take over underperforming schools, if this is the wish of parents and
students in the latter. Bad schools must be forced to close.
Some years ago, Peter Drucker pointed out that the US is the only
major developed country with virtually no competition within the
school system. This is now changing: East Harlem, Minnesota, Iowa,
Arkansas, Ohio, Nebraska, Idaho, Utah, Massachusetts, Vermont and
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
270
Maine now all have substantial elements of choice available to students. But
most countries, including the US, do not have a predominantly competitive
school system. Until this comes, we will be short-changing our students and
our society. When it comes, the leap forward in performance will be
startling and continuous.
The underperformance has been so great, and the gap between the few
brilliant schools and the mass of mediocre schools so wide, as has that
between the few superproductive methods and the mass of normal,
unproductive methods, that the systematic application of the 80/20 Principle
to education—by using proven methods, giving parents and teachers control
and allowing competition to work its magic—will have astonishingly
beneficial results. It is a crime against humanity, and most of all against our
children, not to release this power.
The 80/20 Principle highlights universal
underperformance
I have praised the way in which markets operate and claimed that we can
have the additional prosperity that freer markets bring while also enjoying
prosperity without involuntary unemployment or greater social disharmony.
This may seem too good to be true. The reason for my confidence is
that the 80/20 Principle continually underlines how poorly we use
resources: time, money, energy, personal effort, intelligence. Paradoxically,
this poor use of resources is very good news. Because we do things so
badly on average, and because we can always find a minority of resources
that are several times more effective than the majority, we are free to do
things very much better. Markets are good because they facilitate the
transfer of low-effectiveness resources to high-effectiveness resources. But
they do not ensure that this transfer happens. That depends on knowledge,
technology and entrepreneurship. These tend to thrive more under market
than non-market conditions. Yet markets always need a shove in the
right direction. If markets produced the best possible results, continual
progress would be impossible. Progress relies on finding a better way to do
NOTES AND REFERENCES
271
everything. And that includes the way we run our free-market economy. We
can always improve on the status quo using the 80/20 Principle.
Free enterprise is not bad at using resources, but not very
good either
As the French political economist J-B Say commented around 1800, ‘the
entrepreneur shifts economic resources out of an area of lower productivity
into an area of higher productivity and greater yield., ‘This process is at the
heart of the 80/20 Principle, which points out how much room for
improvement there typically is. Today this process is called ‘arbitrage’. Free
markets create the opportunity for arbitrage, but they do not automatically
create arbitrage and it is only in the simplest arenas (such as the value of
national currencies) that arbitrage works at all pervasively or effectively.
The modern business corporation, whenever competition is allowed,
tends to increase the amount of arbitrage, as J-B Say observed of the
entrepreneur. Sadly, however, most corporate chiefs are not entrepreneurs;
and the more complex a corporation, the less likely it is to arbitrage
effectively. Corporations, particularly those in more than one line of
business (multibusiness corporations, which control the great majority of
free-market economic resources), are coalitions of many different
executives (of widely varying productivity) and many different business
segments (of highly different profitability). This is why there is now a
widespread and fast-accelerating trend towards breaking up multibusiness
corporations, whereby individual divisions of those corporations are’ spun
off’ or ‘demerged’ to create individual corporations focused on just one
business arena. These ‘spun-off’ corporations are purer because they have
just one line of business and their stock-market performance has been
exceptionally favourable, indicating the extent of value subtraction that was
going on before the spin-off.7 The weight of this prior value destruction, and
the ease of multiplying profits once the process of arbitrage is made easier
by simplification, should be no surprise to those who understand the 80/20
Principle.
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
272
The 80/20 Principle says that business does not allocate
resources very well
The process of arbitrage, of moving resources to more productive resources,
does not happen automatically, even in the freest of free-enterprise
societies. It always needs a shove in the right direction. How do you find
the direction? And what sort of shove is required?
The 80/20 Principle supplies clear answers. The direction can be defined
by isolating the few powerful forces from the many weak forces, by
disaggregating (de-averaging) the contribution being made by each relative
to the resources being used by each. If the forces are benign (contributing to
profits, for example), great leaps forward can be made by taking away
resources from the many poorly performing areas and giving more
resources to the few highly productive areas (an ‘area’ can be a product, a
customer, a channel of distribution, a group of executives or any
combination of these). In some cases, the not-very-productive areas can be
made several times more productive, either by training them to mimic the
behaviour of the productive areas or by redeploying them in new
configurations where they can be several times more productive. Finding
the direction involves looking very carefully at disaggregating performance;
it usually also involves simplification, decentralization and measurement of
performance at a low level of aggregation on a routine basis; and radical
surgery is required to reallocate resources to their best use. The shove is
towards more micro and radical solutions, where only high productivity is
rewarded by the allocation of more resources and low productivity rewarded
by depletion of resources.
Business people, like everyone else, are generally reluctant to make such
radical and simplifying changes. Radical simplification disturbs vested
interests (not least, those of the managers in charge themselves), creates
disruptive change and requires everyone to be both accountable and useful.
Most people prefer life to be quiet, stable and unaccountable. Because
markets are not automatic but work via human activity they are always
imperfect; and the larger and more complex the organization participating in
the markets, the greater the imperfection. Business organizations
have performed well, relative to non-business organizations, because
NOTES AND REFERENCES
273
there is more scope for arbitrage and because competition enforces at least
some low, minimal level of arbitrage. But it is a mistake to believe that
business people like competition. The 80/20 Principle proclaims that
markets are always imperfect, the use of resources is nearly always
seriously suboptimal and there is always great scope for intelligent
arbitrage. The arbitrage will tend to simplify and put a searchlight on the
individual performance of each resource.
So what is the message of the 80/20 Principle for the responsible right?
The question is, of course, simplistic. The right comprises conservatives,
radicals and liberals; the authoritarian and the socially libertarian. But most
of the right are united by respect for economic inequality, admiration (closet
or overt) of élites, dislike of interventionist social and economic policies
and adulation of markets and competition.
On economic inequality, the 80/20 Principle observes that it is deep
rooted but wasteful. Similarly, the principle helps to explain the prevalence
of élites and supports the view that achievement is a minority sport, but it
should also focus our attention on the failure to use all human resources
effectively. Elites are only justified if they improve the quality of life for
everyone, not just for themselves; and if they are serious about reducing
social waste. The 80/20 Principle approves of markets and sees arbitrage as
the source of great leaps forward in prosperity, but points out that most
businesses are far from efficient and that managers are not natural lovers of
either competition or arbitrage. We have not yet examined whether the
80/20 Principle should lead us to more or less interventionist policies, in
either the social or economic sphere.
Is there a left-wing interpretation of the
80/20 Principle?
If markets do not produce the optimal result and business is inherently
inefficient, as the 80/20 Principle proclaims, can the principle supply a
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
274
justification for intervention by the state in economic and social matters, in
order to prevent waste and produce the best result for all citizens?
To begin to answer this question, let us initially steer clear of economic
issues and deal briefly with social issues. Are there any insights that a
generic application of the 80/20 Principle can quickly reveal? And do they
tend to support a conservative or interventionist social policy?
The 80/20 Principle helps to beat crime
New York City has, since 1993, seen a sudden and stunning reduction in
crime. For example, in Brooklyn North, one of the most notorious areas, the
number of homicides has plummeted from 126 in 1993 to 44 in 1995: a 65
per cent reduction!8 The quality of life in the city has been transformed—a
transformation which nobody predicted, but which was deliberately
engineered. Police commissioner William Bratton identified that most crime
was committed by a small proportion of offenders and arose from a small
number of typical situations, such as young men drinking on street corners.
He initially directed a massive police effort to swamp the greatest problem
areas and to deal with the minority of offenders and situations that were
causing a majority of the problem. The policy took the form of ‘zero
tolerance’ of illegality, even of apparently minor crimes such as drinking in
the streets, public urination and graffiti. A massive but highly targeted effort
proved effective. Whether he knew it or not, Commissioner Bratton was
applying the 80/20 Principle: concentrating on the 20 per cent that caused
80 per cent of the problem, determined in this case to eradicate the 20 per
cent of pivotal offences.
The effort, like a similar one practised slightly earlier by the Mayor of
Marbella in Spain, was much more effective than anyone predicted, not just
in attacking the problem of crime in the targeted group, but also in changing
the character of the neighbourhoods affected. The concept of the tipping
point discussed in Chapter 1 helps to explain why this happened. The idea is
that, once a certain point is reached in the development of an innovation or
new practice, a small amount of additional effort can reap
NOTES AND REFERENCES
275
huge returns. While a certain amount of crime existed in the area, even if in
relatively innocuous forms such as public drinking, urination or graffiti,
behaviour gravitated towards the lowest common denominator. Cars were
vandalized, moderately law-abiding citizens committed misdemeanours and
the elderly and affluent, stayed off the streets. But once the police effort
reached the point where crime was sufficiently rare and the neighbourhood
became tolerably civilized, attitudes and behaviour suddenly shifted and the
area was transformed.
The implication for social policy is absolutely clear. Expenditure to cure
social problems that does not reach the tipping point is money down the
drain. But if a little extra effort causes the tipping point to be reached, by
putting massive effort in to deal with the 20 per cent of situations that cause
80 per cent of the problems, then the impact of each incremental amount of
money or effort is fantastic.
But what, you may ask, has this to do with the left and the right, with
conservative versus liberal politics? In fact, quite a lot. I may have cheated
slightly by dealing first with crime, one of the few social issues where the
right favours an activist approach by the state (in the form of the police). It
is clear beyond reasonable doubt that the 80/20 Principle can be used most
effectively to decrease crime. Another example is of a recent approach by
certain English police forces to target the 20 per cent of criminals who
cause 80 per cent of the crime, by simultaneous raids on the homes of the
target group. And if a focused, interventionist approach works in crime, and
can be explained by the 80/20 Principle and the tipping point, there is no
reason in essence why an interventionist approach could not be successful
in any area of social policy.
Two big buts in social intervention
There are, however, two big ‘buts’ in saying that interventionist social
programmes may be justified by the 80/20 Principle.
One ‘but’ is that the 80/20 Principle is likely to come up with
unconventional solutions. Remember the core insight of the principle: that
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
276
any problem or opportunity will have relatively few critical causes which
must be identified and dealt with in an extremely focused and determined
way. Applying this insight may contradict the stock answers of both the left
and the right.
Take the vexed issue of healthcare. The left in most countries wants to
extend the scope of healthcare: to build more hospitals, employ more
doctors and nurses and spend a higher proportion of national wealth on this
objective, if necessary funded by higher taxation. The right wants to hold or
cut taxes and ensure that subsidized healthcare is only available to those
most in need. There is little common ground in this debate and no easy way
of saying which policy is better.
But if we ask which side the 80/20 Principle would take, the answer is
neither. Two decades ago, the US Surgeon General very sensibly tried to
attribute the causes of illness and concluded that only 10 per cent of it was
attributable to medical care or its absence; and fully 50 per cent was related
to personal behaviour. Yet US budgets, under both Republicans and
Democrats, have allocated 20 times more spending to corrective medical
care than to all the programmes encouraging better nutrition, health
education, self-care medication and personal fitness.
The 80/20 Principle asserts that 20 per cent of expenditure will generate
80 per cent of desired results and vice versa. Progress depends on
identifying the 20 per cent that yields 80 per cent and the 80 per cent that
yields 20 per cent. In this case, the 20 that leads to 80 plainly includes
health education, particularly that targeted in the early stages when it can
have most effect. In the case of healthcare, as in most areas, prevention is
better and a great deal cheaper than cure; stopping disease in the early
stages is better and cheaper than stopping it later; and creating habits of
healthy living among the young, habits that are likely to endure through a
long lifetime, will do more good than almost any other form of social
expenditure.
It would be sensible to devote truly massive energies to health education
in schools, up to the tipping point where it really works, where it really
shifts behaviour. It would make sense for the state to create, supervise and
monitor programmes to ensure major steps forward in healthy
NOTES AND REFERENCES
277
eating and exercise, probably by using private-sector marketing firms and
paying them by results. We probably need fewer hospitals, fewer doctors,
and fewer nurses; and more voluntary and home-based health workers,
more nutritionists, more gyms, more fitness equipment, more parks, more
cycle lanes and high taxes on unhealthy food.
The other ‘but’ surrounds the relative performance of the
state as doer
The 80/20 Principle is relatively optimistic about social engineering. The
principle promises that unconventional solutions based on observing the 20
per cent that produces 80 per cent, and then putting massive effort behind
the 20 per cent, can deliver more for less; and that by targeting and putting
in enough resources to reach the tipping point, we can make major
improvements in any social issue. The first caveat was that the solution will
be unconventional and pragmatic, based on observing the 20 per cent that
works really well. Now it’s time for our second ‘but’, one that still causes
the left major problems: the state’s track record as a provider of services is
lamentable and far inferior to the track record of private business. With rare
exceptions (such as Britain’s National Health Service) state-provided
services always seem to be in the 80 per cent of activity delivering 20 per
cent of the value.
Why all versions of the twentieth-century mega-state
have failed
The 80/20 Principle can not only observe the poor performance of the
mega-state; it can also go some way toward explaining it. Earlier, we
criticized most private enterprise for inefficiency, since the 80/20 Principle
demonstrates how inclined most corporations, especially complex and
multibusiness corporations, are to cross-subsidize activities and to obfuscate
true levels of performance, at the level of each product, customer,
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
278
division or executive. Yet the inefficiency of the private sector is relative
and it would be churlish to deny the incredible advances in living standards
brought about by the modern business corporation. In the last 100 years,
output per worker has gone up 50 times and, were it not for the
appropriations of the state, living standards would have followed suit. The
large business corporation deserves most of the credit for this staggering
cornucopia.
State provision of services virtually guarantees the direst predictions of
the 80/20 Principle. This is because it is impossible to pin down
accountability for the value of services and very difficult to measure the
relationship between inputs and outputs even at very aggregated levels; at
disaggregated levels it becomes totally impossible. This is not because of
the wickedness or cynicism of the state providers—it is intrinsic to a system
where there is little customer choice, no need to measure performance and
no rewards for providing superior value.
All organizations, especially complex ones, are inherently, and almost
wilfully, inefficient. What makes private-sector organizations less
inefficient than their public-sector counterparts is the discipline of the
market. This has been absent from the public sector, so that poor service
providers do not perish and, even more importantly, good ones do not gain
access to new resources. The 80/20 process of arbitrage is not allowed to
operate. In the public sector, there is no point in 80/20 Analysis; it is
virtually impossible to obtain meaningful, disaggregated data on
performance and, even were it possible, no one would have any imperative
or incentive to do anything to encourage the few best-value providers and to
take resources away from the many poor-value providers. Therefore, no
great leaps forward in value are ever possible. And so, if we want to obtain
more for less, one good way to begin is to deprive the state of all its serviceprovision
functions.
The intelligent left has begun to realize this. The abolition of the state as
provider does not necessarily mean a smaller role for the state as funder; the
level of taxation and redistribution of wealth need bear no relationship at all
to the extent of state service provision. Yet in practice, there will be a
correlation. If the state does not give up most of its serviceNOTES
AND REFERENCES
279
provision functions, the revolt against taxation and poor state value is likely
to lead to lower levels of state funding. Conversely, if the state contracts out
(whether to voluntary organizations or private-sector ones, or ideally to
competition between both organizational types), it will be able to expand
the volume and value of service provision at a cost that is low enough to be
acceptable.
What does the 80/20 Principle imply about state
economic intervention?
The one major area of controversy between left and right we have not yet
examined is that of state intervention in the economy. The 80/20 Principle
does not believe in the perfection of markets, because this is tempered by
complex organizations that may operate very inefficiently. Yet
decentralized markets, where consumers are able freely to assess relative
value, offer the best spur to arbitrage and efficiency. In practice, state
intervention nearly always favours the side of the producers (who can lobby
effectively and sometimes, with varying degrees of honesty, subvert the
state, which is always also concerned about short-term employment levels)
against the interests of consumers. Anti-trust policy is the only area where
government tends to favour consumers; and even here the achievements
over two-thirds of a century are marginal at best.
The 80/20 Principle implies that arbitrage and efficiency will be best
served by the state intervening as little as possible in economic affairs. This
is in marked contrast to the value of intervention in social matters (provided
that the state does not directly offer services), where the potential for
improvement by using the 80/20 Principle is massive. Waste for society as a
whole can only be minimized by society reordering its affairs in a radical
way; and the only mechanisms whereby this can happen are political.
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
280
The 80/20 Principle asserts the potential for
terrific progress
Whether the programme implied by the 80/20 Principle belongs to the
thinking left, the radical centre or the radical right, others will have to
judge. Perhaps the 80/20 Principle can help end some of the sterile debates
between the left and the right: those based on intellectual positions rather
than vested interests. The key point about the principle is that it highlights
the huge gaps in performance inherent in all aspects of life: the lack of
balance between inputs and outputs, the way we deceive ourselves by
thinking in terms of averages and overall performance, the difference
between those few approaches that do things very well and the vast mass of
mediocrity. The 80/20 Principle is therefore inherently restless, inherently
ambitious, impatient of the status quo and immovably wedded to the idea of
progress—it asserts that we could make huge improvements to the wealth
and happiness of every individual and to the quality of society as a whole.
The 80/20 Principle therefore offers the potential for honest and
disinterested citizens to replace conventional political allegiances and start
again. The politics implied by the principle are radical, ambitious and even
mildly utopian; they favour ambitious programmes of focused social
intervention; they have no illusions about the perfection of capitalism,
corporations or markets; yet they have little or no role for the state as
provider of services and are extremely sceptical about the value of state
economic intervention. The main value of the 80/20 Principle for the public
good, as for personal and corporate good, lies in the insight it gives us into
causes and results. The insight allows us to make great strides forward.
Positive change is always possible and always disruptive. The prescriptions
of the 80/20 Principle, in public policy as elsewhere, are radical, change
seeking and performance based.
So: my answer is that the 80/20 Principle does have moral force. It
challenges us to arrange corporations (whether for profit or not for profit)
and our societies so that the maximum possible resources are given
NOTES AND REFERENCES
281
to those few parts of activity that are tremendously useful to other people;
and to ensure that the majority of resources that are currently not very
productive see a multiplication of their effectiveness.
Progress: a past, present and future fact
Why do we refuse to believe in humanity’s potential to multiply
effectiveness? In 1798 Thomas Malthus, an eccentric English cleric,
worried in his Essay on Population ‘that the power of the population is
indefinitely greater than the power in earth to produce subsistence for
man’.9 Malthus was right about the multiplication of the earth’s people, but
he could not have imagined the increases in agricultural efficiency that were
already underway. In the West we are now able to feed ourselves, yet
agriculture has gone from employing 98 per cent of the population to
employing around 3 per cent! And industry has produced quite incredible
increases in wealth and output per head, increasing productivity by 3–4 per
cent compound per annum, or an increase of 50 times output per worker.
In our own lifetimes, we have seen the quality of consumer goods raised
to levels of perfection and versatility which our grandparents could not have
imagined; witnessed whole new categories of miraculous electronic
products which have transformed both the home and the office and the
boundary between them; watched as whole nations that were devastated,
hungry and demoralized have taken themselves from the edge of destruction
to become thriving and outward-looking industrial leaders; seen most of the
nations of Europe lose their national and ideological antagonisms and a
whole new area of the world (in Asia) boot-strap its way to prosperity. All
of these achievements have used the spirit of the 80/20 Principle and many
of the most spectacular gains, in quality, electronics and computing, have
knowingly used the 80/20 Principle to transform their effectiveness.
We see all this and yet we still cannot believe in the possibility of further
dramatic progress. We imagine that we stand at the end of industry’s ability
to transform the world, that all the gains that can be made have
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
282
been made and that the most we and our children can expect is a
consolidation of current achievements. We do not believe politicians, we do
not trust industry and we have given up the habit of hope. We fear for our
jobs and believe we may be experiencing the disintegration of civilized
society.
If we accept the 80/20 Principle, we will temper these fears with a
massive dose of optimism. Believe me, speaking as an experienced strategy
consultant familiar with leading-edge ‘global’ companies, there is still
amazing scope to raise the effectiveness of industry. Yes, corporations have
done very well, absolutely and in comparison to that great twentieth-century
leech, the state organization. But no, they are currently not at all efficient or
effective and an awesome amount of improvement is possible. So
corporations are not suddenly about to stop their advances in productivity.
They are only just beginning to use information technology properly, they
have only recently rediscovered that customers and investors are more
important than their own internal management processes, they are only now
learning to compete effectively and, most important of all, they are in the
earliest stages of realizing how much waste and cost are being caused by
their complexity.
I am absolutely confident in predicting that a combination of technology
and a new determination of top executives to serve customers and investors,
at whatever cost to their management structures, will lead a few
corporations— remember that it only takes a few to prove that previous
levels of achievement can be left well behind—to such astonishing success
that, provided that markets remain tolerably free, we will marvel in 50
years’ time at the transformation in living standards wrought by our
corporations, to an even greater extent than we ought to marvel today at the
progress in the past half-century.
And whatever our corporations achieve in their current role, there is a
multiplier effect available to us, as the 80/20 Principle promises that there
always is. In this case, we can easily identify it. It towers above us, in all its
gleaming inefficiency, and it is called the state sector. Despite
privatizations, the state sector, in the broadest sense, still consumes 30–50
per cent of economic resources in most countries; in the UK, the home of
NOTES AND REFERENCES
283
privatization, it still consumes over 40 per cent. Yet the intellectual case for
state provision of services has been fatally undermined and few even on the
left believe in it. If we privatized everything, including education and police
services, but on a basis that ensured effective competition between current
and potential service suppliers, and allowed non-profits to compete on equal
terms with for-profit corporations, we would see massive and continuous
increases in value: more important than cost reduction, we would see
terrific service improvements.10 In education, for example, some schools and
teaching methods are 50 times more effective than others and information
technology is still only being used intelligently by a tiny percentage of
educators. If we remove the institutional barriers to arbitrage, to the spread
of best practice, the consequences for people’s lives, and for our economies,
are almost unimaginable. If we used the 80/20 Principle in education as
effectively as it has been used in computing, the multiplier effect would be
amazing.11
Take responsibility for progress
Put away your scepticism and your pessimism. These vices, like their
opposites, are self-fulfilling. Recover your faith in progress. Realize that the
future is already here: in those few shining examples, in agribusiness, in
industry, in services, in education, in artificial intelligence, in medical
science, in physics and indeed all the sciences, and even in social and
political experiments, where previously unimaginable targets have been
surpassed and new targets continue to fall like skittles. Remember the 80/20
Principle. Progress always comes from a small minority of people and
organized resources who demonstrate that previously accepted ceilings of
performance can become floors for everyone. Progress requires élites, but
élites who live for glory and service to society, who are willing to place
their gifts at the disposal of us all. Progress depends on information about
exceptional achievement and the diffusion of successful experiments,
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
284
on breaking down the structures erected by the mass of vested interests, on
demanding that the standards enjoyed by a privileged minority should be
available to all. Above all progress, as George Bernard Shaw told us,
requires us to be unreasonable in our demands. We must search out the 20
per cent of everything that produces the 80 per cent and use the facts we
uncover to demand a multiplication of whatever it is that we value. If our
reach must always exceed our grasp, progress requires that we grasp
whatever a minority has reached and ensure that it becomes the minimum
standard for all.
The greatest thing about the 80/20 Principle is that you do not need to
wait for everyone else. You can start to practise it in your professional and
personal life. You can take your own small fragments of greatest
achievement, happiness and service to others and make them a much larger
part of your life. You can multiply your highs and cut out most of your
lows. You can identify the mass of irrelevant and low-value activity and
begin to shed this worthless skin. You can isolate the parts of your
character, workstyle, lifestyle and relationships that, measured against the
time or energy involved, give you value many times greater than the daily
grind; and, having isolated them, you can, with no little courage and
determination, multiply them. You can become a better, more useful and
happier human being. And you can help others to do the same.
Notes and
References
Chapter 1
1 Josef Steindl (1965) Random Processes and the Growth of Firms: A
Study of the Pareto Law, London: Charles Griffin, p18.
2 Extensive research has revealed a very large number of short articles
referring to the 80/20 Principle (usually called the 80/20 Rule), but
failed to identify any books on the subject. If a book on the 80/20
Principle does exist, even if as an unpublished academic treatise,
would a reader please let me know. One recent book, although not
really about the 80/20 Principle, does draw attention to its
significance. John J Cotter’s The 20% Solution (Chichester: John
Wiley, 1995) provides in its introduction the right answer: ‘Figure
out the 20% of what you do that will contribute the most to your
success in the future, then concentrate your time and energy on that
20%’ (pxix). Cotter refers in passing to Pareto (pxxi), but neither
Pareto nor the 80/20 Principle (under any name) is mentioned outside
the introduction, and Pareto does not even appear in the index. Like
many writers, Cotter is anachronistic in attributing the 80/20
formulation itself to Pareto: ‘Vilfredo Pareto was a French-born
economist who observed 100 years ago that 20% of the factors in
most situations account for 80% of what happens (that is,
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
286
20% of a company’s customers generate 800/o of its profits). He
called it Pareto’s Law’ (pxxi). In fact, Pareto never used the
expression ‘80/20’ or anything like it. What he called his ‘law’ was
in fact a mathematical formula (given in note 4), which is some way
removed from (although the ultimate source of) the 80/20 Principle
as we know it today.
3 The Economist (1996) Living with the car, The Economist, 22 June,
P8.
4 Vilfredo Pareto (1896/7) Cours d’Economique Politique, Lausanne
University Despite the conventional mythology, Pareto did not use
the ‘80/20’ phrase in his discussion of income inequality or anywhere
else. He did not even make the simple observation that 80 per cent of
income was earned by 20 per cent of the working population,
although this conclusion could have been distilled from his far more
complex calculations. What Pareto did discover, and what greatly
excited him and his followers, was a constant relationship between
the top earners and the percentage of total incomes they enjoyed, a
relationship that followed a regular logarithmic pattern and could be
charted in a similar shape whatever time period or country was taken.
The formula is as follows. Call N the number of income earners who
receive incomes higher than x, with A and m being the constants.
Pareto found that:
log N = log A + m log x.
5 It should be stressed that this simplification was not made by Pareto
himself nor, sadly, by any of his followers for more than a
generation. It is, however, a legitimate deduction from his method,
and one that is much more accessible than any explanation Pareto
himself gave.
6 Harvard University, in particular, appears to have been a hotbed of
Pareto appreciation. Aside from Zipf’s influence in philogy, the
economic faculty demonstrated a hearty appreciation of the ‘Pareto
law’. For what is still the best explanation of this, see the article by
Vilfredo Pareto in Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol LXIII, No 2,
May 1949 (President and Fellows of Harvard College).
NOTES AND REFERENCES
287
7 For an excellent explanation of Zipf’s law, see Paul Krugman (1996)
The Self- Organizing Economy, Cambridge, Mass: Blackwell, p39.
8 Joseph Moses Juran (1951) Quality Control Handbook, New York:
McGraw-Hill, pp38–9. This is the first edition, with a mere 750
pages compared to more than 2000 in the current edition. Note that
although Juran clearly refers to the ‘Pareto principle’ and accurately
distils its significance, the first edition does not use the term 80/20 at
all.
9 Paul Krugman, op cit., note 7.
10 Malcolm Gladwell (1996) The tipping point, New Yorker, 3 June.
11 Malcolm Gladwell, ibid.
12 James Gleik (1987) Chaos: Making a New Science, New York,
Little, Brown.
13 See W Brian Arthus (1989) Competing technologies, increasing
returns, and lock-in by historical events, Economic Journal, vol 99,
March, pp l 16–31.
14 ‘Chaos theory explodes Hollywood hype’, Independent on Sunday,
30 March 1997.
15 George Bernard Shaw, quoted in John Adair (1996) Effective
Innovation, Pan Books, London, p169.
16 Quoted in James Gleik, op cit., note 12.
Chapter 2
1 Author’s calculation based on Donella H Meadows, Dennis L
Meadows and Jorgen Randers (1992) Beyond the Limits, London:
Earthscan, pp66f.
2 Author’s calculation based on Lester R Brown, Christopher Flavin
and Hal Kane (1992) London: Earthscan, p111, itself based on
Ronald V A Sprout and James H Weaver (1991) International
Distribution of Income: 1960–1987, Working Paper No 159,
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
288
Department of Economics, American University, Washington DC,
May.
3 Health Care Strategic Management (1995) Strategic planning
futurists need to be capitation-specific and epidemiological, Health
Care Strategic Management, 1 September.
4 Malcolm Gladwell (1996) The science of shopping, New Yorker, 4
November.
5 Mary Corrigan and Gary Kauppila (1996) Consumer Book Industry
Overview and Analysis of the Two Leading Superstore Operators,
Chicago, Ill: William Blair & Co.
Chapter 3
1 Joseph Moses Juran, op cit. (see Chapter 1 note 8), pp. 38–9.
2 Ronald j Recardo (1994) Strategic quality management: turning the
spotlight on strategies as well as tactical issues, National Productivity
Review, 22 March.
3 Niklas Von Daehne (1994) The new turnaround, Success, 1 April.
4 David Lowry (1993) Focusing on time and teams to eliminate waste
at Singo prize-winning Ford Electronics, National Productivity
Review, 22 March.
5 Terry Pinnell (1994) Corporate change made easier, PC User, 10
August.
6 James R Nagel (1994) TQM and the Pentagon, Industrial
Engineering, 1 December.
7 Chris Vandersluis (1994) Poor planning can sabotage
implementation, Computing Canada, 25 May.
NOTES AND REFERENCES
289
8 Steve Wilson (1994) Newton: bringing AI out of the ivory tower, AI
Expert, 1 February.
9 Jeff Holtzman (1994) And then there were none, Electronics Now, 1
July.
10 MacWeek (1994) Software developers create modular applications
that include low prices and core functions, MacWeek, 17 January.
11 Barbara Quint (1995) What’s your problem?, Information Today, 1
January
12 See Richard Koch and Ian Godden (1996) Managing Without
Management, London: Nicholas Brealey, especially Chapter 6, pp96–
109.
13 Peter Drucker (1995) Managing in a Time of Great Change, London,
Butterworth-Heinemann, pp96f.
14 Richard Koch and Ian Godden, op cit. (see note 12); see Chapter 6
and p159.
Chapter 5
1 Henry Ford (1991) Ford on Management, intr. Ronnie Lessem,
Oxford: Blackwell, pp 10, 141, 148. Reissue of Henry Ford (1922)
My Life and Work and (1929) My Philosophy of Industry.
2 Gunter Rommel (1996) Simplicity Wins, Cambridge, Mass: Harvard
Business School Press.
3 George Elliott, Ronald G Evans and Bruce Gardiner (1996)
Managing cost: transatlantic lessons, Management Review, June.
4 Richard Koch and Ian Godden, op cit. (see Chapter 3, note 12).
5 Carol Casper (1994) Wholesale changes, US Distribution Journal, 15
March.
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
290
6 Ted R Compton (1994) Using activity-based costing in your
organization, Journal of Systems Management, 1 March.
Chapter 6
1 Vin Manaktala (1994) Marketing: the seven deadly sins, Journal of
Accountancy, 1 September.
2 It is easy to forget the deliberate and successful transformation of
society that arose from the idealism and skill of a few pivotal earlytwentieth-
century industrialists, who advocated the ‘horn of plenty’
argument: that poverty, although prevalent, could be abolished. Here,
for example, is Henry Ford again: ‘The duty to abolish the more
disastrous forms of poverty and want is easily fulfilled. The earth is
so abundantly fruitful that there can be ample food, clothing, work
and leisure.’ See Henry Ford (1991) Ford on Management, intr.
Ronnie Lessem, Oxford: Blackwell, pp10, 141 and 148. I am grateful
to Ivan Alexander for showing me the draft of his new book, The
Civilized Market (1997, Oxford: Capstone) whose first chapter makes
this and many other points that I have borrowed (see note 3).
3 See Ivan Alexander (1997) The Civilized Market, Oxford: Capstone.
4 Quoted by Michael Slezak (1994) Drawing fine lines in lipsticks,
Supermarket News, 11 March.
5 Mark Stevens (1994) Take a good look at company blind spots, Star-
Tribune (Twin Cities), 7 November.
6 John S Harrison (1994) Can mid-sized LECs succeed in tomorrow’s
competitive marketplace?, Telephony, 17 January.
7 Ginger Trumfio (1995) Relationship builders: contract management,
Sales & Marketing Management, 1 February.
NOTES AND REFERENCES
291
8 Jeffrey D Zbar (1994) Credit card campaign highlights restaurants,
Sun-Sentinel (Fort Lauderdale), 10 October.
9 Donna Petrozzello (1995) A tale of two stations, Broadcasting &
Cable, 4 September.
10 Insurance agency consultant Dan Sullivan, quoted in Sidney A
Friedman (1995) Building a super agency of the future, National
Underwriter Life and Health, 27 March.
11 A large number of articles about specific businesses and industries
attest to this. For example, see Brian T Majeski (1994) The scarcity
of quality sales employees, The Music Trades, 1 November.
12 Harvey Mackay (1995) We sometimes lose sight of how success is
gained, The Sacramento Bee, 6 November.
13 The Music Trades (1994) How much do salespeople make?, The
Music Trades, 1 November.
14 Robert E Sanders (1987) The Pareto Principle, its use and abuse,
Journal of Consumer Marketing, Vol 4, Issue 1, Winter, pp47–40.
Chapter 7
1 Peter B Suskind (1995) Warehouse operations: don’t leave well
alone, IIE Solutions, 1 August.
2 2 Gary Forger (1994) How more data + less handling = smart
warehousing, Modern Materials Handling, 1 April.
3 3 Robin Field, Branded consumer products, in James Morton (ed.)
(1995) The Global Guide to Investing, London: FT/Pitman, pp471f.
4 4 Ray Kulwiec (1995) Shelving for parts and packages, Modern
Materials Handling, 1 July.
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
292
5 Michael J Earl and David F Feeny (1994) Is your CIO adding value?,
Sloan Management Review, 22 March.
6 Derek L Dean, Robert E Dvorak and Endre Holen (1994) Breaking
through the barriers to new systems development, McKinsey
Quarterly, 22 June.
7 Roger Dawson (1995) Secrets of power negotiating, Success, 1
September.
8 Orten C Skinner (1991) Get what you want through the fine art of
negotiation, Medical Laboratory Observer, 1 November.
Chapter 9
1 This phrase comes from Ivan Alexander (op cit., Chapter 2), whose
thinking on progress I have shamelessly plundered.
2 2 Ivan Alexander remarks nicely that: ‘though we are now aware that
the riches of the earth are finite, we have discovered other
dimensions of opportunity, a new compacted yet fertile space on
which business can flourish and expand. Trade, commerce,
automation, robotisation and informatics, though almost landless and
spaceless, are unbounded domains of opportunity. Computers are the
least dimensional machines mankind has yet devised.’
Chapter 10
1 Quoted in Oxford Book of Verse (1961) Oxford: Oxford University
Press, p 216.
NOTES AND REFERENCES
293
2 The best and most progressive guide to time management precepts is
Hiram B Smith (1995) The Ten Natural Laws of Time and Life
Management, London: Nicholas Brealey. Smith refers extensively to
the Franklin Corporation and rather less extensively to its Mormon
roots.
3 Charles Handy (1969) The Age of Unreason, London: Random
House, Chapter 9. See also Charles Handy (1994) The Empty
Raincoat, London: Hutchinson.
4 See William Bridges (1995) JobShift: How to Prosper in a
Workplace without Jobs, Reading, Mass: Addison-Wesley/London:
Nicholas Brealey. Bridges argues, almost persuasively, that full-time
employment by large organizations will become more the exception
than the rule, and that the word ‘job’ will revert to its original
meaning of ‘task’.
5 Roy Jenkins (1995) Gladstone, London: Macmillan.
Chapter 12
1 Donald O Clifton and Paula Nelson (1992) Play to Your Strengths,
London: Piatkus.
2 Interview with j G Ballard (1989) in Re/Search magazine (San
Francisco), October, pp21–2.
3 St Paul was probably of even greater importance to the success of
Christianity than was the historical Jesus. Paul made Christianity
Rome-friendly. Without this move, fiercely resisted by St Peter and
most of the other original disciples, Christianity would have
remained an obscure sect.
4 See Vilfredo Pareto (1968) The Rise and Fall of Elites, intr. Hans L
Zetterberg, New York: Arno Press. Originally published in 1901 in
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
294
Italian, this is a shorter and better description of Pareto’s sociology
than is his later work. The description of Pareto as the ‘bourgeois
Karl Marx’ came as a backhanded compliment in his 1923 obituary
in the socialist newspaper Avanti. It is an apt description, because
Pareto, l.ike Marx, stressed the importance of classes and of ideology
in determining behaviour.
5 Except possibly music and the visual arts. Even here, however,
collaborators may be more important than is generally
acknowledged.
Chapter 13
1 See Robert Frank and Philip Cook (1995) The Winner-Take-All
Society, New York: Free Press. Although they do not use the phrase
80/20, the authors are clearly talking about the operation of 80/20-
like laws. They deplore the waste implied by such unbalanced
rewards. See also the comment on the book in a perceptive essay in
The Economist (25 November 1995, p134), on which I have drawn
extensively in this section. The Economist article notes that in the
early 1980s Sherwin Rose, an economist at the University of
Chicago, wrote a couple of papers on the economics of superstars.
2 See Richard Koch (1995) The Financial Times Guide to Strategy,
London: Pitman, pp17–30.
3 G W F Hegel, trans. T M Knox (1953) Hegel’s Philosophy of Right,
Oxford: Oxford University Press.
4 See Louis S Richman (1994) The new worker elite, Fortune, 22
August, pp44– 50.
5 This trend is part of the ‘death of management’, whereby managers
are rendered redundant and only the ‘doers’ have a place in effective
corporations. See Richard Koch and Ian Godden, op cit. (see Chapter
3 note 12).
NOTES AND REFERENCES
295
Chapter 14
1 What follows is a highly simplified account. Those who want to take
private investment seriously are referred to Richard Koch (1994,
1997) Selecting Shares that Perform, London: Pitman.
2 Based on the BZW Equity and Gilt Study (1993) London: BZW See
Koch, ibid., p3.
3 Vilfredo Pareto, op cit.
4 See Janet Lowe (1995) Benjamin Graham, The Dean of Wall Street,
London: Pitman.
5 Besides the historic P/E, which is based on the last year’s published
earnings, there is also the prospective P/E, which is based on future
earnings as estimated by stock market analysts. If earnings are
expected to rise, the prospective P/E will be lower than the historic
P/E, thus making the shares appear cheaper. The prospective P/E
should be taken into account by experienced investors, but is also
potentially dangerous because the forecast earnings may not (and, as
a matter of fact, often do not) materialize. See Richard Koch, op cit.
(see note 1), pp. 108–12, for a detailed discussion of P/Es.
Chapter 15
1 A telling chapter heading from Daniel Goleman (1995) Emotional
Intelligence, London: Bloomsbury, p179.
2 See Dr Dorothy Rowe (1996) The escape from depression,
Independent on Sunday (London), 31 March, p14, quoting a
forthcoming book In the Blood: God, Genes and Destiny by
Professor Steve Jones (1996, London: HarperCollins).
3 Dr Peter Fenwick (1996) The dynamics of change, Independent on
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
296
Sunday (London), 17 March, p 9.
4 Ivan Alexander op cit. (see Chapter 6 note 2), Chapter 4.
5 Daniel Goleman, op cit. (see note 1), p34.
6 Ibid., p36.
7 Ibid., p246.
8 Ibid., pp6–7.
9 Dr Peter Fenwick, op cit. (see note 1), p10.
10 Quoted by Daniel Goleman, op cit. (see note 1), p 87.
11 Ibid., p179.
12 I am indebted to my friend Patrice Trequisser for pointing out this
very important manifestation of the 80/20 Principle: you can fall in
love in seconds and it can exert a dominant influence on the rest of
your life. Patrice would not accept my caveat, since he fen in love at
first sight more than a quarter of a century ago and is still very
happily married. But of course, he is French.
Chapter 16
1 Charles Darwin (1839) Voyage of the Beagle, chapter on slavery.
2 Guardian, 3 February 1997.
3 Hans-Peter Martin and Harald Schumann (1996) The Global Trap:
The Assault on Democracy and Prosperity, Reinbek bei Hamburg:
Rowohlt Verlag.
4 Richard Koch and Ian Godden, op cit. (see Chapter 3 note 12), p210.
5 Quoted in David Osborne and Ted Gaebler (1992) Reinventing
NOTES AND REFERENCES
297
Government, New York: Plume, pp 93–107.
6 Gordon Dryden and Jeannette Vos (1994) The Learning Revolution,
Aylesbury:
7 Accelerated Learning Systems, pp330–33 and 378–81. 7 See David
Sadder, Andrew Campbell and Richard Koch (1997) Breakup! Why
Large Companies Are Worth More Dead than Alive, Oxford:
Capstone.
8 The Economist (1996) Cop out, The Economist, 30 March, p56.
9 Thomas Robert Malthus (1798) An Essay on the Principles of
Population as it Affects the Future Improvements of Society. Malthus
was an eccentric English parson who comes second only to Karl
Marx in combining brilliant analysis with spectacularly wrong
predictions.
10 The idea of privatizing everything may seem naïve or extreme. What,
for example, about the army or the judiciary? This is too big a subject
to cover here. Some shrivelled organs of the state might have to
remain, but the public good, both in terms of value for money and the
rights of citizens, will be best served by having the greatest possible
number of functions run either by accountable commercial concerns
or by accountable non-profit organizations. No one has seriously
tried to test out how far this principle could be pushed in practice.
There is still a great deal of practical thinking to be done, but there
can be no doubt which direction best serves liberty and prosperity
11 See my new (1998) book, The Third Revolution, Oxford, Capstone.
Index
50/5 Principle 99–100
50/50 fallacy 2, 10
80/20 Analysis 18, 29, 30–38, 62–
73, 278
of customers 66–9
of products 62–6
uses of 35–6, 83–4
80/20 Chart 31, 33, 105
80/20 law of competition 55
80/20 Principle
applying 39–40, 85–6, 257–8, 260–
1, 275
and business 4, 11–12, 16–18, 35–6,
53–145, 258, 260–1,
271–3, 277–8, 282
and careers 181–5
and crime 274–5
and decisions 125–8, 155 defined 4,
21, 126
and education 4, 11, 36, 265, 267–
70, 283
and industry
transformation 86–8
and information
revolution 49–52
and innovation 85–6
and inventory
management 129–31
left-wing interpretation
of 273–4
and lifestyle 180–1
and marketing 108, 110–13
and money 156, 186–8, 224–37
moral force of 258, 280–1
and negotiation 134–5
and personal life 18, 36,
147– 254
and project
management 131–3
and quality 8, 46–9, 281
and relationships 191–203,
252–3
rightwing interpretation
of 259
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
300
and selling 117–22
and simplicity 91–107
and society 4, 17, 36, 257–83,
260, 265
and strategy 61–88
and time 157, 158–78
value of 260
80/20 theory of the firm 53–6
80/20 Thinking 18, 30, 38–9,
136, 1441–2, 147–54, 157
achievement 155, 159–60, 169, 188–
90, 210, 273, 284
desert islands 170
islands 170
acting 80/20 142–3
Alexander, Ivan 290, 292
allies 156, 197–202
American Express 114
Analysis, 80/20 18, 29, 30–38,
62–73, 278
arbitrage 12, 137, 271–3, 278–9, 283
Ballard, J G 194
Bratton, Willia, 274
Buffett, Warren 165, 166
business 4, 11–12, 16–18, 35–6, 53–
145, 258, 260–1, 271–3, 277–8,
282
Cacioppo, John 247
capital leverage 222
careers 181–5
rules for successful 212–22
chaos theory 13–17
and the movies 17
competition
80/20 theory of 55
theory of perfect 53
competitors 73–7
complexity 91–102, 137–8
cost of 93–4
conventional wisdom 149
Corning 98–100
cost of complexity 93–4
cost reduction 101–106
crime 274–5
customers 108–23
80/20 Analysis of 66–9
core 115–16
Darwin, Charles 257
Davos 261
decisions 125–8, 155
Deming, W Edwards 46
Drucker, Peter 52, 269
Dryden, Gordon 268. 297
education 4, 11, 36, 265, 267–70,
283
emerging markets 233–4
Emmis Broadcasting 114–15
emotional intelligence 243–4
equilibrium 55–8, 59, 140
feedback loops 15, 59
Fenwick, Dr Peter 244–5, 295–6
Filofax 130
financial markets 12
Ford, Henry 89, 91, 109
Ford, Joseph v, 20
Friedman, Milton 261
INDEX
301
Galbraith, John Kenneth 167
Gates, Bill 185, 214
Gibbon, Edward v
Gladstone, William Ewart 173
Godden, Ian 52, 262
Goleman, Daniel 238, 243–4, 295
Graham, Benjamin 230
Handy, Charles 162
happiness 155–6, 159–60,
169–71, 237, 238–54, 257–8, 260,
284
islands 170
seven habits of 248–50
happy life, seven short cuts
to 250–54
Hayek, F A 261
head office, abolition of 96
healthcare 276–7
hedonism 149–50
Hegel, G W F 213
IBM 9
imbalance 6, 10–11, 14, 21,
206–10, 259, 260–1
income, patterns of 6, 9–10,
206–10, 210–11, 224–5
index tracking 231–2
inequality 261, 263, 264,
265–6
innovation 85–6, 140
Interface 87–8
Investment, Koch’s 10
commandments of
226–36
Jones, Steve 241
Juran, Joseph Moses 8, 12, 46, 287
knowledge 215, 265
Krugman, Paul 14, 287
labour leverage 220–2
language 2
leaders 218–19
Levitt, Theodore 110
lifestyle 253–4
low-value activities,
eliminating 172–3
Malthus, Thomas 281, 297
marketing 108, 111–17
marketization 215, 265
Marx, Karl 219
mentoring 201–2
money 156, 186–8, 224–37
movies, the 80/1 principle 2,
17–18
negotiation 134–5
Nixon, Richard 245
non-linearity 14–15, 37–8, 58, 152
objectives 155, 172, 251
outsourcing 96, 222, 279
overheads 97–8
Pareto Vilfredo 6–7, 8, 13, 47, 195,
224, 230, 261, 263, 285–6
performance, measuring 106, 117,
138, 272, 278
Pitman, Sir Isaac 2
predictable non-linearity 14
THE 80/20 PRINCIPLE
302
principle of imbalance 6, 10–11, 14,
21
privatization 267, 282–3
products 112–13
80/20 Analysis of 62–6
progress 150–2, 261, 263, 265, 267,
270, 276, 280–4
project management 131–3
quality 8, 46–9, 281
Reagan, Ronald 165
Reich, Robert 214
relationships 191–203, 252–3
resources
allocating 19, 139, 270, 272–3
making more effective 20
Say, J-B 11–12, 271
segmentation 73–7, 97–8, 110
selectivity 103
Seligman, Martin 243
selling 117–22
sensitive dependence on initial
conditions 16–18, 242
Shaw, George Bernard 20, 287
simplicity 89–107
Snyder, C R 245
social entrepreneurship 266–7
social pessimism 261–3
specialization 212–15, 232–3
Spielberg, Steven 9, 207
Steindl, Josef v, 3, 285
strategy 61–88
theory of perfect competition 53
Thinking, 80/20 18, 30, 38–9, 136,
1441–2, 147–54, 157
time 157, 158–78
eccentric use of 173–5
high-value uses of 175–7
low-value uses of 175–6
time management 160–2
tipping point 16, 274–5, 279, 280
unemployment, mass
managerial 262–5
unhappiness islands 170, 248
value investing 230–1
village theory 193–4, 199
vital few and trivial many 8, 12, 46,
47, 137
Von Manstein matrix 205, 211, 217
Von Manstein, General 204
Vos, Dr Jeannette 268, 297
waste 20, 102, 274, 279
wealth, patterns of 6, 265–6
winner-take-all phenomenon 8–9,
201–6, 261–2
Yeltsin, Boris 196
Zipf, George K 7–8, 286–7